2011Accord Coupetechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/A51111/A51111OM.pdfsystems unique to your...

2011 Accord CoupeOwner’s Manual

(Unlinked)

This document does not contain hyperlinks and may be formatted for printing instead of web use. This is due to changesin content and specifications of the vehicle that happen throughout the model year. This manual will be replaced with ahyperlinked version at the end of the model year.

© 2010 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. P/N 00X31-TE0-6300AOM

AOM46997

This owner’s manual should be considered apermanent part of the vehicle and shouldremain with the vehicle when it is sold.

This owner’s manual covers all models of theAccord Coupe. You may find descriptions ofequipment and features that are not on yourparticular model.

Images throughout this owner’s manual(including the front cover) represent featuresand equipment that are available on some,but not all, models. Your particular modelmay not have some of these features.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice and withoutincurring any obligation whatsoever.

Owner’s Identif ication

POUR CLIENTS CANADIENAVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avezbesoin d’un Manuel du Conducteuren français, veuillez demander àvotre concessionnaire decommander le numéro de pièce33TE0C30

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

10/07/12 16:01:44 31TE0630_001

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your vehicle, otherproperty, or the environment.

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the Maintenance Minder shown inthe instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while itpreserves your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep inmind that your dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the manysystems unique to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfactionand will be pleased to answer any questions and concerns.

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2011 Honda Accord was a wiseinvestment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.

Introduction

i

TM

10/07/12 16:01:50 31TE0630_002

－

Event Data Recorders

This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone elseexcept as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.

Service Diagnostic RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The datacan be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It mayalso be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birthdefects or other reproductive harm.

California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention ActThe airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle may contain perchlorate materials specialhandling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/

Introduction

This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. Thesedevices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failureof any airbag system component.

WARNING:

ii

10/07/12 16:01:56 31TE0630_003

－－

－

－－

－

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

on the vehicle.preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of

three signal words: , , or .

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

These signal words mean:

Safety LabelsSafety Messages

Safety Headings

Safety SectionInstructions

A Few Words About Safety

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

iii

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

10/07/12 16:02:11 31TE0630_004

10/07/12 16:02:13 31TE0630_005

(seat belts, SRS, and child protection)

(fluid capacities and tire pressures)

(main controls)

(indicators, gauges, dashboard, and steering column)

( )

(fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading)

(engine and transmission operation)

(minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage)

(flat tire, jump starting, overheating, and fuses)

(vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls)

(warranty and contact information)

(how to order)

climate control, audio, steering wheel, security, cruise control, HomeLink , and other convenience items

Contents

............................................................Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

................................................................................................................................................Index . I

..................................................Service Information Summary . last page

...............................................................................................Your Vehicle at a Glance . 3

..........................................Instruments and Controls . 53

..............Features . 123

.......................................................................Before Driving . 283

.........................................................................................Driving . 303

.................................................Maintenance . 339

........................................Taking Care of the Unexpected . 391

..............................................Technical Information . 417

..................Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada only) . 435

..................................................................................Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) . 439

IND

EX

1

10/07/12 16:02:25 31TE0630_006

What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to loadluggage and other cargo.

How to order manuals and othertechnical literature.

A convenient reference to thesections in this manual.

A quick reference to the maincontrols in your vehicle.

Explains the purpose of eachinstrument panel indicator and gauge,and how to use the controls on thedashboard and steering column.

The proper way to start the engine,shift the transmission, and park; pluswhat you need to know if you’replanning to tow a trailer.

ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,and technical information.

A summary of the information youneed when you pull up to the fuelpump.

The Maintenance Minder showsyou when you need to take yourvehicle to the dealer for maintenanceservice. There is also a list of thingsto check and instructions on how tocheck them.

This section covers several problemsmotorists sometimes experience,and details how to handle them.

A summary of the warrantiescovering your new vehicle, and howto contact us for any reason. Refer toyour warranty manual for detailedinformation.

Important information about theproper use and care of your vehicle’sseat belts, an overview of thesupplemental restraint system, andvaluable information on how toprotect children with child restraints.

How to operate the climate controlsystem, the audio system, and otherconvenience features.

Overview of Contents

Contents

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Driver and Passenger Safety

Instruments and Controls

Features

Before Driving

Driving

Maintenance

Technical Information

Warranty and CustomerRelations(U.S. and Canada only)

Authorized Manuals(U.S. only)

Index

Service Information SummaryTaking Care of the Unexpected

2

TM

10/07/12 16:02:47 31TE0630_007

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

If equipped:


Your

Vehicle

ataG

lance

3

AUDIO SYSTEM

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

DRIVER’S FRONTAIRBAG

(P.9, 23)

(P.9, 23)

PASSENGER’S FRONTAIRBAG

CLOCKCOMPASS

MANUALTRANSMISSION

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION(P.309)

(P.306)

(P.130)

(P.138)

(P.124)

(P.246)

U.S. EX-L V6 model without navigation system (A/T) is shown.

(P.241)

INSTRUMENT PANELINDICATORS(P.55)GAUGES(P.63)

DRIVING POSITIONMEMORY SYSTEMBUTTONS

MIRROR CONTROLS

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH(P.80)

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES(P.108)

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE(P.288)

TRUNK RELEASELEVERFUEL FILL DOOR RELEASELEVER

(P.91)

(P.285)

(P.103)

(P.118) (P.165, 175, 215, 225)USB ADAPTER CABLE

(P.118)AUXILIARY INPUT JACK(P.239)

HOMELINK BUTTONS(P.253)

MOONROOF SWITCH(P.112)

(P.106)

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

10/07/12 16:02:55 31TE0630_008

＊

＊＊

＊

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.If equipped

3 :

1 :2 :


4

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR

SEAT HEATER SWITCHES

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS (P.30)

(P.74)

(P.76)

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

HORN

(P.325)

(P.257)(P.102)

(P.75, 107)

(P.315)

INTERFACE DIAL(P.181)

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS/FOG LIGHTS(P.70, 73)

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS(P.237)

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST (VSA) SYSTEMOFF SWITCH

BLUETOOTHHANDSFREELINKVOICE CONTROLBUTTONS

NAVIGATION SYSTEMVOICE CONTROLBUTTONS

PADDLE SHIFTERS(P.73) (P.69)

STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENTS

CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS(P.250)

2

2

1

3

2

2

3

2

10/07/12 16:03:03 31TE0630_009

－

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat belts. Itexplains how your airbags work. Andit tells you how to properly restraininfants and children in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 11

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 11............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 12

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 135. Fasten and Position the

.............................Seat Belts . 146. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 15.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 15...Additional Safety Precautions . 16

Additional Information About.......................Your Seat Belts . 17

..Seat Belt System Components . 17......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 18

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 19

...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 19Additional Information About

...........................Your Airbags . 21......Airbag System Components . 21

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 23

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 27How Your Side Curtain

..........................Airbags Work . 29..How the SRS Indicator Works . 29

How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 30

How the Passenger Airbag...............Off Indicator Works . 30

.............................Airbag Service . 31...Additional Safety Precautions . 32

Protecting Children General................................Guidelines . 33

All Children Must Be...............................Restrained . 33

All Children Should Sit in a.................................Back Seat . 34

The Passenger’s Front Airbag.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 34

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 36

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 36

...Additional Safety Precautions . 37Protecting Infants and Small

...................................Children . 38.......................Protecting Infants . 38

.........Protecting Small Children . 39.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 40....................Installing a Child Seat . 41

...............................With LATCH . 42.........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 44

..............................With a Tether . 46...........Protecting Larger Children . 47

...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 47..................Using a Booster Seat . 48

When Can a Larger Child Sit....................................in Front . 49

...Additional Safety Precautions . 50.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 51

...................................Safety Labels . 52

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

5

10/07/12 16:03:08 31TE0630_010

－You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbags aredesigned to supplement seat belts,not replace them. So even thoughyour vehicle is equipped with airbags,make sure you and your passengersalways wear your seat belts, andwear them properly (see page ).

Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in a backseat, not the front seat. Infants andsmall children should be restrainedin a child seat. Larger childrenshould use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder belt until they can use thebelt properly without a booster seat

(see pages ).

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual.

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse withevery additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

Engaging in mobile phoneconversation or other activities thatkeep you from paying close attention

to the road, other vehicles andpedestrians could lead to a crash.Remember, situations can changequickly, and only you can decidewhen it is safe to divert attentionaway from driving.

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance (see page ).

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed, the greater therisk, but serious injuries can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.14

33 50

347

Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Restrain All Children

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

Don’t Drink and Drive

Pay Appropriate Attention to theTask of Driving Safely

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

Control Your Speed

6

10/07/12 16:03:22 31TE0630_011

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

However, you and your passengerscan’t take full advantage of thesefeatures unless you remain sitting inthe correct position and

. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passengers.

Some features do not require anyaction on your part. These include astrong steel framework that forms asafety cage around the passengercompartment, front and rear crushzones, a collapsible steering column,and tensioners that tighten the frontseat belts in a crash.

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

always wearyour seat belts

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

7

(8)

(10)

(11)

(9)

(1)

(6)

(7)

(4)

(8)

(10)

(9) (3)(12)

(5) (7)

(2) (2)

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats and Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column(6) Seat Belts(7) Front Airbags(8) Side Airbags(9) Side Curtain Airbags(10) Door Locks(11) Automatic Front Seat Belt

Tensioners(12) Occupant Position Detection

System (OPDS) Sensors

10/07/12 16:03:30 31TE0630_012

－－－－

Your vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in all seating positions.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including:

frontal impactsside impactsrear impactsrollovers

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wear your seat belt, andmake sure you wear it properly.

Your seat belt system also includesan indicator on the instrument paneland a beeper to remind you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces and territoriesrequire you to wear seat belts.


Seat Belts

What You Should Do:

Why Wear Seat Belts

8

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

10/07/12 16:03:45 31TE0630_013

CONTINUED

Your vehicle has a supplementalrestraint system (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision (see page

for more information on howyour front airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side airbags tohelp protect the upper torso of thedriver or a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe sideimpact (see page for moreinformation on how your side airbagswork).

In addition, your vehicle has sidecurtain airbags to help protect theheads of the driver, front passenger,and passengers in the outer rearseating positions during a moderateto severe side impact (see page

for more information on howyour side curtain airbags work).

23

27

29


AirbagsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

9

10/07/12 16:03:55 31TE0630_014

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back from thesteering wheel as possible whileallowing full control of the vehicle. Afront passenger should move theirseat as far back from the dashboardas possible.

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in a severecrash, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

To do their job, airbags mustinflate with tremendous force. Sowhile airbags help save lives, theycan cause minor injuries or moreserious or even fatal injuries ifoccupants are not properlyrestrained or sitting properly.


Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearcollisions, or minor frontal or sidecollisions.

What you should do:

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

10

10/07/12 16:04:03 31TE0630_015

－

CONTINUED

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to therear as possible while allowing you tomaintain full control of the vehicle.Have a front passenger adjust theirseat as far to the rear as possible.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, adult passengers,and teenage children who are largeenough and mature enough to driveor ride in the front.

See pages for importantguidelines on how to properlyprotect infants, small children, andlarger children who ride in yourvehicle.

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors are closedand locked.

Locking the doors reduces thechance of someone being thrown outof the vehicle during a crash, and ithelps prevent passengers fromaccidentally opening a door andfalling out.

Locking the doors also helps preventan outsider from unexpectedlyopening a door when you come to astop.

See page for how to lock thedoors, and page for how the doorand trunk open monitor systemworks.

Your vehicle has a door andtrunk open indicator on the

instrument panel to indicate when aspecific door or the trunk is nottightly closed.

Your vehicle has a programmableauto door locking/unlocking feature.For more information, see page .

8061

33 50

81

Protecting Adults and Teens

Introduction Adjust the Front Seats

Close and Lock the Doors1.

2.D

riverand

Passenger

Safety

11

10/07/12 16:04:18 31TE0630_016

If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel.

Passengers with adjustable seat-backs should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.

If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you investigate whether sometype of adaptive equipment may help.

Once a seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make sure itis locked in position.

See page for how to adjust afront seat (power adjustment) andpage for a manual adjustment.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversallow at least 10 inches (25 cm)between the center of the steeringwheel and the chest. In addition toadjusting the seat, you can adjust thesteering wheel up and down, and inand out (see page ).76

93

94

On manual adjustable seats


Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

12

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

10/07/12 16:04:28 31TE0630_017

Adjust the driver’s head restraint sothe center of the back of your headrests against the center of therestraint.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

See page for how to adjust themanual adjustable seat-back, andpage for the power adjustableseat-back.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints and how the driver’sand front passenger’s active headrestraints work.Have passengers adjust their head

restraints properly as well. Tallerpersons should adjust their restraintas high as possible.

94

93

97


Adjust the Head Restraints4.D

riverand

Passenger

Safety

13

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.

10/07/12 16:04:40 31TE0630_018

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bones

take the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsand how to take care of them.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Check thatthe belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack, then check thatthe belt rests across the center ofyour chest and over your shoulder.

If a seat belt does not seem to workproperly, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

Using a seatbelt that is not working properly canresult in serious injury or death.Have your dealer check the belt assoon as possible.

This spreads the force of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.

17

Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt.


Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

5.

14

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

10/07/12 16:04:50 31TE0630_019

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and head restraints, andput on their seat belts, it is veryimportant that they continue to situpright, well back in their seats, withtheir feet on the floor, until thevehicle is safely parked and theengine is off.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured in a crashby striking interior parts of thevehicle or being struck by aninflating front airbag.

If you are pregnant, the best way toprotect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

CONTINUED


Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

Advice for Pregnant Women6.D

riverand

Passenger

Safety

15

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

10/07/12 16:05:00 31TE0630_020

When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a front passenger, adjust the seatas far back as possible.

This will reduce the risk of injuriesto both you and your unborn childthat can be caused by a crash or aninflating front airbag.

Each time you have a checkup, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canreduce the protective capability ofthe seat belt and increase thechance of serious injury in a crash.

Objects onthe covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’could interfere with the proper

operation of the airbags or bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.

If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the airbag inflates.

If a side airbag or aside curtain airbag inflates, a cupholder or other hard objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.

Improperly replacingor covering front seat-back coverscan prevent your side airbags frominflating during a side impact.


Two people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a door.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consultingyour dealer.

Additional Safety Precautions

16

10/07/12 16:05:12 31TE0630_021

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all seating positions.The front seat belts are alsoequipped with automatic seat belttensioners.

If the indicator comes on or thebeeper sounds when the driver’s seatbelt is latched and there is no frontseat passenger and no items on thefront seat, something may beinterfering with the monitoringsystem. Look for and remove:

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

Any object(s) hanging on the seator in the seat-back pocket.

Any object(s) touching the rear ofthe seat-back.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer.

The seat belt systemincludes an indicator on the

instrument panel and a beeper toremind you and your passengers tofasten your seat belts.

This system monitors the front seatbelts. If you turn the ignition switchto the ON (II) position before yourseat belt is fastened, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flash. Ifyour seat belt is not fastened beforethe beeper stops, the indicator willstop flashing but remain on.

If a front passenger does not fastentheir seat belt, the indicator willcome on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

If either the driver or a frontpassenger does not fasten their seatbelt while driving, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals.

When no one is sitting in the frontpassenger’s seat, or a child or smalladult is riding there, the indicatorshould not come on and the beepershould not sound.

Seat Belt System Components

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

17

10/07/12 16:05:24 31TE0630_022

The lap/shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page for how toproperly position the belt).

To unlock the belt, press the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockableretractor will activate. The belt willretract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockable retractor,unlatch the buckle and let the seatbelt fully retract. To refasten theseat belt, pull it out only as far asneeded.

The seat belts in all positions exceptthe driver’s have a lockable retractorthat must be activated to secure achild seat (see page ).

14

44


Lap/Shoulder Belt

18

10/07/12 16:05:32 31TE0630_023

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in position.

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully, and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. If a belt doesnot retract easily, cleaning the beltmay correct the problem (see page

). Any belt that is not in goodcondition or working properly willnot provide good protection andshould be replaced as soon aspossible.

Honda provides a limited warrantyon seat belts. See your

booklet fordetails.

The tensioners can be activatedduring a collision in which the frontairbags . In this case, theairbags would not be needed, but theadditional restraint could be helpful.

If the tensioner is activated, the SRSindicator comes on and the tensionermust be replaced.

374

HondaWarranty Information

do not deploy

CONTINUED

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners Seat Belt Maintenance


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

19

10/07/13 17:38:08 31TE0630_024

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by the dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.

The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.


20

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

10/07/12 16:05:48 31TE0630_025

CONTINUED

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Airbag System ComponentsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

21

(3)

(5)

(6)

(8)

(8) (2)(11)

(5)

(13)(14)

(10)

(4)

(16)

(16)

(7)

(15)

(14)

(9)

(1)

(4)

(12)(11) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors(12) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors Control Unit/

OPDS Sensors Control Unit(13) SRS Indicator(14) Side Curtain Airbags(15) Safing Sensor(16) Side Impact Sensors (Second)

(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors(8) Front Impact Sensors(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator(10) Side Impact Sensors (First)

(1) Driver’s Front Airbag(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag(3) Control Unit(4) Automatic Front Seat Belt

Tensioners(5) Side Airbags

10/07/12 16:05:56 31TE0630_026

Weight sensors that monitor theweight on the front passenger’sseat. If the weight is about 65 lbs(29 kg) or less (the weight of aninfant or small child), thepassenger’s front airbag will beturned off (see page ).

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, the seat belttensioners, and driver and frontpassenger seat belt use when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position.

Automatic front seat belttensioners (see page ).

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe front impact orside impact.

Sensors that can detect whether achild is in the passenger’s sideairbag path and signal the controlunit to turn the airbag off (seepage ).

Sensors that can detect whetherthe driver’s seat belt and the frontpassenger’s seat belt are latchedor unlatched (see page ).

A driver’s seat position sensor thatmonitors the distance of the seatfrom the front airbag. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force (see page

).

Two side airbags, one for thedriver and one for a frontpassenger. The airbags are storedin the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDEAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two SRS (supplemental restraintsystem) front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side curtain airbags, one foreach side of the vehicle. Theairbags are stored in the ceiling,above the side windows. The frontand rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDECURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page

).

Your airbag system includes:

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you to a possibleproblem with your airbag systemcomponents (see page ).

26

19

17

23

27

28

29

29 26


22

10/07/12 16:06:07 31TE0630_027

CONTINUED

During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,and the front airbag helps protectyour head and chest.

Although both airbags normallyinflate within a split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.

This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, sensors willdetect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration.

If the rate of deceleration is highenough, the control unit will inflatethe driver’s and front passenger’sairbags, at the time and with theforce needed.

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenturned off (see page ).

An indicator on the dashboard thatalerts you that the passenger’sfront airbag has been turned off(see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

30

30


How Your Front Airbags WorkD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

23

10/07/12 16:06:18 31TE0630_028

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.

After inflating, the front airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

The total time for inflation anddeflation is one-tenth of a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.

Only the driver’s airbag can deploy ifthere is no passenger in the frontseat, or if the advanced airbagsystem has turned the passenger’sairbag off (see page ).26


24

10/07/12 16:06:24 31TE0630_029

CONTINUED

Your front airbags are also advancedairbags. The main purpose of thisfeature is to help prevent airbag-caused injuries to short drivers andchildren or small-statured adults whoride in front.

Do not spill any liquids on orunder the seats, cover the sensors,or put any objects or metal itemsunder the front seats.

Occupants must sit upright andwear their seat belts properly.

For both advanced airbags to workproperly:

Failure to follow these instructionscould damage the sensors or preventthem from working properly.

Objects placed or pushed underthe front passenger’s seat maycause the sensor to malfunction,increasing the risk of injury in acrash.

Your vehicle is equipped with dual-stage, multiple-threshold frontairbags (SRS). During a frontal crashsevere enough to cause one or bothfront airbags to deploy, the airbagscan inflate at different rates,depending on the severity of thecrash, whether or not the seat beltsare latched, and/or other factors.Front airbags are designed tosupplement the seat belts to helpreduce the likelihood of head andchest injuries in frontal crashes.


Advanced AirbagsDual-Stage, Multiple-ThresholdFront Airbags (SRS)

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

25

10/07/12 16:06:34 31TE0630_030

Be aware that objects placed on thepassenger’s seat can also cause theairbag to be turned off.

When the passenger airbag getsturned off by the weight sensors, a‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator inthe center of the dashboard comeson (see page ).

If the weight sensors detect there isno passenger in the front seat, theairbag is automatically turned off.However, the passenger airbag offindicator in this situation will notcome on.

The passenger’s advanced frontairbag system has weight sensorsunder the seat. Although Hondadoes not encourage carrying aninfant or small child in front, if thesensors detect the weight of aninfant or small child (up to about 65lbs or 29 kg), the system willautomatically turn the passenger’sfront airbag off.

The driver’s advanced front airbagsystem includes a seat positionsensor under the seat. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force, regardless ofthe severity of the impact.

If there is a problem with the sensor,the SRS indicator will come on, andthe airbag will inflate in the normalmanner regardless of the driver’sseating position.

30


26

DRIVER’S SEAT POSITION SENSOR PASSENGER’S SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR

10/07/12 16:06:43 31TE0630_031

CONTINUED

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, sensors willdetect rapid acceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag.

Back seat passengers should notwedge objects or intentionallyforce their feet under the frontpassenger seat.

Also, make sure the floor matbehind the front passenger’s seatis hooked to the floor mat anchor(see page ). If it is not, the matmay interfere with the properoperation of the sensors andoperation of the seat.

To ensure that the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system willwork properly,

This includes:

A rear passenger pushing orpulling on the back of the frontpassenger’s seat.

Moving the front seat or seat-backforcibly back against cargo on theseat or floor behind it.

Hanging heavy items on the frontpassenger seat, or placing heavyitems in the seat-back pocket.

Moving the front seat or seat-backforcibly back against the foldedrear seat.

375


How Your Side Airbags Work

do not do anythingthat would increase or decrease theweight on the front passenger’s seat.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

27

10/07/12 16:06:55 31TE0630_032

If the side airbag off indicator comeson (see page ), have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the airbag’sdeployment path, the system willturn the airbag back on, and theindicator will go out.

There will be some delay betweenthe moment the passenger movesinto or out of the airbag deploymentpath and when the indicator comeson or goes off.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or another object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoffsystem designed primarily to protecta child riding in the front passenger’sseat.

Although Honda does not encouragechildren to ride in front, if theposition sensors detect a child hasleaned into the side airbag’sdeployment path, the airbag will shutoff.

The side airbag may also shut off if ashort adult leans sideways, or alarger adult slouches and leanssideways into the airbag’sdeployment path.

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

Objects placed on the frontpassenger seat can also cause theside airbag to be shut off.

30


Side Airbag Cutoff System

28

10/07/12 16:07:06 31TE0630_033

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, this indicatorcomes on briefly then goes off. Thistells you the system is workingproperly.

If the indicator comes on at anyother time, or does not come on at all,you should have the system checkedby your dealer. For example:

If the SRS indicator does not comeon after you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

If the indicator stays on after theengine starts.

If the impact is on the passenger’sside, the passenger’s side curtainairbag will inflate even if there are nooccupants on that side of the vehicle.

One or both side curtain airbags mayinflate in a moderate to severefrontal collision which causes thefront airbags to deploy.

To get the best protection from theside curtain airbags, occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

In a moderate to severe side impact,sensors will detect rapid accelerationand signal the control unit toinstantly inflate the side curtainairbag.

The SRS indicator alerts you to apotential problem with your airbagsystem components.

CONTINUED


How the SRS IndicatorWorks

How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

29

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

10/07/12 16:07:19 31TE0630_034

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s front airbag has beenshut off because weight sensorsdetect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less(the weight of an infant or smallchild) on the front passenger’s seat.It does there is a problemwith the airbag.

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenautomatically shut off. It doesmean there is a problem with yourside airbags.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the indicatorshould come on briefly and then gooff (see page ). If it doesn’t comeon, stays on, or comes on whiledriving without a passenger in thefront seat, have the system checked.

If the indicator comes on orflashes on and off while you drive.

If you see any of these indications,the airbag system components maynot work properly when you needthem.

57


How the Passenger Airbag OffIndicator Works

How the SideAirbag OffIndicator Works

not mean

not

30

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

U.S. Canada

U.S. Canada

Ignoring the SRS indicator canresult in serious injury or deathif the airbag systems ortensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS indicator alerts you toa possible problem.

10/07/12 16:07:30 31TE0630_035

Your airbag systems are virtuallymaintenance free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:

Any airbagthat has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. Anyseat belt tensioner that activatesmust also be replaced.

Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by an authorized dealer ora knowledgeable body shop.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer assoon as possible.

Any object hanging on the seat orin the seat-back pocket.

Any object(s) touching the rear ofthe seat-back.

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

If the indicator comes on with nofront seat passenger and no objectson the seat, or with an adult ridingthere, something may be interferingwith the weight sensors. Look forand remove:

If an adult or teenage passenger isriding in front, move the seat as farto the rear as possible, and have thepassenger sit upright and wear theseat belt properly.

Be aware that objects placed on thefront seat can cause the indicator tocome on.

If no weight is detected on the frontseat, the airbag will be automaticallyshut off. However, the indicator willnot come on.

The passenger airbag off indicatormay come on and off repeatedly ifthe total weight on the seat is nearthe airbag cutoff threshold.

CONTINUED


Airbag Service

An airbag ever inflates.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

31

10/07/12 16:07:43 31TE0630_036

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

Take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.

Even if yourairbags do not inflate, your dealershould inspect the driver’s seatposition sensor, the frontpassenger’s weight sensors, thefront seat belt tensioners, and allseat belts and their anchors wornduring a crash to make sure theyare operating properly.

If water oranother liquid soaks into a seat-back, it can prevent the side airbagcutoff system from workingproperly.

This could make thedriver’s seat position sensor or thefront passenger’s weight sensorsineffective. If it is necessary toremove or modify a front seat toaccommodate a person withdisabilities, first contact HondaAutomobile Customer Service at(800) 999-1009 in the US, orHonda Customer Relations at 1-888-9-HONDA-9 in Canada.


Do not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

The SRS indicator alerts you to aproblem.

If your vehicle has a moderate tosevere impact.

Do not expose the front passenger’sseat-back to liquid.

Do not remove or modify a frontseat without consulting yourdealer.


32

10/07/12 16:07:51 31TE0630_037

－－

－

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many adults do not knowhow to protect childpassengers.

If you have children, or ever need todrive with a child in your vehicle, besure to read this section. It beginswith important general guidelines,then presents special information forinfants, small children, and largerchildren.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, trafficcollisions are the number one causeof death of children age 12 andunder.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state,Canadian province and territoryrequires that infants and children beproperly restrained when they ride ina vehicle.

(see pages ).(see pages ).

38 4647 50

properly

All Children Must Be Restrained

Infants and small children must berestrained in an approved child seatthat is properly secured to thevehicle

Larger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride ona booster seat until the seat belt f itsthem properly

Protecting Children General Guidelines

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

33

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt anduse a booster seat if necessary.

10/07/12 16:08:01 31TE0630_038

－

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, on a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt (see page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren).

Even though your vehicle has anadvanced front airbag system thatautomatically turns the passenger’sfront airbag off under certaincircumstances (see page ), pleasefollow these guidelines:

According to crash statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in aback seat.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenage 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat. Somestates have laws restricting wherechildren may ride.

Children who ride in back are lesslikely to be injured by strikinginterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking. Also,children cannot be injured by aninflating front airbag when they ridein the back.

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

47

30

The Passenger’s Front AirbagCan Pose Serious Risks

All Children Should Sit in a BackSeat

Small ChildrenPlacing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.

Infants


34

10/07/12 16:08:14 31TE0630_039

－

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin a back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard(U.S. models) and on the front visors.Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

U.S. Models

Canadian Models


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

35

DASHBOARD

SUN VISORS

SUN VISORS

10/07/12 16:08:31 31TE0630_040

－

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or a small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards in afrontal collision, and paying closeattention to a child distracts thedriver from the important tasks ofdriving, placing both of you at risk.

Your vehicle has a back seat wherechildren can be properly restrained.If you ever have to carry a group ofchildren, and a child must ride infront:

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear the lap/shoulderbelt properly (see page ).

If a child requires close physicalattention or frequent visual contact,we strongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in a backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see pages

and ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

47

15

14

93 94

If a Child Requires CloseAttention

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren


36

10/07/12 16:08:42 31TE0630_041

－


If you are not wearing aseat belt in a crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard or aseat-back. If you are wearing aseat belt, the child can be tornfrom your arms and be seriouslyhurt or killed.

During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause serious or fatal injuries.

Children who play in vehicles canaccidentally get trapped inside.Teach your children not to play inor around vehicles. Know how tooperate the emergency trunkopener and decide if your childrenshould be shown how to use thisfeature (see page ).

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignitionswitch, and open the trunk, whichcan lead to accidental injury ordeath.

If a child wraps a looseseat belt around their neck, theycan be seriously or fatally injured.(See pages and for how toactivate and deactivate thelockable retractor.)

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates, Canadian provinces andterritories, and can be veryhazardous.

For example, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Achild left alone with the key in theignition switch can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

92

44 45


Never let two children use thesame seat belt.

Never hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child.

Lock both doors and the trunkwhen your vehicle is not in use.

Keep vehicle keys/remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.

Make sure any unused seat beltthat a child can reach is buckled,the lockable retractor is activated,and the belt is fully retracted andlocked.

Do not leave children alone in avehicle.


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

37

10/07/12 16:08:53 31TE0630_042

An infant must be properlyrestrained in a rear-facing, recliningchild seat until the child reaches theseat maker’s weight or height limitfor the seat, and the child is at leastone year old.

Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

A rear-facing child seat can be placedin any seating position in the backseat, but not in the front.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates, it can hit the back of thechild seat with enough force to kill orseriously injure an infant.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front passenger from

moving their seat as far back asrecommended, or from locking theirseat-back in the desired position.

It can also interfere with properoperation of the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system.

In any of these situations, westrongly recommend that you installthe child seat directly behind thefront passenger’s seat, move the seatas far forward as needed, and leave itunoccupied. Or, you may wish to geta smaller rear-facing child seat.

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Rear-facing Child Seat Placement

Never put arear-facing child seat in the frontseat.

Protecting Infants and Small Children

38

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death during acrash.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

10/07/12 16:09:08 31TE0630_043

CONTINUED

Many states, Canadian provinces andterritories allow a child one year ofage or older who also meets theminimum size and weightrequirements to transition from arear-facing child seat to a forwardfacing seat. Know the requirementswhere you are driving and follow thechild seat instructions. Many expertsrecommend use of a rear-facing seatup to age two, if the child’s height

and weight are appropriate for arear-facing seat.

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

We also recommend that a smallchild use the child seat until the childreaches the weight or height limitfor the seat.

We strongly recommend placing aforward-facing child seat in a backseat, not the front.

If the vehicle seat is toofar forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating airbag can strike the childwith enough force to cause veryserious or fatal injuries.

Even with advanced front airbagsthat automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off (seepage ), a back seat is the safestplace for a small child.

25

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Child Seat Placement

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s airbag can behazardous.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

39

10/07/12 16:09:19 31TE0630_044

Conventional child seats must besecured to a vehicle with a seat belt,whereas LATCH-compatible seatsare secured by attaching the seat tohardware built into the two outerseating positions in the back seat.

Since LATCH-compatible child seatsare easier to install and reduce thepossibility of improper installation,we recommend selecting this style.

When buying a child seat, you needto choose either a conventional childseat, or one designed for use withthe Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren (LATCH) system.

In seating positions and vehicles notequipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installedusing a seat belt.

Whatever type of seat you choose, toprovide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

Look for FMVSS 213 or CMVSS213 on the box.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, and be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

Rear-facing for infants, forward-facing for small children.

Selecting a Child Seat

The child seat should meetFederal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213 or Canadian MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

1.

2.

Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat

40

Placing a forward-facing childseat in the front seat can resultin serious injury or death if thefront airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible, and properly restrainthe child.

10/07/12 16:09:30 31TE0630_045

After selecting a proper child seatand a good place to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

All child seats must besecured to the vehicle with the lappart of a lap/shoulder belt or withthe LATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for CHildren) system. Achild whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

A child seat secured with a seat beltshould be installed as firmly aspossible. However, it does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side

movement can be expected andshould not reduce the child seat’seffectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly secured.

Before purchasing a conventionalchild seat, or using a previouslypurchased one, we recommend thatyou test the seat in the specificvehicle seating position or positionswhere the seat will be used.

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provideguidelines on how to properly installa child seat. A forward-facing childseat is used in all examples, but theinstructions are the same for a rear-facing child seat.

Installing a Child Seat

Properly secure the child seat tothe vehicle.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

Secure the child in the child seat.

3.

1.

2.

3.

Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

41

10/07/12 16:09:40 31TE0630_046

Make sure there are no objectsnear the anchors that couldprevent a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

Move the seat belt buckle ortongue away from the loweranchors.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:

Place the child seat on the vehicleseat, then attach the seat to thelower anchors according to thechild seat maker’s instructions.

Some LATCH-compatible seatshave a rigid-type connector asshown above.

Your vehicle is equipped withLATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for CHildren) at the outerrear seats.

The location of each lower anchor isindicated by a small button above theanchor point.

The lower anchors are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom, and are to be used only witha child seat designed for use withLATCH.

1.

2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat withLATCH


42

Rigid typeLOWER ANCHORS

BUTTON

10/07/12 16:09:53 31TE0630_047

Other LATCH-compatible seatshave a flexible-type connector asshown above.

Whatever type you have, followthe child seat maker’s instructionsfor adjusting or tightening the fit.

Lift the head restraint (see page), then route the tether strap

through the legs of the headrestraint and over the seat-back,making sure the strap is nottwisted.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchor, then tighten thestrap as instructed by the childseat maker.

Open the anchor cover.

4.

5.

6.

7.

97

8.


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

43

TETHER STRAPHOOK

Flexible type ANCHOR

ANCHORCOVER

10/07/12 16:10:02 31TE0630_048

When not using the LATCH system,all child seats must be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle and remove any slack fromthe lap portion of the belt.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inall seating positions except thedriver’s have a lockable retractorthat must be activated to secure achild seat.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked, andyou will need to repeat these steps.

1. 2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Belt


44

10/07/12 16:10:11 31TE0630_049

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle, and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.

To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat whilepulling up on the belt.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To deactivate the lockable retractorand remove a child seat, unlatch thebuckle, unroute the seat belt, and letthe belt fully retract.

4. 5.


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

45

10/07/12 16:10:19 31TE0630_050

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity to the lap/shoulder beltinstallation, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

After properly securing the childseat (see page ), lift the headrestraint, then route the tetherstrap over the seat-back andthrough the head restraint legs.

Tighten the strap according to theseat maker’s instructions.

Lift the cover, then attach thetether strap hook to the anchor,making sure the strap is nottwisted.

A child seat with a tether can beinstalled in any seating position inthe back seat, using one of theanchorage points shown above.

1.

2.

3.44

Installing a Child Seat with aTether


Using an Anchor

46

Center Position

TETHER STRAPHOOK

ANCHOR

TETHER STRAPHOOK

ANCHOROuter Position

TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS

10/07/12 16:10:30 31TE0630_051

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in a back seat on abooster seat and wear the lap/shoulder belt.

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:

Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?

Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in front.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Protecting Larger Children

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

47

Allowing a child age 12 or underto sit in front can result in injuryor death if the passenger’s frontairbag inflates.

If a child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat as farback as possible, use a boosterseat if needed, have the childsit up properly and wear theseat belt properly.

10/07/12 16:10:39 31TE0630_052

Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child’s neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’sthighs?

Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?

A child who has outgrown a forward-facing child seat should ride in aback seat and use a booster seatuntil the lap/shoulder belt fits themproperly without the booster.

If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat.

Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster seat meetsfederal safety standards (see page

) and that you follow the boosterseat maker’s instructions.

Some states, Canadian provinces andterritories also require children touse a booster seat until they reach agiven age or weight (e.g., 6 years or60 lbs). Be sure to check currentlaws in the states, provinces orterritories where you intend to drive.

3.

4.

5.

40

Using a Booster Seat


48

10/07/12 16:10:49 31TE0630_053

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in front,there are other important factors youshould consider.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see pages and ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,with or without the child sitting on abooster seat, the child should not sitin front.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly, and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenaged 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates in a moderate to severefrontal collision, the airbag can causeserious injuries to a child who isunrestrained, improperly restrained,sitting too close to the airbag, or outof position.

A side airbag also poses risks. If anypart of a larger child’s body is in thepath of a deploying side airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

If a child who uses a booster seatmust ride in front, move the vehicleseat as far back as possible and besure the child is wearing the seatbelt properly.

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of their ears areeven with the top of the vehicle’s orbooster’s seat-back. A child of thisheight should be tall enough to usethe lap/shoulder belt without abooster seat.

14 47

CONTINUED

Physical Size

Maturity

When Can a Larger Child Sit inFront


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

49

10/07/12 16:10:59 31TE0630_054

Devices intended toimprove a child’s comfort orreposition the shoulder part of aseat belt can make the belt lesseffective and increase the chanceof serious injury in a crash.

This could resultin serious neck injuries during acrash.

This couldcause very serious injuries duringa crash. It also increases thechance that the child will slideunder the belt in a crash and beinjured.


If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly and securely positioned.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

Do not put any accessories on aseat belt.Do not let a child wear a seat belt

across the neck.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the backor under the arm.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.



50

10/07/12 16:11:11 31TE0630_055

Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. Carbonmonoxide should not enter thevehicle in normal driving if youmaintain your vehicle properly andfollow the information on this page.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

With the trunk open, airflow can pullexhaust gas into your vehicle’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetrunk open, open all the windows andset the heating and cooling system/climate control system as shownbelow.

If you must sit in your parked vehiclewith the engine running, even in anunconfined area, adjust the heatingand cooling system/climate controlsystem as follows:

Select the fresh air mode.Select the mode.Turn the fan on high speed.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.

You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.

The vehicle was in a crash thatmay have damaged the underside.

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

51

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

10/07/12 16:11:21 31TE0630_056

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury or death. Read these labelscarefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read (except for the U.S.dashboard label which may beremoved by the owner), contact yourdealer for a replacement.

Canadian models

U.S. models Canadian models

U.S. models

U.S. models only

Safety Labels

52

DOORJAMBS

SUN VISORS

RADIATOR CAP

DASHBOARD

10/07/12 16:11:49 31TE0630_057

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour vehicle. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 54............................Instrument Panel . 55

..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 56.............................................Gauges . 63

....................Information Display . 64.....................................Odometer . 64...................................Trip Meter . 65..................................Fuel Gauge . 65

...................Temperature Gauge . 65Outside Temperature

...................................Indicator . 66

..........Check Fuel Cap Message . 67...............Maintenance Minder . 67

Controls Near the Steering...........................................Wheel . 68

.Windshield Wipers and Washers . 69.........Turn Signals and Headlights . 70

........................................Fog Lights . 73........Instrument Panel Brightness . 73

.................Hazard Warning Button . 74

.................Rear Window Defogger . 75........Steering Wheel Adjustments . 76

...............................Keys and Locks . 77........................Immobilizer System . 78

................................Ignition Switch . 79......................................Door Locks . 80

.Auto Door Locking/Unlocking . 81.......................Remote Transmitter . 87

................................................Trunk . 91........Emergency Trunk Opener . 92

.................................................Seats . 93Driver’s Seat Power

............................Adjustments . 93Front Seat Manual

............................Adjustments . 94Driver’s Seat Manual Height

..............................Adjustment . 95

........................................Armrest . 95........................Rear Seat Access . 95

..........................Head Restraints . 97.....................Folding Rear Seat . 100

..................................Seat Heaters . 102Driving Position Memory

........................................System . 103...........................................Mirrors . 106

............................Power Windows . 108.......................................Moonroof . 112

...............................Parking Brake . 114.........Interior Convenience Items . 115

..................................Glove Box . 116.....................Beverage Holders . 116

.............Console Compartment . 117........Accessory Power Sockets . 118

...................................Sun Visor . 119............................Vanity Mirror . 119

....................Sunglasses Holder . 119..................................Coat Hook . 120

...........................Center Pocket . 120...............................Interior Lights . 121..............................Ceiling Light . 121

...................................Spotlights . 121........................Courtesy Lights . 122

Instruments and Controls

Instruments

andC

ontrols

53

TM

10/07/12 16:11:53 31TE0630_058

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

If equipped:

Control Locations

54

AUDIO SYSTEM

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

CLOCKCOMPASS

MANUALTRANSMISSION

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION(P.309)

(P.306)

(P.130)

(P.138)

(P.124)

(P.246)

U.S. EX-L V6 model without navigation system (A/T) is shown.

(P.241)

INSTRUMENT PANELINDICATORS(P.55)GAUGES(P.63)

DRIVING POSITIONMEMORY SYSTEMBUTTONS

MIRROR CONTROLS

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH(P.80)

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES(P.108)

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE(P.288)

TRUNK RELEASELEVERFUEL FILL DOOR RELEASELEVER

(P.91)

(P.285)

(P.103)

(P.118) (P.165, 175, 215, 225)USB ADAPTER CABLE

(P.118)AUXILIARY INPUT JACK(P.239)

HOMELINK BUTTONS(P.253)

MOONROOF SWITCH(P.112)

(P.106)

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

10/07/12 16:12:01 31TE0630_059

＊

＊

＊

If equippedThe U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.

:

Instrument Panel

Instruments

andC

ontrols

55

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM(ABS) INDICATOR

LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P.60)

(P.61)MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

(P.62)

(P.61)

(P.58)

(P.58)

FOG LIGHT INDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMINDICATOR

SEAT BELT REMINDER INDICATOR

SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

(P.57)

(P.56)

(P.57)

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS INDICATOR

DOOR AND TRUNK OPEN INDICATOR

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR

(P.61)

(P.60)

(P.60)

(P.57, 407)

VSA OFF INDICATOR(P.62)

FUEL ECONOMYINDICATOR (P.59)

U.S. EX-L V6 model with automatic transmission is shown.

CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR(P.56, 405)

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM(TPMS) INDICATOR(P.59)

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMINDICATOR

LOW TIREPRESSUREINDICATOR(P.59)

LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)SYSTEM INDICATOR

(P.56, 405)

(P.406)

(P.62)

CRUISE MAININDICATOR(P.62)

(P.62)

CRUISE CONTROLINDICATOR

LOW FUELINDICATOR(P.60)

10/07/12 16:12:12 31TE0630_060

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your vehicle.

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. It reminds you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.A beeper also sounds if you have notfastened your seat belt.

If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before fasteningyour seat belt, the beeper soundsand the indicator flashes. If you donot fasten your seat belt before thebeeper stops, the indicator stopsflashing but remains on.

If your front passenger does notfasten their seat belt, the indicatorcomes on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

If either of you do not fasten yourseat belt while driving, the beeperwill sound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals. For moreinformation, see page .

See page .

The engine can be severely damagedif this indicator flashes or stays onwhen the engine is running. Formore information, see page .

If this indicator comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For more information,see page .

17

406

405

405

Instrument Panel Indicators

Seat Belt ReminderIndicator

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

56

10/07/12 16:12:24 31TE0630_061

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. If it comes on atany other time, it indicates that thepassenger’s side airbag hasautomatically shut off. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator has two functions:

It comes on when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. It is a reminder to checkthe parking brake. A beepersounds if you drive with theparking brake not fully released.Driving with the parking brake notfully released can damage thebrakes and tires.

If it stays on after you have fullyreleased the parking brake whilethe engine is running, or if itcomes on while driving, therecould be a problem with the brakesystem. For more information, seepage .

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. If it comes on atany other time, it indicates apotential problem with your frontairbags. This indicator will also alertyou to a potential problem with yourairbag system components. Formore information, see page .

1.

2.

30

407

29

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

Parking Brake andBrake SystemIndicator

Side Airbag OffIndicator


Instruments

andC

ontrols

57

U.S. Canada U.S. Canada

10/07/12 16:12:35 31TE0630_062

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on at any othertime, there is a problem with theABS. If this happens, have yourvehicle checked at a dealer. Withthis indicator on, your vehicle stillhas normal braking ability but noanti-lock function. For moreinformation, see page .

When you press the hazard warningbutton, both turn signal indicatorsand all turn signals on the outside ofthe vehicle flash.

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. It will then go off ifyou have inserted a properly codedignition key. If it is not a properlycoded key, the indicator will blink,and the engine’s fuel system will bedisabled (see page ).

The left or right turn signal indicatorblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If an indicator does not blinkor blinks rapidly, it usually meansone of the turn signal bulbs isburned out (see pages and ).Replace the bulb as soon as possible,since other drivers cannot see thatyou are signaling.

322

368 37078

Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

Immobilizer SystemIndicator

Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators


58

10/07/12 16:12:45 31TE0630_063

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on while driving,it indicates that one or more of yourvehicle’s tires are significantly lowon pressure.

If this happens, pull to the side of theroad when it is safe, check which tirehas lost pressure, and determine thecause. If it is because of a flat tire,replace the flat tire with the compactspare (see page ), and have theflat tire repaired as soon as possible.If two or more tires are underinflated,call a professional towing service(see page ). For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If this indicator comes on and stayson at any other time, or if it does notcome on when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position, thereis a problem with the TPMS. Withthis indicator on, the low tirepressure indicator will not come onwhen a tire loses pressure. Take thevehicle to your dealer to have thesystem checked. For moreinformation, see page .

While the engine is operating in itsmost economical range, thisindicator may come on and stay on.

393

326415

327

V6 models with automatic transmission

Low Tire PressureIndicator

Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator

Fuel Economy Indicator


Instruments

andC

ontrols

59

10/07/12 16:12:55 31TE0630_064

This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen the light switch is in either the

or position. If you turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0) position withoutturning off the light switch, thisindicator will stay on. A reminderchime will also sound when you openthe driver’s door.

If this indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position and release the parkingbrake, it means there is a problemwith the DRL. There may also be aproblem with the high beamheadlights. Have your vehiclechecked by your dealer.

This indicator also comes on withreduced brightness when thedaytime running lights (DRL) are on(see page ).

This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this indicator(see page ).

This indicator will also come onwhen the light switch is in AUTOand the lights turn on automatically.

This indicator comes on as areminder that you must refuel soon.When the indicator comes on, thereare about 2.8 U.S. gal (10.5 ) of fuelremaining in the tank.

When the needle reaches E, there isa very small amount of fuel in thetank.

70

72

356

Canadian models only

EX, EX-L and all V6 models


Lights On Indicator Low Fuel IndicatorDaytime Running LightsIndicator

High Beam Indicator

Washer Level Indicator

60

10/07/12 16:13:09 31TE0630_065

This indicator comes on when thesecurity system is set. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Itreminds you that it is time to takeyour vehicle in for scheduledmaintenance. The maintenance mainitems and sub items will be displayedin the information display. See page

for more information on theMaintenance Minder .

This indicator goes off when yourdealer resets it after completing therequired maintenance service.

The appropriate indicator comes onif the trunk or either door is notclosed tightly.

All the indicators come on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

244

341

Security System IndicatorMaintenance MinderIndicator

Door and Trunk Open Indicator


Instruments

andC

ontrols

61

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATORDRIVER’SDOOR OPENINDICATOR

TRUNKOPENINDICATOR

TM

10/07/12 16:13:20 31TE0630_066

This indicator comes on when youturn on the cruise control system bypressing the CRUISE button (seepage ).

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

This indicator comes on when youset the cruise control. See page

for information on operating thecruise control.

This indicator comes on when youturn on the fog lights. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator has two functions:

It flashes when VSA is active (seepage ).

If it comes on and stays on at anyother time, there is a problem withthe VSA system. Take yourvehicle to a dealer to have itchecked. Without VSA, yourvehicle still has normal drivingability, but will not have VSAtraction and stability enhancement.See page for more informationon the VSA system.

This indicator comes on as areminder that you have turned offthe vehicle stability assist (VSA)system.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. For more information, seepage .

73

1.

2.

250

250324

324

324

If equipped


Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

Cruise Control Indicator

Cruise Main Indicator

Fog Light Indicator

VSA OFF Indicator

62

10/07/12 16:13:38 31TE0630_067

＊

＊

If equipped:

Gauges

Instruments

andC

ontrols

63

TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER

TEMPERATURE GAUGE

TRIP METER

ODOMETER/CHECK FUEL CAP MESSAGE

SELECT/RESET KNOB

INFORMATION DISPLAY

OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE INDICATOR

FUEL GAUGE

U.S. EX-L V6 A/T model is shown.

10/07/12 16:13:46 31TE0630_068

The odometer shows the totaldistance your vehicle has beendriven. It measures miles in U.S.models and kilometers in Canadianmodels. It is illegal under U.S.federal law and Canadian provincial/territorial regulations to disconnect,reset, or alter the odometer with theintent to change the number of milesor kilometers indicated.

The information display shows theodometer, trip meter, engine oil life,outside temperature (if equipped),and maintenance item code(s).

To switch the display, press andrelease the select/reset knobrepeatedly. When you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, your last selection isdisplayed.

Gauges

Odometer

Information Display

64

INFORMATION DISPLAY

TRIP METER A

TRIP METER B

ENGINE OILLIFE

OUTSIDETEMPERATUREINDICATOR

: Press the select/reset knob.

U.S. model with outside temperature indicator is shown.

ODOMETER

10/07/12 16:13:55 31TE0630_069

This shows how much fuel you have.It may show slightly more or lessthan the actual amount. The needlereturns to the bottom after you turnoff the ignition.

The trip meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it.

There are two trip meters: Trip Aand Trip B. Switch between thesedisplays by pressing the select/resetknob repeatedly.

Each trip meter works independently,so you can keep track of twodifferent distances.

To reset a trip meter, display it andthen press and hold the select/resetknob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, your lastselection is displayed.

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should risefrom the bottom mark to about themiddle of the gauge. In severedriving conditions, such as very hotweather or a long period of uphilldriving, the pointer may rise to theupper zone. If it reaches the red(hot) mark, pull safely to the side ofthe road. Turn to page forinstructions and precautions onchecking the engine cooling system.

403

Fuel Gauge Temperature GaugeTrip Meter

Gauges

Instruments

andC

ontrols

65

Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

10/07/12 16:14:05 31TE0630_070

－－－－－－－－

± ±

Select the outside temperaturedisplay, then press and hold theselect/reset knob for 10 seconds.The following sequence will appearfor 1 second each: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 5,

4, 3, 2, 1, 0 (U.S.) or 0, 1, 2,3, 3, 2, 1, 0 (Canada).

The temperature must bestabilized before doing thisprocedure.

If the outside temperature isincorrectly displayed, you can adjustit up to 5°F in U.S. models ( 3°Cin Canadian models) warmer orcooler.

The sensor delays the display updateuntil it reaches the correct outsidetemperature. This may take severalminutes.

The temperature sensor is in thefront bumper. Therefore, thetemperature reading can be affectedby heat reflection from the roadsurface, engine heat, and theexhaust from surrounding traffic.This can cause an incorrecttemperature reading when yourspeed is under 19 mph (30 km/h).

This indicator displays the outsidetemperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.models) or Celsius (Canadianmodels). To see the outsidetemperature, press and release theselect/reset knob until thetemperature is displayed.

When the temperature reaches thedesired value, release the select/reset knob. You should see the newoutside temperature displayed.

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.

If equippedOutside Temperature Indicator

Gauges

66

NOTE:

10/07/12 16:14:15 31TE0630_071

The information display in theinstrument panel shows you theengine oil life and maintenanceservice items when the ignitionswitch is in the ON (II) position. Thisinformation helps to keep you awareof the periodic maintenance yourvehicle needs for continued trouble-free driving. Refer to page formore information.

If your fuel fill cap is loose ormissing, a ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’message appears on the informationdisplay after you start the engine.For more information, see page .287

341

Maintenance MinderCheck Fuel Cap Message

Gauges

Instruments

andC

ontrols

67

TM

10/07/12 16:14:22 31TE0630_072

＊

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.If equipped

3 :

1 :2 :

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

68

PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR

SEAT HEATER SWITCHES

(P.73) (P.69) (P.30)

(P.74)

(P.76)


(P.325)

(P.257)

(P.250)

(P.102)

(P.75, 107)

(P.315)

INTERFACE DIAL(P.181)

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS/FOG LIGHTS(P.70, 73)

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS(P.237)

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST (VSA) SYSTEMOFF SWITCH

BLUETOOTHHANDSFREELINKVOICE CONTROLBUTTONS

NAVIGATION SYSTEMVOICE CONTROLBUTTONS

PADDLE SHIFTERS INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENTS

CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS

HORN

2

2

3

2

2

3

2

1

10/07/12 16:14:31 31TE0630_073

－－－

－

－

－

－

－

－

MISTOFFINT IntermittentLO Low speedHI High speedWindshield washers

Push the right lever up or down toselect a position.

The wipers are not activated.

The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.

The length of the wiperinterval is varied automaticallyaccording to the vehicle’s speed.

Vary the delay by turning theadjustment ring. If you turn it tothe shortest delay( position), the wiperschange to low speed operationwhen the vehicle speed exceeds 12mph (20 km/h).

The wipers run at low speed.

The wipers run at high speed.

Pull thewiper control lever toward you,and hold it. The washers sprayuntil you release the lever. Thewipers run at low speed, thencomplete a few more sweeps afteryou release the lever.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

Windshield Wipers

OFF

MIST

INT

LO

HI

Windshield Washer

Windshield Wipers and Washers

Instruments

andC

ontrols

69

ADJUSTMENT RING

10/07/12 16:14:42 31TE0630_074

－

－－

＊

＊

＊

＊

Push down on thelever to signal a left turn and up tosignal a right turn. To signal a lanechange, push lightly on the lever,and hold it. The lever will return tocenter when you release it orcomplete a turn.

Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the headlights.

Turning the switch tothe ‘‘ ’’ position turns on theparking lights, taillights, instrumentpanel lights, side-marker lights, andrear license plate lights.

Turn signalOffParking and indicator lightsAUTOHeadlights onHigh beamsFlash high beamsFog lights offFog lights on

If equipped

When the light switch is in the‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, thelights on indicator comes on as areminder. This indicator stays on ifyou leave the light switch on andturn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)position.

To flash the high beams, pull thelever back lightly, then release it.The high beams will stay on as longas you hold the lever back.

If you leave the lights on with thekey removed from the ignitionswitch, you will hear a reminderchime when you open the driver’sdoor.

Push the left leverforward until you hear a click. Theblue high beam indicator will comeon (see page ). Pull the lever backto return to the low beams.

:

1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9.

60

Turn Signal

HeadlightsHigh Beams

Turn Signals and Headlights

70

V6 model is shown.

10/07/12 16:14:53 31TE0630_075

－ The automatic lightingfeature turns on the headlights andall other exterior lights, when itsenses low ambient light.

To turn on automatic lighting, turnthe light switch to AUTO. The lightswill come on automatically when theoutside light level becomes low (atdusk, for example). The lights onindicator comes on as a reminder.The lights and indicator will turn offautomatically when the systemsenses high ambient light.

The lights will remain on when youturn off the ignition switch. They willturn off automatically when youremove the key and open the driver’sdoor. To turn them on again, eitherturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position or turn the light switchto the position.

Even with the automatic lightingfeature turned on, we recommendthat you turn on the lights manuallywhen driving at night or in a densefog, or when you enter dark areassuch as long tunnels or parkingfacilities.

Do not leave the light switch inAUTO if you will not be driving thevehicle for an extended period (aweek or more). You should also turnoff the lights if you plan to leave theengine idling or off for a long time. The automatic lighting feature is

controlled by a sensor located on topof the dashboard. Do not cover thissensor or spill liquids on it.

EX, EX-L and all V6 models

Headlights

AUTOInstrum

entsand

Controls

71

LIGHT SENSOR

10/07/12 16:15:01 31TE0630_076

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

With the headlight switch off or inthe position, the high beamheadlights and the high beamindicator come on with reducedbrightness when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position and release the parkingbrake. They remain on until you turnthe ignition switch off, even if youset the parking brake.

This feature turns off the headlights,all other exterior lights, and theinstrument panel lights within 15seconds after you remove the keyand close the driver’s door.

The automatic lighting off featureactivates if you leave the headlightswitch in the ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’position or if the lights are turned onby setting the switch in the ‘‘AUTO’’position (if equipped), and youremove the key, then open and closethe driver’s door.

If you turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position with theheadlight switch on, but do not openthe door, the lights turn off after 10minutes (3 minutes, if the switch isin the ‘‘AUTO’’ position).

The lights will turn on again whenyou unlock or open the driver’s door.If you unlock the door, but do notopen it within 15 seconds, the lightswill go off. With the driver’s dooropen, you will hear a lights onreminder chime.

Automatic Lighting Off Feature Daytime Running Lights

Headlights

72

10/07/12 16:15:09 31TE0630_077

The select/reset knob on theinstrument panel controls thebrightness of the instrument panellights. Turn the knob to adjust thebrightness with the ignition switch inthe ON (II) position and the parkinglights on.

You can use the fog lights only whenthe headlights are on low beam.

Turn the fog lights on and off byturning the switch next to theheadlight switch.

With the light switch in the AUTOposition, you can also use the foglights when the headlights turn onautomatically. They will go off whenthe headlights turn off, or thedaytime running lights are on.

CONTINUED

If equipped

Fog Lights Instrument Panel Brightness

Fog Lights, Instrument Panel Brightness

Instruments

andC

ontrols

73

SELECT/RESET KNOB

10/07/12 16:15:19 31TE0630_078

Push the button between the centervents to turn on the hazard warninglights (four-way flashers). Thiscauses all four outside turn signalsand both turn indicators in theinstrument panel to flash. Use thehazard warning lights if you need topark in a dangerous area near heavytraffic, or if your vehicle is disabled.

The level of brightness is shown onthe information display while youadjust it. It goes out about 5 secondsafter you finish adjusting.

To reduce glare at night, theinstrument panel illumination dimswhen you turn the light switch to

or . Turning the select/reset knob to the right until you heara beep will cancel the reducedbrightness.

The instrument panel will illuminatewith reduced brightness when youunlock and open the driver’s door.The brightness will increase slightlywhen you insert the key in theignition switch, then go to normalbrightness when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If you insert the key but do not turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position, the illumination turns off inabout 10 seconds.

If you do not insert the key in theignition switch after opening thedriver’s door, the illumination turnsoff about 30 seconds after you closethe door.

Hazard Warning Button

Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning Button

74

BRIGHTNESS LEVEL

U.S. model is shown.

10/07/12 16:15:28 31TE0630_079

The defogger and antenna wires onthe inside of the rear window can beaccidentally damaged. Whencleaning the glass, always wipe sideto side.

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The indicator inthe button comes on to show thedefogger is on. It also shuts off whenyou turn off the ignition switch. Youhave to turn the defogger on againwhen you restart the vehicle.

Pushing this button also turns themirror heaters on or off. For moreinformation, see page .

The defogger will shut itself offwithin about 10 to 30 minutesaccording to the outside temperature(over 32°F, 0°C).

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive. 107

On vehicles with automatic airconditioning system

Except U.S. LX

Rear Window Defogger

Instruments

andC

ontrols

75

Manual A/C type Auto A/C type Models with navigation system

U.S. LX

Except U.S. LX

10/07/12 16:15:38 31TE0630_080

Move the steering wheel up ordown, and in or out, so it pointstoward your chest, not towardyour face. Make sure you can seethe instrument panel gauges andindicators.

Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in position.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up, down, in,and out.

Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

Make any steering wheeladjustments before you start driving.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Steering Wheel Adjustments

76

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

10/07/12 16:15:45 31TE0630_081

You should have received a keynumber tag with your keys. You willneed this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Useonly Honda-approved key blanks.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theimmobilizer system. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

The valet key does not contain abattery. Do not try to take it apart.

The master key fits all the locks onyour vehicle. The valet key worksonly in the ignition and the driver’sdoor lock. You can keep the trunkrelease handle, and glove box lockedwhen you leave your vehicle and thevalet key at a parking facility.

Keys and Locks

Instruments

andC

ontrols

77

MASTERKEY WITHREMOTETRANSMITTER

KEYNUMBERTAG

VALET KEY(Light Grey)

10/07/12 16:15:54 31TE0630_082

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle inoperable.

If you lose your key and you cannotstart the engine, contact your dealer.

The immobilizer system protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine’s fuelsystem is disabled.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the immobilizersystem indicator should come onbriefly, then go off. If the indicatorstarts to blink, it means the systemdoes not recognize the coding of thekey. Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position, remove the key,reinsert it, and turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position again.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object (i.e. keychain) is near the ignition switchwhen you insert the key.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Immobilizer System

78

Always take the ignition key with youwhenever you leave the vehicle alone.

10/07/12 16:16:05 31TE0630_083

－

－

－

－

The ignition switch has fourpositions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY(I), ON (II), START (III)

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To turn the key, push it in slightly. Ifyour vehicle has an automatictransmission, the shift lever mustalso be in Park.

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) or theACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, the shift lever must bein Park before you can remove thekey from the ignition switch.

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may make it difficultto turn the key. Firmly turn thesteering wheel to the left or right asyou turn the key.

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to the ON (II) position whenyou let go of the key.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. Several of theindicators on the instrument panelcome on as a test when you turn theignition switch from theACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)position.

You canoperate the audio system and theaccessory power sockets in thisposition.

LOCK (0)

START (III)

ON (II)

ACCESSORY (I)

Ignition Switch

Instruments

andC

ontrols

79

Removing the key from theignition switch while drivinglocks the steering. This cancause you to lose control of thevehicle.

Remove the key from theignition switch only whenparked.

10/07/12 16:16:15 31TE0630_084

When the door is unlocked, you cansee the red indicator on the lock tababove the inner door handle.

You can open or close the windowsand the moonroof (if equipped) byusing the key in the driver’s door(see page ).

To lock both doors, push the front ofthe master door lock switch oneither door, pull the lock tabrearward on the driver’s door, or usethe key on the outside lock on thedriver’s door.

Pushing forward the lock tab on thedriver’s door only unlocks that door.

Pushing the rear of either masterdoor lock switch will unlock bothdoors.

The lock tab on the passenger’s doorlocks and unlocks that door.

Both doors can be locked from theoutside by using the key in thedriver’s door. To unlock only thedriver’s door, insert the key, turn itclockwise, and release it. Thepassenger’s door unlocks when youturn the key a second time within afew seconds.

To lock the passenger’s door whengetting out of the vehicle, pull thelock tab rearward and close the door.To lock the driver’s door, remove thekey from the ignition switch, pull thelock tab rearward or push the frontof the master switch, then close thedoor.

110

Door Locks

80

POWER DOOR LOCK MASTER SWITCHLock

Unlock

Lock

Unlock

RED INDICATOR

LOCK TAB

10/07/12 16:16:26 31TE0630_085

The auto door locking feature hasthree possible settings:

The auto door locking isdeactivated all the time.

The doors lock whenever youmove the shift lever out of thePark (P) position (A/T vehicles).

The doors lock when the vehiclespeed reaches 10 mph (15 km/h).

Your vehicle has customizablesettings for the doors toautomatically lock and unlock. Thereare default settings for each of thesefeatures. You can turn off or changethe settings for these features asdescribed on the following pages.

This is the default setting.

When you customize the setting,make sure your vehicle is parkedsafely, the engine is off, and theparking brake is applied. Make allsettings before you start driving.

If you forget and leave the key in theignition switch, lockout preventionwill not allow you to lock the driver’sdoor. With either door open and thekey in the ignition switch, lockingwith the master door lock switch isdisabled. If the driver’s door isclosed, the lock tab on the driver’sdoor is not disabled. Pulling thedriver’s lock tab rearward will lockboth doors. If you try to lock an opendriver’s door by pulling the lock tabrearward, the driver’s door lock tabpops out and unlocks the driver’sdoor.

CONTINUED

U.S. V6 models, and Canadian EX-L andV6 models with navigation system

Lockout Prevention Auto Door LockingAuto Door Locking/Unlocking

Door Locks

Instruments

andC

ontrols

81

NOTE: When customizing a setting,use the appropriate remote transmitter(Driver 1 or Driver 2).To customize, remove the master keywith the remote transmitter, and pressthe UNLOCK button once.

10/07/12 16:16:37 31TE0630_086

Make sure the shift lever is in thePark (P) position (A/T vehicles).

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and open the driver’sdoor.

Push and hold the front of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door until you hear a click(after about 5 seconds).

Make sure the shift lever is in thePark (P) position.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and make sure toclose the driver’s door.

Release the switch, and within 20seconds, turn the ignition switchto the LOCK (0) position.

1.

2.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Locks both doors when the shift lever ismoved out of the Park (P) position (A/Tvehicles only).

To program the Park Lock mode:To turn off the Auto Door Lockmodes:

Door Locks

82

10/07/12 16:16:49 31TE0630_087

Push and hold the front of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click.Keep holding the switch until youhear another click (after about 5seconds).

Push and hold the front of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click.Keep holding the switch until youhear another click (after about 5seconds).



push and hold thebrake pedal, and move the shiftlever out of the Park (P) position.

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position.


Release the switch, and within 20seconds, turn the ignition switchto the ACCESSORY (I) position.

move the shiftlever to the Park (P) position.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

3.

4.

On A/T vehicles,

Locks both doors when the vehicle’sspeed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).

On A/T vehicles,

To program the Drive Lock mode:

Door Locks

Instruments

andC

ontrols

83

10/07/12 16:17:00 31TE0630_088

The auto door unlocking isdeactivated all the time.

The auto door unlocking featurehas five possible settings:


Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and open the driver’sdoor.

Both doors unlock whenever youturn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) position.

the driver’s doorunlocks when you move the shiftlever to the Park (P) position withthe brake pedal depressed.This is the default setting.

Both doors unlock when you movethe shift lever to the Park (P)position with the brake pedaldepressed (A/T vehicles).

The driver’s door unlockswhenever you turn the ignitionswitch to the ACCESSORY (I)position.This is the default setting on M/Tvehicles.

1.

2.

On A/T vehicles,

Auto Door Unlocking

Door Locks

To turn off the Auto Door Unlockmodes:

84

10/07/12 16:17:12 31TE0630_089

CONTINUED

Push and hold the rear of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click.Continue to hold the switch:

Until you hear another click(after about 5 seconds) toactivate

Or, until you hear two moreclicks (after about 10 seconds)to activate

.

Make sure the shift lever is in thePark (P) position.


Push and hold the rear of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click,and after about 5 seconds, you willhear another click.



1.

2.

3.

4.

3.

4.driver’s door unlock

feature.

both doors unlockfeature

Unlocks the driver’s door or both doorswhen the shift lever is moved into thePark (P) position with the brake pedaldepressed (A/T vehicles only).

Door Locks

To program the Park Unlock mode:Instrum

entsand

Controls

85

10/07/12 16:17:24 31TE0630_090

Even if your vehicle’s battery isremoved or goes dead, the systemkeeps the auto door lock/unlocksetting which you selected.

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position.

push and hold thebrake pedal, then move the shiftlever out of the Park (P) position.

Push and hold the rear of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click.Continue to hold the switch:

Until you hear another click(after about 5 seconds) toactivate

Or, until you hear two moreclicks (after about 10 seconds)to activate

.Make sure the shift lever is in thePark (P) position (A/T vehicles).


Release the switch, and within 20seconds, turn the ignition switchto the ACCESSORY (I) position.

move the shiftlever to the Park (P) position.4.

5.

6.

3.

1.

2.

On A/T vehicles,

driver’s door unlockfeature.

both doors unlockfeature

Unlocks the driver’s door or both doorswhen the ignition switch is moved out ofthe ON (II) position.

On A/T vehicles,

Door Locks

To program the Ignition SwitchUnlock mode:

86

10/07/12 16:17:37 31TE0630_091

－

－

－

－

Press this button onceto unlock the driver’s door. Push ittwice to unlock the passenger’s door.Some exterior lights will flash twiceeach time you push the button.

The ceiling light and the dooractivated spotlights (if equipped)come on when you press theUNLOCK button if the lights are inthe door activated position. If you donot open either door within 30seconds, the light(s) will fade out. Ifyou relock the doors with the remotetransmitter before 30 seconds haveelapsed, the light(s) will go offimmediately.

If you do not open either door within30 seconds, the doors automaticallyrelock and the security system sets.

You can also open both powerwindows and the moonroof (ifequipped) from outside the vehiclewith the remote transmitter (seepage ).

Press and hold thisbutton for about 2 seconds to attractattention: the horn will sound andthe exterior lights will flash for about30 seconds. To cancel panic mode,press any other button on the remotetransmitter, or turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

Press and hold thisbutton for about 1 second to openthe trunk. You cannot open the trunkif the key is in the ignition switch.

Press this button once tolock both doors. Some exterior lightswill flash once. When you pushLOCK twice within 5 seconds, youwill hear a beep to verify that thedoors are locked and that thesecurity system has set. You cannotlock the doors if either door is notfully closed or the key is in theignition switch.

110

CONTINUED

Remote Transmitter

UNLOCK

PANIC

TRUNK

LOCK

Instruments

andC

ontrols

87

LOCKBUTTON

UNLOCKBUTTON

PANICBUTTON

TRUNKRELEASEBUTTON

LED

10/07/12 16:17:48 31TE0630_092

Battery type: CR1616

Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.

Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperature.

Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.

If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by your dealer.

To replace the battery:

Remove the screw at the base ofthe transmitter with a smallPhillips-head screwdriver.

Separate the transmitter by pryingits middle seam with yourfingernail.

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doors,replace the battery as soon aspossible.

Be careful when removingthis screw as the head of the screwcan strip out.

1.

2.

Remote Transmitter

Replacing the Transmitter BatteryRemote Transmitter Care

88

NOTE:

SCREW

10/07/12 16:18:01 31TE0630_093

＋




Inside the transmitter, separatethe inner cover from the keypadby carefully prying on the edgewith a coin.

Remove the old battery, and inserta new battery into the back of thecover with the side facing down.

An improperly disposed of batterycan hurt the environment.Always confirm local regulationsfor battery disposal.

Install the parts in reverse order.

4.

5.

3.

Remote Transmitter

Instruments

andC

ontrols

89

BATTERY

COIN

10/07/12 16:18:11 31TE0630_094

When you unlock the driver’s doorwith your remote transmitter, eachremote transmitter activates thecustomized settings related to thatremote.

When you unlock and open thedriver’s door with the remotetransmitter, the driver’s seat (exceptthe power lumbar feature) starts tomove to the positions stored inmemory. The indicator in the relatedmemory button comes on.

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking(see page ).

Driving position memory(see page ).

Here are the settings activated withthe remote:

The driving position memoryactivated (Driver 1, Driver 2) isshown on the back of eachtransmitter. Make sure you storeyour desired driving position in thememory that is activated by thetransmitter you normally carry.

81

103

U.S. V6 modelsCanadian EX-L and V6 models withnavigation system

Remote Transmitter

Recalling a Memorized DrivingPosition

90

10/07/12 16:18:20 31TE0630_095

To protect items in the trunk whenyou need to give the key to someoneelse:

To close the trunk, press down onthe trunk lid.

You can open the trunk in two ways:

Pull up on the trunk release leverto the left of the driver’s seat.

Press and hold the trunk releasebutton on the remote transmitter.

Keep the trunk lid closed at all timeswhile driving to avoid damaging thelid, and to prevent exhaust gas fromgetting into the interior. See

on page .

Lock the trunk release lever withthe master key.

Give the person the valet key.

1.

2.

51

CONTINUED

CarbonMonoxide Hazard

Trunk

Instruments

andC

ontrols

91

Pull

TRUNK RELEASE LEVER MASTER KEY

10/07/12 16:18:31 31TE0630_096

As a safety feature, your vehicle hasa release lever on the trunk latch sothe trunk can be opened from theinside.

Parents should decide if theirchildren should be shown how to usethis feature.

For more information about childsafety, see page .

Even if the trunk release lever islocked with the master key, you canopen the trunk with the remotetransmitter.

To open the trunk, push the releaselever in the direction indicated by thearrow.

37

Emergency Trunk Opener

Trunk

92

10/07/12 16:18:39 31TE0630_097

－

Moves the seat forwardand backward.

The controls for the poweradjustable driver’s seat are on theoutside edge of the seat bottom. Youcan adjust the seat with the ignitionswitch in any position. Make all seatadjustments before you start driving.

The front passenger’s seat adjustsmanually.

Moves the front of theseat up or down.

Raises or lowers the seat.

Moves the whole seat upand forward, or downand backward. The frontof the seat also tilts up ordown at the same time.

Adjusts the seat-backangle forward orbackward.

Increases or decreasesthe lumbar support.

The driver’s seat includes a memoryfeature. Two seat positions can bestored in separate memories. Youcan then select a memorized positionby pushing the appropriate memorybutton. Refer to page for how tomemorize and select the seatpositions.

103

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position the seats and seat-backs.

11 13Except LX and EX


Driver’s Seat Power Adjustments

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

93

10/07/12 16:18:55 31TE0630_098

－See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position the seats and seat-backs.

11 13

Make all seat adjustments beforeyou start driving.

To adjust the seat forward orbackward, pull up on the bar underthe seat cushion’s front edge. Movethe seat to the desired position, andrelease the bar. Try to move the seatto make sure it is locked in position.

To change the seat-back angle, pullup on the lever on the outside of theseat bottom.

Once a seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make sure itis locked in position.

Front Seat Manual Adjustments

Seats

94

10/07/12 16:19:05 31TE0630_099

To use the console lid as an armrest,slide it to one of its three positions.

Make all seat adjustments beforeyou start driving.

The height of your driver’s seat isadjustable. To raise the seat,repeatedly pull up the lever on theoutside of the seat cushion. To lowerthe seat, push the lever downrepeatedly.

To get into the rear seat on thedriver’s side, open the door and pullthe release lever up on the side ofthe seat-back. The seat-back will tiltforward to allow easier entry to therear seat.

CONTINUED

On all V6 models and 4-cylinder EX-Lmodel

LX and EX models

Armrest Rear Seat AccessDriver’s Seat Manual HeightAdjustment Driver’s Side

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

95

RELEASE LEVER

10/07/12 16:19:16 31TE0630_100

To get into the rear seat on thedriver’s side, open the door and pullup on the seat-back adjustment lever.The seat-back will tilt forward toallow easier entry to the rear seat.

After a passenger gets into the rearseat, push the seat-back to theupright position and push the wholeseat backwards until it latches. Makesure the seat is fully latched beforesitting in it.

To get into the rear seat on thepassenger’s side, push downward onthe release lever at the base of theseat-back, or pull up on the seat-backadjustment lever. The seat-back willtilt forward and the entire seat willmove forward to allow easier entry tothe rear seat.

LX and EX models

Passenger’s Side

Seats

96

SEAT-BACK ADJUSTMENT LEVER

RELEASE LEVER

SEAT-BACK ADJUSTMENT LEVERTo avoid damaging the seat-back angleadjustment motor, do not operate theseat-back angle switch when the seat-back is tilted f orward.

10/07/12 16:19:25 31TE0630_101

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning aboutimproperly positioning head restraints.

13

They are most effective when youadjust them so the center of the backof the occupant’s head rests againstthe center of the restraint.

The head restraints adjust for height.You need both hands to adjust arestraint. Do not attempt to adjust itwhile driving. To raise it, pull upward.To lower the restraint, push therelease button sideways, and pushthe restraint down.

Your vehicle is equipped with headrestraints in all seating positions tohelp protect you and yourpassengers from the likelihood ofwhiplash and other injuries.

CONTINUED

Head Restraints

Adjusting the Head Restraint

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

97

Front CUSHION

RELEASEBUTTON

LEGS SEAT-BACK

10/07/12 16:19:34 31TE0630_102

To remove a head restraint forcleaning or repair, pull it up as far asit will go. Push the release button,then pull the restraint out of the seat-back.

When reinstalling a head restraint,put the legs back in place. Thenadjust it to the appropriate heightwhile pressing the release button.

Make sure the head restraint locksin position when you reinstall it.

Removing the Head Restraint

Seats

98

CUSHIONRear Center

SEAT-BACKLEGS

RELEASEBUTTON

Failure to reinstall the headrestraints can result in severeinjury during a crash.

Always replace the headrestraints before driving.

10/07/12 16:19:42 31TE0630_103

The driver’s and front passenger’sseats have active head restraints. Ifthe vehicle is struck severely fromthe rear, the occupant properlysecured with the seat belt will bepushed against the seat-back and thehead restraint will automaticallymove forward.

For a head restraint system to workproperly:

Do not hang any items on the headrestraints, or from the restraintlegs.

Do not place any object betweenan occupant and the seat-back.

Install each restraint in its properlocation.

Only use genuine Hondareplacement head restraints.

After a collision, the activatedrestraint should return to its normalposition.

If the restraints do not return to theirnormal position, or in the event of asevere collision, have the vehicleinspected by a Honda dealer.

This reduces the distance betweenthe restraint and the occupant’s head.It also helps protect the occupants

against the likelihood of whiplashand injuries to the neck and upperspine.

Active Head Restraints

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

99

10/07/12 16:19:53 31TE0630_104

The back of the rear seat folds down,giving you direct access to the trunk.The seat-back is released from insidethe trunk.

When storing cargo, you can movethe rear center shoulder belt out ofthe way by removing the belt fromthe guide.

To release the seat-back from insidethe trunk, pull the release under thetrunk panel. Push the seat-backdown from inside the trunk, or pullthe seat-back down from inside thevehicle.

Remove any items from the seatbefore you fold down the seat-back.

Folding Rear Seat

Seats

100

GUIDECENTERSHOULDER BELT

RELEASE

Pull

10/07/12 16:20:02 31TE0630_105

Make sure that the folded seat-backdoes not press against the frontpassenger’s seat, as this could causethe weight sensors to workimproperly.

Make sure all rear shoulder belts arepositioned in front of the rear seat-back, and the center shoulder belt isre-positioned in the guide wheneverthe seat-back is in its upright position.Be sure there are no twists in anyshoulder belt.

Do not put any heavy items on theseat-back when it is folded down.

Make sure all items in the trunk, oritems extending through the openinginto the back seat, are secured.Loose items can fly forward andcause injury if you have to brakehard. See on page

.

Never drive with the seat-backfolded down and the trunk lid open.See onpage .

To lock the seat-back upright, push itfirmly against the trunk panel. Makesure it is latched in place by pullingon the top of the seat.

If the rear head restraints get caughton the front seat backs and youcannot fold down the rear seat-backfully, you can remove the headrestraints (see page ).Make sure the removed headrestraints are securely stored.

51

297

98Carrying Cargo

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

101

10/07/12 16:20:11 31TE0630_106

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. Because of the sensorsfor the side airbag cutoff system,there is no heater in the passenger’sseat-back. The ignition switch mustbe in the ON (II) position to use theheaters.

Push the right side of the switch, HI,to rapidly heat up the seat. After theseat reaches a comfortabletemperature, select LO by pushingthe left side of the switch. This willkeep the seat warm.

If the engine is left idling for anextended period, do not use theseat heaters even on the LOsetting. It can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly, because it drawslarge amounts of current from thebattery.

Follow these precautions wheneveryou use the seat heaters:

In the LO setting, the heater runscontinuously. It does not cycle withtemperature changes.

In the HI setting, the heater turns offwhen the seat gets warm, and turnsback on after the seat’s temperaturedrops.

EX-L and all V6 models

Seat Heaters

102

Driver’sSeat

Passenger’sSeat

HEATERS

10/07/12 16:20:21 31TE0630_107

Store a driving position only whenthe vehicle is parked.

Your vehicle has a memory featurefor the driver’s seat position.

Seat, except for power lumbar,position can be stored in separatememories. You select a memorizedposition by pushing the appropriatebutton or using the appropriateremote transmitter (Driver 1 orDriver 2).

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. You cannot add anew driving position to thememory unless the ignition switchis in the ON (II) position. You canrecall a memorized position withthe ignition switch in any position.

Press and release the SET button.You will hear a beep. Immediatelypress and hold one of the memorybuttons (1 or 2) until you hear twobeeps. The indicator in thememory button will come on. Thecurrent position of the driver’sseat is now stored.

Adjust the seat to a comfortableposition (see page ).

3.

1.

2.93

CONTINUED


Storing a Driving Position inMemory

Driving Position Memory System

Instruments

andC

ontrols

103

MEMORY BUTTONS

SET BUTTON

10/07/12 16:20:30 31TE0630_108

To cancel the storing procedureafter pressing the SET button, doany of the following:

To select a memorized position, dothis:

Each memory button stores only onedriving position. Storing a newposition erases the previous settingstored in that button’s memory. Ifyou want to add a new position whileretaining the current one, use theother memory button.

Make sure the parking brake is setand the shift lever is in Park(automatic).

Press the desired memory button(1 or 2) until you hear a beep, thenrelease the button.

All stored driving positions will belost if your vehicle’s battery goesdead or is disconnected.

Press the SET button again within5 seconds.

Fail to press a memory buttonwithin 5 seconds.

Readjust the seat position.

Turn the ignition switch out fromthe ON (II) position.

1.

2.

Selecting a Memorized Position


104

MEMORY BUTTONS

10/07/12 16:20:41 31TE0630_109

To stop the system’s automaticadjustment, do any of these actions:

Push any of the adjustmentswitches for the seat.

Press any button on the driver’sdoor: SET, memory button 1 or 2.

The system will move the driver’sseat to the memorized position. Theindicator in the selected memorybutton will flash during movement.When the adjustment is complete,you will hear two beeps, and theindicator will stay on.

If the parking brake is not set, youmust press and hold the memorybutton until the adjustment iscomplete.

Shift out of Park (automatic).

Release the parking brake(manual).

If desired, you can use theadjustment switches to change theseat position after it is in itsmemorized position. If you changethe memorized position, theindicator in the memory button willgo out. To keep this seat position forlater use, you must store it in thedriver’s seat position memory.On vehicles with manual transmission


Instruments

andC

ontrols

105

10/07/12 16:20:50 31TE0630_110

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

Move the selector switch to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

1.

2.

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

Mirrors

106

TAB

SELECTOR SWITCH

ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

10/07/12 16:20:59 31TE0630_111

Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns theadjustment switch off to keep yoursettings.

The outside mirrors are heated toremove fog and frost. With theignition switch in the ON (II)position, turn on the heaters bypressing the button. The indicator inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off. Pressing this button alsoturns the rear window defogger onand off.

This heated mirror function has atimer (see page ).

3.

4.75

On vehicles with automatic airconditioning system

All Canadian modelsU.S. EX, EX-L and all V6 models

Mirrors

Power Mirror HeatersInstrum

entsand

Controls

107

V6 model without navigation systemis shown.


10/07/12 16:21:09 31TE0630_112

－

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position to raise or lower eitherwindow. To open a window, push theswitch down and hold it. Release theswitch when you want the window tostop. Pull back on the switch andhold it to close the window.

To open either windowfully (driver’s window only on LX),push the window switch firmly downto the second detent, then release it.The window automatically goesdown all the way. To stop thewindow from going all the way down,pull back on the window switchbriefly.

To close either window fully (driver’swindow only on LX), pull back thewindow switch firmly to the seconddetent, then release it. The windowautomatically goes all the way up. Tostop the window from going all theway up, push down on the windowswitch briefly.

Power Windows

AUTO

108

DRIVER’S WINDOW SWITCH

PASSENGER’SWINDOW SWITCH

MAIN SWITCH INDICATOR

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

10/07/12 16:21:15 31TE0630_113

－When you push the main switch in,the indicator comes on and thepassenger’s window cannot be raisedor lowered. Use the main switchwhen you have children in thevehicle so they do not injurethemselves by operating the windowunintentionally. To cancel thisfeature, push on the switch again.The switch will pop out and theindicator will go off.

The windows and the main switchfeature will operate for up to 10minutes after you turn off theignition switch. Opening either doorcancels this function.

If eitherwindow (driver’s window only onLX) senses any obstacle while it isclosing automatically, it will reversedirection, and then stop. To close thewindow, remove the obstacle, thenuse the window switch again.

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

The driver’s window autoreverse function is disabled whenyou continuously pull up the switch.

Power Windows

AUTO REVERSEInstrum

entsand

Controls

109

NOTE:

10/07/12 16:21:22 31TE0630_114

You can open and close the windowsand the moonroof (if equipped) withthe key in the driver’s door lock.

Turn the key clockwise, thenrelease it.

Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

To open:Press the UNLOCK button onceto unlock the driver’s door.

To open the windows andmoonroof further, press thebutton again (within 10 seconds ofstep 1) and hold it. If the windowsand the moonroof stop before thedesired position, repeat steps 1and 2.

You cannot close the windows or themoonroof with the remotetransmitter.

You can open both windows and themoonroof (if equipped) from theoutside with the remote transmitter.

Press the UNLOCK button asecond time, and hold it. Thepassenger’s door unlocks, andboth windows and the moonroofstart to open. To stop the windowsand moonroof, release the button.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

Opening the Windows andMoonroof with the RemoteTransmitter

Opening/Closing the Windowsand Moonroof with the Key

Power Windows

110

Open

Close

UNLOCKBUTTON

10/07/12 16:21:34 31TE0630_115

To close:Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

Turn the key counterclockwise,then release it.

To close the windows and themoonroof further, turn and holdthe key again (within 10 secondsof step 2).

To open the windows and themoonroof further, turn and holdthe key again (within 10 secondsof step 2).

Turn the key clockwise again, andhold it. Both windows and themoonroof start to open. To stopthe windows and the moonroof,release the key.

Turn the key counterclockwiseagain, and hold it. Both windowsand the moonroof start to close.To stop the windows and themoonroof, release the key.

If the windows and themoonroof stop before the desiredposition, repeat steps 2 and 3.

1.

2.

3.

4.

3.

4.

Power Windows

Instruments

andC

ontrols

111

NOTE:

10/07/12 16:21:45 31TE0630_116

－ To open the moonrooffully, pull back the moonroof switchfirmly, then release it. The moonroofautomatically opens all the way. Tostop the moonroof from opening,push the switch briefly.

To close the moonroof fully, firmlypush the moonroof switch forward,then release it. The moonroofautomatically closes all the way. Tostop the moonroof from closing,push the switch briefly.

To open or close the moonroofpartially, lightly pull the switch backor push it forward and hold it. Themoonroof will stop when you releasethe switch.

To tilt up the moonroof, push on thecenter of the moonroof switch. Tostop the moonroof from tilting upfully, push the switch briefly.

To open the moonroof, pull back onthe switch and hold it. Release theswitch when the moonroof reachesthe desired position. To close themoonroof, push the switch forwardand hold it. Release the switch tostop the operation.

The moonroof can be tilted up in theback for ventilation, or it can be slidback into the roof. Use the switch onthe front ceiling to operate themoonroof. You must turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position to operate the moonroof.

If equipped

AUTO

Moonroof

112

MOONROOF SWITCH

Open

Close

Tilt

Opening or closing themoonroof on someone’s handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

10/07/12 16:21:54 31TE0630_117

Auto reverse stops sensing when themoonroof is almost closed. Youshould always check that allpassengers and objects are awayfrom the moonroof before closing it.

If the moonroof runs into anyobstacle while it is closingautomatically, it will reversedirection, and then stop. To close themoonroof, remove the obstacle, thenuse the moonroof switch again.

You can open and close themoonroof for up to 10 minutes afteryou turn off the ignition switch.Opening either door cancels thisfunction.

You can use the remote transmitteror the key to operate the moonrooffrom the outside. Refer to page

for details.110

Auto Reverse

Moonroof

Instruments

andC

ontrols

113

If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or itsmotor.

10/07/12 16:22:01 31TE0630_118

To apply the parking brake, pull thelever up fully. To release it, pull upslightly, push the button, and lowerthe lever. The parking brakeindicator on the instrument panelshould go out when the parkingbrake is fully released (see page ).57

Parking Brake

114

PARKING BRAKE LEVER

Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and hubs. A beeper will sound ifthe vehicle is driven with the parkingbrake on.

10/07/12 16:22:05 31TE0630_119

Interior Convenience Items

Instruments

andC

ontrols

115

VANITY MIRROR

SUN VISOR

TRUNK

CENTER POCKETS

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK

COAT HOOK

BEVERAGE HOLDER

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

DOOR POCKET

SUNGLASSES HOLDER

GLOVE BOX

BEVERAGE HOLDER

USB ADAPTER CABLE

ACCESSORY POWERSOCKET

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

10/07/12 16:22:10 31TE0630_120

Open the glove box by pulling thehandle to the left. Close it with a firmpush. Lock or unlock the glove boxwith the master key.

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Spilled liquids candamage the upholstery, carpeting,and electrical components in theinterior.

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Liquid can also spillfrom the door pocket beverageholders when you open or close thedoors. Use only resealablecontainers in the door pockets.

Spilled liquids can damage theupholstery, carpeting, and electricalcomponents in the interior.

Glove Box Beverage Holders


116

To lock

GLOVE BOX

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

10/07/12 16:22:19 31TE0630_121

To close, lower the armrest, andpush it down until it latches.

Open the front beverage holder bypulling up on the lid.

Each rear side panel also has abeverage holder.

To open the console compartment,pull up on the lever and lift thearmrest.


Console CompartmentInstrum

entsand

Controls

117

FRONT

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

LEVER

10/07/12 16:22:26 31TE0630_122

Each socket is intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).

Your vehicle has two accessorypower sockets; one is at the front ofthe center console and the other is inthe console compartment.

To use an accessory power socket,the ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

None of the sockets will power anautomotive type cigarette lighterelement.

Make sure to put the socket coverback in place to prevent any smallforeign objects from getting into thesocket.


Accessory Power Sockets

118

FRONT CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

10/07/12 16:22:34 31TE0630_123

To use the sun visor, pull it down.When using the sun visor for theside window, remove the support rodfrom the clip, and swing it out.In this position, the sun visor can beadjusted by moving it on its slider.Do not use the extended sun visorover the inside mirror.

Make sure you put the sun visorback in place when you are gettinginto or out of the vehicle.

To use the vanity mirror on the backof the sun visor, pull up the cover.

The vanity mirror lights come onwhen you pull up the cover.

To open the sunglasses holder, pushthen release the indent. It willunlatch and swing down. To close it,push it until it latches. Make sure theholder is closed while you are driving.

CONTINUED


Sun Visor Vanity Mirror Sunglasses HolderInstrum

entsand

Controls

119

SUN VISOR

Push

Slide

10/07/12 16:22:47 31TE0630_124

To use a coat hook, pull it down.Close it with a firm push.

Make sure the coat hook is closedwhen you are not using it. This hookis not designed for large or heavyitems.

Some larger styles of sunglassesmay not fit in the holder.

You may also store small items inthis holder. Make sure they aresmall enough to let the holder closeand latch, and that they are notheavy enough to cause the holder topop open while driving.

Pull up the lid to open each pocket.

Coat Hook Center Pocket


120

COAT HOOK

Vehicle without navigation systemis shown.

10/07/12 16:22:58 31TE0630_125

The ceiling light has a three-positionswitch: ON, Door Activated, andOFF. In the Door Activated (center)position, the light comes on whenyou:

The ceiling light (with the switch inthe center position) comes on whenyou remove the key from the ignitionswitch. If you do not open a door, thelight stays on, then fades out inabout 30 seconds.

Unlock the driver’s door with thekey or remote transmitter.

Open either door.

After both doors are closed tightly,the light dims slightly, then fades outin about 30 seconds.

If you leave either door open withoutthe key in the ignition switch, theceiling light will go off after about 15minutes. Turn on a spotlight by pushing the

lens. Push the lens again to turn itoff. You can use the spotlights at alltimes.

CONTINUED

Ceiling Light Spotlights

Interior Lights

Instruments

andC

ontrols

121

DOOR ACTIVATED POSITION

LX

10/07/12 16:23:10 31TE0630_126

The spotlights have a two-positionswitch. In the DOOR position, thelights come on when you open eitherdoor. The lights fade out in about 30seconds after the doors are closedtightly. In the OFF position, thelights do not come on.

The spotlights (with the switch inthe DOOR position) also come onwhen you unlock the door with thekey or the remote transmitter, andwhen you remove the key from theignition switch.

Your vehicle has a courtesy light inthe ignition switch. This light comeson when you open the driver’s door.It fades out in about 30 seconds afterthe door is closed.

Except LX

Interior Lights

Courtesy Lights

122

DOOR ACTIVATED SPOTLIGHT

OFF POSITION

10/07/12 16:23:18 31TE0630_127

The heating and air conditioningsystem in your vehicle provides acomfortable driving environment inall weather conditions.

The standard audio system hasmany features. This sectiondescribes those features and how touse them.

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audiosystem that requires a code numberto enable it.

The security system helps to dis-courage vandalism and theft of yourvehicle.

.............Vents, Heating, and A/C . 124...............Climate Control System . 130

................................Audio System . 138

................................Audio System . 139..........Playing the FM/AM Radio . 140

................Playing the XM Radio . 147.................................Playing Discs . 153

...Disc Changer Error Messages . 162............................Playing an iPod . 163

.................iPod Error Messages . 171Playing a USB Flash Memory

........................................Device . 172USB Flash Memory Device Error

...................................Messages . 180

................................Audio System . 181..........Playing the FM/AM Radio . 182

................Playing the XM Radio . 194.................................Playing Discs . 201

...Disc Changer Error Messages . 212............................Playing an iPod . 213

.................iPod Error Messages . 221Playing a USB Flash Memory

........................................Device . 222

USB Flash Memory Device Error...................................Messages . 231

..................Protecting Your Discs . 232............FM/AM Radio Reception . 235

................Remote Audio Controls . 237......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 239

.................Radio Theft Protection . 240..........................Setting the Clock . 241

............................Security System . 244.........................................Compass . 246

...............................Cruise Control . 250HomeLink Universal

................................Transceiver . 253........HandsFreeLink . 257

Models without navigation system

Models with navigation system

Bluetooth

Features

Features

123

10/07/12 16:23:25 31TE0630_128

＊

＊

: If equipped

Vents, Heating, and A/C

LX and U.S. EX

124

MODE CONTROLBUTTONS

FAN CONTROL DIAL RECIRCULATION BUTTON TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL

MAX A/C BUTTON

AIR CONDITIONING (A/C)BUTTON

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER


10/07/12 16:23:29 31TE0630_129

Turn this dial to increase or decreasethe fan speed and airflow.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the airflow.

This button turns the airconditioning on and off. Theindicator in the button is on whenthe A/C is on.

The system automaticallyturns on the A/C and switches torecirculation mode (see page touse this setting). Air flows from thecenter and side vents in thedashboard. Pressing the , A/C,or any of the mode buttons cancelsMAX A/C, but the A/C stays on.

When the recirculation indicator ison, air from the vehicle’s interior issent throughout the system again.When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from the outside of thevehicle (fresh air mode).

The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.

The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.

Switch to recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger on and off (see page ).

Pushing this button also turns thepower mirror heaters on and off.

/

75

128

Except U.S. LX


Fan Control

Temperature Control

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

MAX A/C Button

Recirculation Button Rear Window DefoggerButton

Features

125

10/07/12 16:23:47 31TE0630_130

When you select or ,the system automatically switches tofresh air mode and turns on the A/C.You cannot turn the A/C off in thismode.

When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode. If you switch the mode from

or to , the systemkeeps the A/C on. The A/Cindicator will not come on if it wasoff to start with.

To turn off the A/C, press the A/Cbutton to illuminate the indicator,then press it again to turn off theA/C.

When you switch to ormode from , the A/C

turns off. But if it was on to startwith, the A/C stays on.

Airflow is divided betweenthe floor vents and the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

Use the mode control buttons toselect the vents air flows from. Someair will flow from the dashboardcorner vents in all modes.

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the floorvents.


Mode Control

126

10/07/12 16:24:04 31TE0630_131

The ventilation system draws inoutside air, circulates it through theinterior, then releases it throughvents near the rear window.

Set the temperature to the lowerlimit.Make sure the A/C is off.Select and fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

The heater uses engine coolant towarm the air. If the engine is cold, itwill be several minutes before youfeel warm air coming from thesystem.

Select .When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode. If you switch the modefrom or , the systemalso automatically turns on theA/C. This helps prevent thewindows from fogging upunintendedly. The A/C indicatorwill not come on if it was off tostart with (see the previous page).Set the fan to the desired speed.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control dial.

Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page

). If it moves near the red zone,turn off the A/C until the gaugereading returns to normal.

Turn on the A/C by pressing thebutton. The indicator in the buttoncomes on when a fan speed isselected.Make sure the temperature is setto maximum cool.Select .If the outside air is humid, selectrecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

1.

2.3.4.

1.

2.3.

65

1.

2.

3.4.

5.

CONTINUED

Ventilation Using the Heater Using the A/C


Features

127

10/07/12 16:24:17 31TE0630_132

If the interior is very warm, you cancool it down more rapidly by partiallyopening the windows, turning on theair conditioning, and setting the fanto maximum speed in fresh air mode.

To cool the interior with MAX A/C:Set the fan to the desired speed.Select MAX A/C.The system automatically turns onthe A/C, selects , andswitches to recirculation mode.Make sure the temperature is setto maximum cool.

Air conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry andcan prevent the windows fromfogging up.

Turn the fan on.Turn on the air conditioning.Select and fresh air mode.Adjust the temperature to yourpreference.

This setting is suitable for all drivingconditions whenever the outsidetemperature is above 32°F (0°C).

To remove fog from the inside of thewindows:

Set the fan to the desired speed, orhigh for faster defrosting.Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. TheA/C indicator will not come on if itwas off to start with.Adjust the temperature so theairflow feels warm.Select / to helpclear the rear window.To increase airflow to thewindshield, close the corner vents.

1.2.3.4.

1.2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.


Dehumidify the Interior To Defog and Defrost

128

10/07/12 16:24:30 31TE0630_133

Turning the fan speed control dial allthe way to the left shuts the systemoff.

Keep the system off for shortperiods only.

To keep stale air and mustinessfrom collecting, you should havethe fan running at all times.

Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C.The A/C indicator does not comeon if it was off to start with.Select .Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum level.

For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

To clear the windows faster, you canclose the dashboard corner vents byrotating the wheel below each vent.This sends more warm air to thewindshield defroster vents. Once thewindshield is clear, select fresh airmode to avoid fogging the windows.

When you switch to , fromor , the A/C stays on.

This helps prevent the windows fromrapidly fogging up when the air issuddenly routed away from thewindshield. If you want to turn theA/C off, press and release the A/Cbutton twice. The indicator in thebutton comes on and then goes off.

1.

2.3.

To Turn Everything OffTo Remove Exterior Frost or IceFrom the Windows


Features

129

10/07/12 16:24:42 31TE0630_134

Climate Control System

Without navigation system With navigation system

EX-L, Canadian EX, and all V6

130

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

MODE CONTROL BUTTON

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURE

DRIVER’S SIDE TEMPERATURECONTROL SWITCH

WINDSHIELDDEFROSTER BUTTON

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER/HEATED MIRRORBUTTON

AUTO BUTTON

ON/OFF BUTTON

SYNC BUTTON

CENTER DISPLAY

AUTO BUTTON

FAN CONTROLBUTTONS

RECIRCULATIONBUTTON

AUTO INDICATOR

AUTO INDICATOR

DRIVER’S SIDE TEMPERATURE

MODE CONTROLBUTTON

SYNCBUTTON

ON/OFFBUTTON

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER/HEATED MIRRORBUTTON

FRONT PASSENGER’SSIDE TEMPERATURE

FRONT PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURE CONTROLSWITCH

U.S. models are shown.

AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON FRONT PASSENGER’SSIDE TEMPERATURECONTROL SWITCH

FRONT PASSENGER’S SIDE TEMPERATURE

AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON

FAN CONTROL SWITCH

WINDSHIELD DEFROSTER BUTTON

DRIVER’S SIDE TEMPERATURE CONTROL SWITCH

10/07/12 16:24:51 31TE0630_135

The automatic climate controlsystem in your vehicle maintains theinterior temperature you select. Thesystem also adjusts the fan speedand airflow levels.

The system automatically selectsthe proper mix of conditionedand/or heated air that will, asquickly as possible, raise or lowerthe interior temperature to yourpreference.

The driver’s side temperature andthe passenger’s side temperature canbe set separately. Push up the switchof the appropriate temperaturecontrol to increase the temperatureof airflow. Push down the switch todecrease it. Each set temperature isshown in the display (in the centerdisplay on models with navigationsystem).

The climate control system for yourvehicle can also be operated usingthe voice control system. See thenavigation system manual forcomplete details.

Press the Auto button. Theindicator in the button also comeson as a reminder. You will seeAUTO on the display (in thecenter display on models withnavigation system).

Set the desired temperature withthe temperature control switch.You can set the driver’s sidetemperature and the passenger’sside temperature separately.

1.

2.

On models with navigation system

CONTINUED

Using Automatic Climate ControlVoice Control System

Temperature Control


Features

131

10/07/12 16:25:03 31TE0630_136

When you set the temperature to itslower limit ( ) or its upper limit( ), the system runs at fullcooling or heating only. It does notregulate the interior temperature.

When you adjust a fan control, thefan is taken out of AUTO mode.

In AUTO mode, the vehicle’s interiortemperature is independentlyregulated for the driver and frontpassenger according to eachadjusted temperature. The systemalso regulates each temperaturebased on the information of thesunlight sensor and the sun’sposition which is updatedautomatically by the navigation’sglobal positioning system (GPS). Ifone side of the vehicle is getting toomuch sun, the system lowers thetemperature only on that side.

When you press this button, theindicator in the button comes on, andthe passenger’s side temperature issynchronized to the driver’s side settemperature. Changing thepassenger’s side temperature makesthe indicator go off and takes thesystem out of SYNC mode.

Each time you press this button, theclimate control system switchesbetween on and off. Turning on thesystem with this button selects yourlast climate control selection.

To turn the system completely off,press the ON/OFF button.

Keep the system completely offfor short periods only.

To keep stale air and mustinessfrom collecting, you should havethe fan running at all times.On models with navigation system

To Turn Everything OffSYNC Button

ON/OFF Button


132

10/07/12 16:25:17 31TE0630_137

▲▼

You can manually select variousfunctions of the climate controlsystem when it is in fully automaticmode. All other features remainautomatically controlled. Making anymanual selection causes the wordAUTO in the display to go out.

Push the switch up to increase thefan speed and airflow. Push theswitch down to decrease them.

This button turns the airconditioning on and off. You will seeA/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.

When you turn the A/C off, thesystem cannot regulate the insidetemperature if you set thetemperature control below theoutside temperature.

When the indicator in the button ison, air from the vehicle’s interior issent through the system again.When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from the outside of thevehicle (fresh air mode).

The outside air intakes for theclimate control system are at thebase of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.

The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.

Switch to recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger off and on (see page ).

Pushing this button also turns thepower mirror heaters on and off.Press the button to increase the

fan speed and airflow. Press thebutton to decrease them.

75

On models without navigation system


CONTINUED

Semi-automatic Operation Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

Fan Control

Recirculation Button Rear Window Defogger Button


Features

133

10/07/12 16:25:32 31TE0630_138

To remove fog from the inside of thewindows, set as follows:

Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C.Adjust the temperature with thedriver’s side temperature controlso the airflow feels warm.Select to help clear therear window.To increase airflow to thewindshield, close the corner vents.For faster defogging, manually setthe fan speed to high.

For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

When the indicator in thebutton is on, the SYNC

indicator also comes on. The frontpassenger’s temperature cannot beset separately from the driver’s.

Use the mode control button toselect the vents the air flows from.Some air will flow from thedashboard vents in all modes.

Airflow is divided betweenthe floor and corner vents and thedefroster vents at the base of thewindshield.

Air flows from the floorvents.

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

This button directs the main airflowto the windshield for fasterdefrosting. It also overrides anymode selection you may have made.

When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. Forfaster defrosting, manually set thefan speed to high. You can alsoincrease airflow to the windshield byclosing the corner vents on thedashboard. To close the vents, rotatethe wheel under each corner vent.

When you turn off bypressing the button again, thesystem returns to its former settings.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Mode Control Windshield Defroster Button


134

10/07/12 16:25:48 31TE0630_139

Your vehicle has two temperaturecontrol switches, one for the driver,and one for the front passenger.

The temperatures of the driver’s sideand the front passenger’s side arecontrolled independently.

CONTINUED

Dual Temperature Control


Without navigation system

With navigation system

Features

135


PASSENGER’S SIDE TEMPERATURECONTROL SWITCH

SYNC BUTTON


PASSENGER’S SIDE TEMPERATURECONTROL SWITCH

SYNC BUTTON

10/07/12 16:25:58 31TE0630_140

The selected temperatures appear inthe display (in the center display onmodels with navigation system).When the indicator in the SYNCbutton is on, you can adjust bothsides to the same temperature bypushing the driver’s sidetemperature control switch up ordown.

When you set the temperature to itsupper or lower limit, it is displayed as

or .

Synchronized Control


136

DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE

10/07/12 16:26:06 31TE0630_141

The climate control system has twosensors: a sunlight sensor on top ofthe dashboard, and a temperaturesensor next to the steering column.Do not cover the sensors or spill anyliquid on them.

Sunlight Sensor/TemperatureSensor


Features

137

SUNLIGHT SENSOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

10/07/12 16:26:13 31TE0630_142

＊

＊An audio system is standard on allmodels. Read the appropriate pages(as shown below) to use yourvehicle’s audio system.

For vehicles without navigationsystem, see pages through .

For vehicles with navigation system,see pages through .

139 180

181 231

Audio System

138

EX-L and all V6 models withoutnavigation system

With navigation system

: EX model has premium audio system. U.S. models are shown.

LX and EX models

10/07/12 16:26:26 31TE0630_143

Most audio system functions can becontrolled by standard buttons, bars,and knobs. In addition, you canaccess some functions by using theselector knob on the audio system.

The knob turns left and right. Use itto scroll through lists, or to makeselections or adjustments to a list ormenu item on the display. When youmake a selection, push the center ofthe selector (ENTER) to go to thatselection.

When the audio system is in XMRadio mode or playing discs, pushingthe selector (ENTER) knob switchesthe display between the normaldisplay and the extended display.The extended display has threesegments to display the detailedinformation.

To select any setting such as theclock, sound adjusting, or thecompass (if equipped), press theMENU button. To use any audiosystem function, the ignition switchmust be in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position. You can select theitem by turning the selector knob.To go back to the previous display,press the RETURN button.

Pressing the MENU button againwill also cancel the menu displaymode.

Selector Knob Menu Display

Audio System (Models without navigation system)

Features

139

SELECTORKNOB

MENUBUTTON

RETURNBUTTON

10/07/12 16:26:34 31TE0630_144

Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models without navigation system)

Without XM Radio With XM Radio

140

MENU BUTTON

PRESETBUTTONS

TITLEBUTTON

TITLEBUTTON

FMBUTTON

SCANBUTTON

AMBUTTON

AMBUTTON

FMBUTTON


RETURN BUTTON

FOLDER BAR

MENU BUTTON

SELECTOR KNOBSELECTOR KNOB

RETURN BUTTON

CATEGORY BAR

A.SEL (AUTO SELECT)BUTTON

SKIP BARSKIP BAR

A.SEL (AUTO SELECT)BUTTON

POWER/VOLUME KNOB POWER/VOLUME KNOB

SCANBUTTON

PRESETBUTTONS

10/07/12 16:26:44 31TE0630_145

－

－

－

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to are displayed.To change bands, press the AM orFM button. On the FM band, ST willbe displayed if the station isbroadcasting in stereo. Stereoreproduction in AM is not available.

On the AM band, AM noisereduction turns on automatically.

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing thepower/volume knob or the AM orFM button. Adjust the volume byturning the power/volume knob.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: tune, skip, scan, the presetbuttons, and auto select.

The skip function searchesup and down from the currentfrequency to find a station with astrong signal. To activate it, pressand hold the or side of theSKIP bar until you hear a beep, thenrelease it.

On the FM band, you can also usethe features provided by the radiodata system (RDS). For moreinformation on the RDS, see page

.

Use the selector knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob right to tune to ahigher frequency, or left to tune to alower frequency.

The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe SCAN button, then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.When the system finds a strongsignal, it will stop and play thatstation for about 10 seconds.

If you do nothing, the system willscan for the next strong station andplay it for 10 seconds. When it playsa station that you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.

143

CONTINUED

To Select a StationTo Play the Radio

SKIP

TUNE

SCAN


Features

141

10/07/12 16:26:55 31TE0630_146

－－Each preset button canstore one frequency on AM and twofrequencies on FM.

If you aretraveling and can no longer receiveyour preset stations, you can use theauto select feature to find stations inthe local area.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if autoselect cannot find a strong station forthat preset button.

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons as previously described.

, press theA. SEL (auto select) button. Thisrestores the presets you originallyset.

Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A-SEL’’flashes in the display, and the systemgoes into scan mode for severalseconds. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM and twelve FM stations inthe preset buttons.

For information on FM/AM radiofrequencies and reception, see page

.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storesix stations each.

Use the tune, skip, scan, or RDSfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Pick a preset button, and hold ituntil you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

1.

2.

3.

4.

235

To turn off auto selectPreset AUTO SELECT


142

10/07/12 16:27:08 31TE0630_147

On the FM band, you can select afavorite station and display theprogram service name provided bythe radio data system (RDS).

The RDS information displayfunction shows the name of the RDSstation you are listening to. With theaudio system on and the FM bandselected, you can turn this functionon or off.

To switch the function between onand off, press and release the TITLEbutton. With the system on, you willsee the ‘‘RDS INFO ON’’ message onthe display. If the station you arelistening to is an RDS station, thedisplay shows the station name.

If the station you are listening to isnot an RDS station, the displaycontinues to show the frequencywith the RDS information displayfunction on.

When you turn off this function bypressing the TITLE button, thedisplay shows ‘‘RDS INFO OFF.’’

CONTINUED

Radio Data System (RDS)

RDS INFO Display


Features

143

RDS INFO DISPLAY ON

10/07/12 16:27:18 31TE0630_148

▲ ▼

On the FM band selected, you canselect the program categoryprovided by the RDS. Press eitherside ( or ) of the CATEGORYbar (FOLDER bar on models withoutXM Radio) to display and select anRDS category. The principal RDScategories are shown as follows:

If the system does not find a station,‘‘NOTHING’’ will be blinking forabout 5 seconds, then the systemgoes back to the last selected station.

This function searches up and downa frequency for the strongest signalfrom the frequencies that carry theselected RDS category information.This can help you to find a station inyour favorite category. To activate it,press and release either side( or ) of the SKIP bar. Youwill see the selected RDS categoryname blinking while searching it.When the system finds a station, theselected RDS category name will bedisplayed again for about 5 seconds.

Press either side of the CATEGORYbar (FOLDER bar on models withoutXM Radio) to select a RDS category.The display shows the selected RDScategory name for about 10 seconds.You can use the search or scanfunction to find radio stations in the

selected RDS category. If you donothing while the RDS categoryname is displayed, the selectedcategory is canceled.

TRAFFIC: Traffic information

INFO: News, information, sports,talk shows, foreign language,personality, public, college, andweather

JAZZ: JazzCLASSIC: Classical music

RELIGION: Programs concernedwith religion

R & B: Rhythm and blues, and softrhythm and blues

OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldiesTOP 40: Top 40 hitsSOFT: Adult hits and soft musicCOUNTRY: Country music

ROCK: Rock, classic rock and softrock music

ALL: All RDS category stationsRadio Data System (RDS) Category

RDS Program Search


144

RDS CATEGORY

10/07/12 16:27:33 31TE0630_149

＊

＊

The scan function samples allstations with strong signals on theselected RDS category. To activate it,press and release the SCAN button.You will see SCAN in the display.The system will scan for a stationwith a strong signal in the selectedRDS category. You will also see theselected RDS category nameblinking while searching it. When itfinds a strong signal, it will stop andplay that station for about 10 seconds.

If you do nothing, the system willscan for the next strong station andplay it for 10 seconds. When it playsa station that you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.


Press the MENU button to displaythe sound settings. Turn the selectorknob to select an appropriate setting:bass, treble, fader, balance, SUBW(subwoofer) and SVC (speed-sensitive volume compensation).Press the selector knob (ENTER) toenter the setting, then turn theselector knob to adjust the setting.

If equipped

You can use the RDS programsearch or scan function even if theRDS information display function isoff.

:CONTINUED

RDS Program SCAN Adjusting the Sound


Features

145

Selector knob adjustabledirection is shown.

FADER is selectable.

10/07/12 16:27:43 31TE0630_150

－

－

－

－

－

－

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control knob to adjust theillumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is turned off.

The SVC has four modes: SVC OFF,SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVCHIGH. Turn the selector knob toadjust the setting to your liking. Ifyou feel the sound is too loud,choose low. If you feel the sound istoo quiet, choose high.

The SVC mode controls the volumebased on vehicle speed. The fasteryou go, the louder the audio volumebecomes. As you slow down, theaudio volume decreases.

Adjusts the strength ofsound from the subwoofer speaker.

If the fader adjustment is set to F9(maximum front level), thesubwoofer is turned off.

Adjusts the volume levelbased on the vehicle speed.

Each mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the selector knob toadjust the setting to your liking.

Adjusts the bass.

Adjusts the treble.

Adjusts the front-to-backstrength of the sound.

Adjusts the side-to-side strength of the sound.

When the level reaches the center,you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.

To return to the normal play, pushthe RETURN or MENU button afteryou stop adjusting a mode.

73

If equipped

Except SVC adjustmentAudio System Lighting

SUBW

SVC

BASS

TREBLE

FADER

BALANCE

Speed-sensitive VolumeCompensation (SVC)


146

SUBWOOFER is selectable.

10/07/12 16:27:58 31TE0630_151

CONTINUED

Playing the XM Radio (EX-L, Canadian EX, and all V6 models without navigation system)

Features

147

XM RADIO BUTTON

SELECTOR KNOB

SCAN BUTTON


MENU BUTTON

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

TITLE BUTTON

RETURN BUTTON

CATEGORY BAR SKIP BAR

10/07/12 16:28:04 31TE0630_152

－

To listen to XM Radio, turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position, and press the

button. The last channel youlistened to will show in the display.Adjust the volume by turning thepower/volume knob.

To switch betweenchannel mode and category mode,press and hold the TITLE buttonuntil the mode changes.

In the channel mode, you can selectall of the available channels. In thecategory mode, such as Jazz, Rock,Classical, etc., you can select all ofthe channels within that category.

Each time you press and release theTITLE button, the display changes inthe following sequence: name, title,and category.

You can also change the mode fromthe menu items. Press the MENUbutton to display the menu items,then turn the selector knob to selectMODE/CATEGORY and press theselector knob (ENTER). Each timeyou press and release the selectorknob (ENTER), the display changesbetween CHANNEL andCATEGORY. To enter the setting,press the TITLE button.

You may experience periods whenXM Radio does not transmit theartist’s name and song titleinformation. If this happens, there isnothing wrong with your system.

Your vehicle is capable of receivingXM Radio anywhere in the UnitedStates and Canada, except Hawaii,Alaska, and Puerto Rico. XM is aregistered trademark of Sirius XMRadio , Inc. and XM CANADA is aregistered business name ofCanadian Satellite Radio Inc.

XM Radio receives signals from twosatellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offersmany channels in several categories.Along with a large selection ofdifferent types of music, XM Radioallows you to view channel andcategory selections in the display.

MODE

Operating the XM Radio


148

10/07/12 16:28:14 31TE0630_153

－

▼ ▲ －－

The SCAN function givesyou a sampling of all channels whilein the channel mode. In the categorymode, only the stations within thatcategory are scanned. To activatescan, press the SCAN button. Thesystem plays each channel innumerical order for a few seconds,then selects the next channel. Whenyou hear a channel you want tocontinue listening to, press thebutton again.

Presseither side of the CATEGORY bar toselect another category.

You can also select a channel orcategory from the list by using theselector knob. Push the selectorknob (ENTER) to switch the displayto the list displayed with threesegments, then turn the knob toselect a channel or category. Pressthe selector knob (ENTER) to setyour selection.

Turn the selector knob tochange channel selections. Turn theknob right for higher numberedchannels and left for lowernumbered channels. In the categorymode, you can only select channelswithin that category.

CONTINUED

SCAN

CATEGORY ( or )TUNE


Features

149

Channel list is shown.

10/07/12 16:28:22 31TE0630_154

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

You can store up to 12preset channels using the six presetbuttons. Each button stores onechannel from the XM1 band and onechannel from the XM2 band.

To store a channel:Press the button. EitherXM1 or XM2 will show in thedisplay.

Use the selector knob, or theCATEGORY bar or SCAN buttonto tune to a desired channel.

In category mode, only channelswithin that category can be selected.In channel mode, all channels can beselected.

Pick the preset button you wantfor that channel. Press and holdthe button until you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store thefirst six channels.

Press the XM button again. Theother XM band will show. Storethe next six channels using steps 2and 3.

Once a channel is stored, simplypress and release the proper presetbutton to tune to it.

XM is loading theaudio or program information.

The channelcurrently selected is no longerbroadcasting.

The encryptioncode is being updated. Wait until theencryption code is fully updated.Channels 0 and 1 should still worknormally.

The signal iscurrently too weak. Move the vehicleto an area away from tall buildings,and with an unobstructed view of thesouthern horizon.

The selected channelnumber does not exist, or is not partof your subscription, or this channelhas no artist or title information atthis time.

There is a problemwith the XM antenna. Please consultyour dealer.

The selectedchannel has no artist or titleinformation at this time.

3.

4.

5.

2.

1.

Preset

XM Radio Display Messages

‘‘LOADING’’

‘‘OFF AIR’’

‘‘UPDATING’’

‘‘NO SIGNAL’’

‘‘ - - - - ’’

‘‘ANTENNA’’

‘‘NO INFO’’


150

10/07/12 16:28:38 31TE0630_155

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas.

Satellite signals are more likely to beblocked by tall buildings andmountains the farther north youtravel from the equator. Carryinglarge items on a roof rack can alsoblock the signal.

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on the north side of aneast/west mountain road.Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road.Driving in tunnels.

Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.

Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.Large items carried on a roof rack.

CONTINUED


Features

151

Signal may be blocked bymountains or large obstacles tothe south.

Signal weaker inthese areas.

SATELLITE

GROUND REPEATER

10/07/12 16:28:51 31TE0630_156

There may be other geographicsituations that could affect XM Radioreception.

After you’ve registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in theXM Radio mode while you wait foractivation. This should take about 30minutes.

If your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM Radio. With the ignitionswitch in the ACCESSORY (I) or theON (II) position, press the

button. A variety of musictypes and styles will play.

If you decide to purchase XM radioservice, contact XM Radio at

, or at1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contactXM CANADA at , orat 1-877-209-0079. You will need togive them your radio I.D. numberand your credit card number. To getyour radio I.D. number, press the

button, then turn theselector knob until ‘‘CH 000’’ appearsin the display. Your I.D. will appearin the display.

While waiting for activation, makesure your vehicle remains in an openarea with good reception. Once youraudio system is activated,‘‘CATEGORY’’ or ‘‘CHANNEL’’ willappear in the display, and you’ll beable to listen to XM Radio broadcasts.XM Radio will continue to send anactivation signal to your vehicle forat least 12 hours from the activationrequest. If the service has not beenactivated after 36 hours, contactXM Radio. In Canada, contact XMCANADA .

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

www.xmradio.com

www.xmradio.ca

Receiving XM Radio Service


152

10/07/12 16:29:00 31TE0630_157

Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)

Without XM Radio With XM RadioF

eatures

153

SCANBUTTON

TITLE BUTTON

PRESETBUTTONS

CD/AUX BUTTON

TITLE BUTTON

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

PRESETBUTTONS

DISC EJECTBUTTON

SCANBUTTON

DISC EJECTBUTTON

CATEGORY BAR SKIP BAR

SELECTOR KNOB

RETURN BUTTON MENU BUTTON


RETURN BUTTON

SKIP BARFOLDER BAR

DISC SLOT

DISC LOAD BUTTON

MP3/WMA INDICATOR

DISC LOAD BUTTON

MP3/WMA INDICATOR

CD BUTTON POWER/VOLUME KNOB

DISC SLOT

SELECTOR KNOB

MENU BUTTON

10/07/12 16:29:10 31TE0630_158

This audio system can also playCD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed inMP3 or WMA format. When playinga disc in MP3, you will see ‘‘MP3’’ inthe display. In WMA format, ‘‘WMA’’will appear in the display. The disc,folder and track numbers aredisplayed. You can select up to 255folders or tracks.

To load or play discs, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position.

You operate the disc changer withthe same controls used for the radio.To select the disc changer, press theCD/AUX or CD button. You will see‘‘CD’’ in the display. The disc andtrack numbers, and the elapsed timeare shown in the display. You canalso select the displayed informationwith the TITLE button (see page

). The system will continuouslyplay a disc until you change modes.

Depending on the software the fileswere made with, it may not bepossible to play some files, or displaysome text data.

Press the LOAD button until youhear a beep and see ‘‘LOAD’’ inthe display. To load only one disc,press and release the LOADbutton.

Your vehicle’s in-dash disc changerholds up to six discs.

If a file on a WMA disc is protectedby digital rights management(DRM), the audio unit displaysUNSUPPORTED, and then skips tothe next file.

Video CDs and DVDs do not work inthis unit.

The disc number for an emptyposition begins blinking.

Insert the disc into the disc slotwhen the green disc load indicatorcomes on. Insert it only abouthalfway; the drive will pull it in therest of the way. You will see‘‘BUSY’’ in the display while thedisc load indicator turns red andblinks as the disc is loaded.

155

1.

2.

3.

To Play a Disc


Loading Discs

154

NOTE:Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

10/07/12 16:29:23 31TE0630_159

CONTINUED

If the text data has more than 16characters, you will see the first 16characters and the indicator inthe display. Press and hold theTITLE button until the next 16characters are shown. You can seeup to 32 characters of the text data.

If you press and hold the TITLEbutton again, the display shows thefirst 16 characters again.

If any letter is not available, it isreplaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the display.When the disc has no text data, youwill see ‘‘NO INFO’’ on the display.

Each time you press the TITLEbutton, the display shows you thetext, if the disc was recorded withtext data.

You can see the album, artist, andtrack name in the display. If a disc isrecorded in MP3 or WMA, you cansee the folder and file name, and theartist, album, and track tag.

With the folder name, you will seethe FOLDER indicator in the display.The TRACK indicator is shown withthe file or track name.

When you press and release theTITLE button while a disc withouttext data is playing, you will see ‘‘NOINFO’’ on the display.

The display shows up to 16characters of selected text data (thefolder name, file name, etc.).

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this unit.

When the disc load indicator turnsgreen and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in thedisplay again, insert the next discin the slot. Do not try to insert adisc until ‘‘LOAD’’ appears. Youcould damage the audio unit.

Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. If you are not loadingall six positions, the system beginsplaying the last disc loaded.

You can also load a disc into anempty position while a disc is playingby pressing the appropriate presetbutton. The system stops playing thecurrent disc and starts the loadingsequence. It then plays the disc justloaded.

4.

5.


Text Data Display FunctionF

eatures

155

10/07/12 16:29:36 31TE0630_160

In MP3 or WMA mode, you can alsoselect a folder or track/file from thelist by using the selector knob. Pushthe selector knob (ENTER) toswitch the display to the listdisplayed with three segments, thenturn the knob to select a folder.Press the selector knob (ENTER) tochange the display to the track/filelist, then turn the same knob toselect a track/file. Press the selectorknob (ENTER) to set your selection.

Use the SKIP bar while a disc isplaying to select passages andchange tracks (files in MP3 or WMAmode).

In MP3 or WMA mode, use theFOLDER bar (CATEGORY bar onmodels with XM Radio) to selectfolders in the disc and use eitherside of the skip bar to change files.

To select a different disc, use theappropriate preset buttons (1through 6). If you select an emptyposition, the system will go into theloading sequence (see page ).

When playing a CD-DA with textdata, the album and track name areshown in the display. With a disc inMP3 or WMA, the display shows thefolder and file name.

When you turn on the audio systemnext time, the system keeps yourselection with the TITLE button.

You will also see some text dataunder these conditions:

When a new folder, file, or track isselected.

When you change the audio modeto play a disc with text data or inMP3 or WMA.

When you insert a disc, and thesystem begins to play.

154


To Change or Select Tracks/Files

156

Folder Selection

Press ENTERTrack Selection

10/07/12 16:29:50 31TE0630_161

－

▲ ▼

▲

▼

－

CONTINUED

You can select any type of repeat,random and scan modes by using theMENU button and the selector knob.Push the MENU button to displaythe menu items, then turn theselector knob to select ‘‘PLAYMODE.’’ Press the selector knob(ENTER) to set the selection.

Toselect a different folder, press eitherside ( or ) of the FOLDER bar(CATEGORY bar on models withXM Radio) to move to the beginningof the next folder. Press the sideto skip to the next folder, and pressthe side to skip to the beginningof the previous folder.

Each time you press andrelease the side of the SKIP bar,the player skips forward to thebeginning of the next track (file inMP3 or WMA mode). Press andrelease the side of the bar toskip backward to the beginning ofthe current track. Press it again toskip to the beginning of the previoustrack.

To move rapidly within a track or file,press and hold either side ( or

) of the SKIP bar.

In MP3 or WMA mode


To Select Repeat, Random or ScanMode:FOLDER SELECTION

SKIPF

eatures

157

MENU ITEMS

10/07/12 16:29:58 31TE0630_162

－

－

This feature,when activated, replays all the fileson the selected folder in the orderthey are compressed in MP3 orWMA. To activate folder repeatmode, select REPEAT ONE FLDfrom the menu items. You will seeF-REPEAT in the display. Thesystem continuously replays thecurrent folder. Select normal play toturn it off. Selecting a differentfolder with the FOLDER bar(CATEGORY bar on models withXM Radio) also turns off the repeatfeature.

Tocontinuously replay a track (file inMP3 or WMA mode), selectREPEAT ONE TRK from the menuitems. You will see REPEAT in thedisplay. Select normal play to turn itoff.Pressing either side of the SKIP baralso turns off the repeat feature.

To cancel the selected repeat,random, or scan mode, press theMENU button to show ‘‘PLAYMODE,’’ then press the selectorknob (ENTER). When you see‘‘NORMAL PLAY,’’ press ENTERagain.

Turn the selector knob to select anappropriate repeat, random or scanmode, then press the selector knob(ENTER) to set your selection.

In MP3 or WMA mode


REPEAT ONE FLD

REPEAT ONE TRK

158

PLAY MODE ITEMS

10/07/12 16:30:06 31TE0630_163

－－

－

－

－

CONTINUED

Pressing either side of the skip bar,or selecting a different disc (usingthe preset buttons) or folder (usingthe FOLDER or CATEGORY bar)turns off the SCAN or F-SCANfeature.

You can also select the folder scanfeature from the menu items withthe selector knob (see page ).

This functionsamples the first file in each folder inthe order they are stored. Toactivate the folder scan feature,press and release the SCAN buttonrepeatedly. You will see F-SCAN inthe display. You will get a 10 secondsampling of the first file in eachfolder. Press and hold the SCANbutton to get out of the folder scanmode and play the last file sampled.

This featurecontinuously replays the current disc.To activate disc repeat, selectREPEAT DISC from the menu items.You will see D-REPEAT in thedisplay. Select normal play to turn itoff.

This feature,when activated, plays the files withinthe current folder in random order,rather than in the order they arecompressed in MP3 or WMA. Toactivate folder random play, selectRANDOM IN FLD from the menuitems. You will see F-RANDOM inthe display. The system will thenselect and play files randomly. Thiscontinues until you deactivate folderrandom play by selecting normal play,or you select a different folder withthe FOLDER bar (CATEGORY baron models with XM Radio).

This featureplays the tracks within a disc (thefiles in MP3 or WMA mode) inrandom order. To activate randomplay, select RANDOM IN DISC fromthe menu items. You will seeRANDOM in the display. Selectnormal play to return to normal play.

The SCAN functionsamples all the tracks on the disc inthe order they are recorded on thedisc (all files in the selected folder inMP3 or WMA mode). To activate thescan feature, press and release theSCAN button. You will see SCAN inthe display. You will get a 10 secondsampling of each track/file in thedisc/folder. Press and hold theSCAN button to get out of scanmode and play the last track sampled.

You can also select the scan featurefrom the menu items with theselector knob (see page ).157

157

In MP3 or WMA mode

In MP3 or WMA mode


SCAN FLDREPEAT DISC

RANDOM IN FLD

RANDOM IN DISC

SCAN TRK

Features

159

10/07/12 16:30:16 31TE0630_164

－

Each time you press and release theSCAN button, the mode changesfrom scan, disc scan, then to normalplay.

Each time you press and release theSCAN button, the mode changesfrom file scan, folder scan, disc scan,then to normal play.

When the first track on the last disc,or the first file in the last main folderin the last disc begins to play, thedisc scan mode will be canceled.Pressing either side of the skip baror selecting a different folder withthe FOLDER or CATEGORY baralso turns off the scan feature.

You can also select the disc scanfeature from the menu items withthe selector knob (see page ).

Press the eject button ( ) toremove the disc. If you eject the disc,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadthe disc after 10 seconds and beginplaying.

You can also eject the disc when theignition switch is off.

To play the radio when a disc isplaying, press the AM, FM or XM (ifequipped) button. Press the CD(CD/AUX on models with XMRadio) button again to switch back tothe disc changer.

You can also press the MODEbutton on the steering wheel tochange modes.

This feature, whenactivated, samples the first track oneach disc in order (the first file inthe main folder on each disc in MP3or WMA mode). To activate the discscan feature, press and release theSCAN button repeatedly untilD-SCAN shows in the display. Thesystem will then play the first track/file in the first main folder on thefirst disc for about 10 seconds. If youdo nothing, the system will then playthe following first track/file for 10seconds each. When it plays a track/file that you want to continuelistening to, press and hold theSCAN button again.

157

In MP3 or WMA mode

To Stop Playing a DiscSCAN DISC


160

10/07/12 16:30:27 31TE0630_165

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with thepower/volume knob or by turningoff the ignition switch, the disc willstay in the drive. When you turn thesystem back on, the disc will beginplaying where it left off.

For information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page

.To remove the disc currently in play,press the eject button. When a disc isremoved from a slot, the systemautomatically begins the loadsequence so you can load anotherdisc in that position. If you do notremove the disc from the changerwithin 10 seconds, the disc willreload into the slot. Then the systemreturns to the previous mode (AM,FM, or XM Radio).

To remove a different disc from thechanger, first select it with theappropriate preset button. When thatdisc begins playing, press the ejectbutton. Continue pressing the ejectbutton to remove all the discs fromthe changer.

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is off. The disc thatwas last selected is ejected first.

232

Protecting DiscsRemoving Discs from the In-dashDisc Changer


Features

161

10/07/12 16:30:35 31TE0630_166

The chart on the right explains theerror messages you may see in thedisplay while playing a disc.

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, pressthe eject button. After ejecting thedisc, check it for damage ordeformation. If there is no damage,insert the disc again.For additional information ondamaged discs, see page .

The audio system will try to play thedisc. If there is still a problem, theerror message will reappear. Pressthe eject button, and pull out the disc.Insert a different disc. If the newdisc plays, there is a problem withthe first disc. If the error messagecycle repeats and you cannot clear it,take your vehicle to a dealer.

SolutionCauseError Message

233

Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.Current track will be skipped. The nextsupported track or file plays automatically.Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s).Check the disc for serious damage, signs ofdeformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt(see page 233). Insert the disc again. If the codedoes not disappear, or the disc(s) cannot beremoved, consult your dealer. Do not try toforce the disc out of the player.

High Temperature

Track/File format notsupported

Mechanical Error

Servo Error

Disc Changer Error Messages (Models without navigation system)

162

HEAT ERROR

UNSUPPORTED

BAD DISCPLEASE CHECK

OWNERSMANUAL PUSH

EJECTMECH ERROR

CHANGER ERRORCHECK DISC LOAD


OWNERSMANUAL

10/07/12 16:30:45 31TE0630_167

Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)

Without XM Radio With XM RadioF

eatures

163

RETURN BUTTON

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

TITLE BUTTON

CD/AUX BUTTON

MENU BUTTON

SELECTOR KNOB

SKIP BAR SKIP BAR

MENU BUTTON

SELECTOR KNOB

RETURN BUTTON


TITLE BUTTON

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

AUX BUTTONiPod INDICATOR iPod INDICATOR

10/07/12 16:30:55 31TE0630_168

This audio system can select andplay the audio files on the iPod withthe same controls used for the discplayer. To play an iPod, connect it tothe USB adapter cable in the consolecompartment by using your dockconnector, then press the CD/AUXbutton (AUX button on modelswithout XM Radio). The ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position. The iPod willalso be recharged with the ignitionswitch in these positions.

The audio system reads and playsplayable sound files on the iPod. Thesystem cannot operate an iPod as amass storage device. The system willonly play songs stored on the iPodwith iTunes.

iPod and iTunes are registeredtrademarks owned by Apple Inc.

iPods compatible with your audiosystem using the USB adapter cableare:

Use only compatible iPods with thelatest software. iPods that are notcompatible will not work in this audiounit.

SoftwareVer. 1.1.2 or more

Ver. 2.0.1 or more

Ver. 1.3.0 or more

Ver. 1.3.1 or moreVer. 1.1.3 or more

Ver. 1.1.3 or more

Ver. 1.0.3 or more

Ver. 1.0.1 or more


ModeliPod classic(80/160 G)iPod classic(120 G)iPod with video(iPod 5thgeneration)iPod nanoiPod nano2nd generationiPod nano3rd generationiPod nano4th generationiPod nano5th generationiPod touchiPod touch2nd generation

To Play an iPod


164

10/07/12 16:31:03 31TE0630_169

Do not connect your iPod using ahub.

Do not keep the iPod in thevehicle. Direct sunlight and highheat will damage it.

Do not use an extension cablebetween the USB adapter cableequipped with your vehicle andyour dock connector.

We recommend backing up yourdata before playing it. Connect your dock connector to

the iPod correctly and securely.

Install the dock connector to theUSB adapter cable securely.

Pull out the USB connector fromthe holder.

Some devices cannot be poweredor charged via the USB adapter. Ifthis is the case, use the accessoryadapter to supply power to yourdevice.

1. 2.

3.

CONTINUED

Connecting an iPod


Features

165

NOTE:

DOCK CONNECTOR

USB CONNECTORUSB ADAPTER CABLE

USB CONNECTOR

10/07/12 16:31:17 31TE0630_170

－

If the iPod indicator does not appearin the audio display, check theconnections, and try to reconnect theiPod a few times.

If the audio system still does notrecognize the iPod, the iPod mayneed to be reset. Follow theinstructions that came with youriPod, or you can find resetinstructions online at

Each time you press the TITLEbutton the display mode switchesbetween the album name, the songname, the artist name, or name off(which turns off the text display).

Use the SKIP bar while an iPod isplaying to select passages andchange files.

Each time you press andrelease the side of the SKIP bar,the system skips forward to thebeginning of the next file. Press andrelease the side of the bar toskip backward to the beginning ofthe current file. Press it again to skipto the beginning of the previous file.

To move rapidly within a file, pressand hold either side ( or )of the SKIP bar.

Turning the selector knob to theright or the left also changes the file.


www.apple.com/itunes/

Text Data Display Function To Change or Select Files

SKIP


166

10/07/12 16:31:28 31TE0630_171

You can also select a file from anylist on the iPod menu: playlists,artists, albums and songs, by usingthe selector knob. Push the selectorknob (ENTER) to switch the displayto an iPod menu, then turn theselector knob to select a desired list.Press ENTER to set your selection.

The display shows items on theselected list. Turn the selector knobto select an item, then press ENTERto set your selection.

If you select ‘‘ALL,’’ all available fileson the selected list are played.

Pressing the RETURN button goesback to the previous display andpressing the MENU button cancelsthis setting mode.

CONTINUED

To Select a File from iPod Menu


Features

167

Push ENTER.

10/07/12 16:31:39 31TE0630_172

You can select any type of repeat andshuffle mode by using the MENUbutton and the selector knob. Pressthe MENU button to display themenu items, then turn the selectorknob to select ‘‘PLAY MODE.’’ PressENTER to set the selection.

Turn the selector knob to select aplay mode: normal play, shuffle off,shuffle all, shuffle album, repeat off,or repeat one track, then pressENTER to set your selection.

To cancel the selected mode, pressthe MENU button and turn theselector knob to show ‘‘PLAYMODE,’’ then press ENTER. Whenyou see ‘‘NORMAL PLAY,’’ pressENTER again.

To Select Repeat or Shuffle Mode:


168

MENU ITEMS PLAY MODE ITEMS

10/07/12 16:31:47 31TE0630_173

－

－

－

－

－

This featureplays all available files in a selectedlist (playlists, artists, albums orsongs) in random order.You will see SHUFFLE in the display.Select the normal play mode orSHUFFLE OFF to turn off thisfeature.

This featureplays all available albums in aselected list (playlists, artists, albumsor songs) in random order. The filesin each album are played in therecorded order. You will see ALBSHUF in the display.Select the normal play mode orSHUFFLE OFF to turn off thisfeature.

This feature turnsoff the repeat mode.

Thisfeature continuously plays a file. Youwill see REPEAT in the display.Select normal play or REPEAT OFFto turn it off.

This featureturns off either of the shuffle modes(SHUFFLE ALL and SHUFFLEALBUM).

Pressing either side of the SKIP baror turning the selector knob changesthe file while keeping the repeatfeature.

Pressing either side of the SKIP baror turning the selector knob changesa file while keeping the shufflefunction.

Available operating functions vary onmodels or versions. Some functionsmay not be available on the vehicle’saudio system.

SHUFFLE ALL

SHUFFLE ALBUM

REPEAT OFF

REPEAT ONE TRK

SHUFFLE OFF


Features

169

NOTE:

10/07/12 16:31:57 31TE0630_174

＊

＊

You can disconnect the iPod at anytime when you see the ‘‘OK todisconnect’’ message in the iPoddisplay. Always make sure you see‘‘OK to disconnect’’ message in theiPod display before you disconnect it.Make sure to follow the iPod’sinstructions on how to disconnectthe dock connector from the USBadapter cable.

If you see an error message in thedisplay, see page .

The displayed message mayvary on models or versions.On some models, there is nomessage to disconnect.

If you reconnect the same iPod, thesystem may begin playing where itleft off, depending on what mode theiPod is in when it is reconnected.

To play the radio, press the AM, FM,or button. Press the CD/AUX button to switch between discmode (if a disc is loaded) and theiPod and AUX. On models withoutXM Radio, press the CD button toswitch to the disc mode. Pressingthe AUX button switches the audiomode between the iPod and AUX.


:

171

Disconnecting an iPodTo Stop Playing Your iPod iPod Error Messages


170

10/07/12 16:32:06 31TE0630_175

If you see an error message on theaudio display while playing an iPod,find the solution in the chart to theright. If you cannot clear the errormessage, take your vehicle to yourdealer.

SolutionError Message Cause

There is a problem with the USB adapter unit.Disconnect the device. Then, turn the audiosystem off, and turn it on again. Do notreconnect the device that caused the error.

Appears when the iPod is empty. Store somefiles in the iPod.Appears when an unsupported iPod isconnected. See page 164 for the specificationinformation for iPods. If it appears when asupported iPod is connected, update the iPodsoftware to the newer version.Appears when the system does notacknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.

USB ROM Error

Appears when anincompatible device isconnected.

No files in iPod

Use of unsupportediPod

Recognition failure ofiPod

iPod Error Messages (Models without navigation system)

Features

171

USB ERRORBAD USBDEVICE

PLEASE CHECKOWNERSMANUAL

iPod NO SONG

UNSUPPORTEDVER.

CONNECT RETRY

10/07/12 16:32:12 31TE0630_176

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)

Without XM Radio With XM Radio

172

SCANBUTTON

SKIP BAR

SCANBUTTON

SKIP BAR


USBINDICATOR

USBINDICATOR

SELECTOR KNOB

MENU BUTTONRETURN BUTTON

SELECTOR KNOB

MENU BUTTON

CATEGORY BAR

RETURN BUTTON

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

AUX BUTTONFILE TYPE INDICATOR

TITLE BUTTON

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

TITLE BUTTON

FILE TYPE INDICATOR CD/AUX BUTTON

FOLDER BAR

10/07/12 16:32:23 31TE0630_177

＊

＊

CONTINUED

Do not use a device such as a cardreader or hard drive as the deviceor your files may be damaged.

Do not connect your USB flashmemory device using a hub.

Do not use an extension cable tothe USB adapter cable equippedwith your vehicle.

Do not keep a USB flash memorydevice in the vehicle. Directsunlight and high heat will damageit.

We recommend backing up yourdata before playing a USB flashmemory device.

Some USB flash memory devices(such as devices with security lock-out features, etc.) will not work inthis audio unit.

The recommended USB flashmemory devices are 256 MB orhigher, and formatted with the FATfile system. Some digital audioplayers may be compatible as well.

Only AAC format files recordedwith iTunes are playable on thisaudio unit.

The audio system reads and playsthe audio files on the USB flashmemory device in MP3, WMA orAAC formats. Depending on theformat, the display shows MP3,WMA or AAC when a USB flashmemory device is playing. The USBflash memory device limit is up to700 folders or up to 65535 files.

This audio system can select andplay the audio files on a USB flashmemory device with the samecontrols used for the disc player. Toplay a USB flash memory device,connect it to the USB adapter cablein the console compartment, thenpress the CD/AUX button (AUXbutton on models without XM Radio).The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

:To Play a USB Flash MemoryDevice


Features

173

NOTE:

10/07/12 16:32:35 31TE0630_178

Depending on the type ofencoding and writing softwareused, there may be cases wherecharacter information does notdisplay properly.

Depending on the type andnumber of files, it may take sometime before they begin to play.

Depending on the software thefiles were made with, it may not bepossible to play some files, ordisplay some text data.


The order of files in USB playbackmay be different from the order offiles displayed in PC or otherdevices etc. Files are played in theorder stored in USB flash memorydevice.

Some versions of MP3, WMA, orAAC format may not be supported. Ifan unsupported file is found, theaudio unit displays UNSUPPORTED,then skips to the next file.


174

Combining a low sampling f requencywith a low bitrate may result inextremely degraded sound quality.

10/07/12 16:32:43 31TE0630_179

Connect the USB flash memorydevice to the USB adapter cablecorrectly and securely.

When the USB flash memory deviceis connected, the USB indicator isshown in the display.

Each time you press the TITLEbutton, the display mode shows youin sequence, the folder name, the filename, the artist name, the albumname, the song name, or name off(which turns off the text display).



1. 2.

CONTINUED

Connecting a USB Flash MemoryDevice

Text Data Display Function


Features

175

USB CONNECTORUSB ADAPTER CABLE

USB CONNECTOR

10/07/12 16:32:54 31TE0630_180

－

－

▲▼

Use the SKIP bar while a USB flashmemory device is playing to selectpassages and change files.



Turning the selector knob to theright or the left also changes the file.

You can also select a folder or filefrom the list by using the selectorknob. Push the selector knob(ENTER) to switch the display to thefolder list, then turn the selectorknob to select a folder. PressENTER to change the display to thefile list, then turn the same knob toselect a file. Press ENTER to setyour selection.

To select adifferent folder, press and releaseeither side of the CATEGORY bar(FOLDER bar on models withoutXM Radio). Press the side to skipto the next folder, and press theside to skip to the beginning of theprevious folder.

To Change or Select Files To Select a File from Folder and FileLists

SKIP

Folder Selection


176

Folder Selection

Track Selection

Press ENTER.

10/07/12 16:33:06 31TE0630_181

Pressing the RETURN button goesback to the previous display andpressing the MENU button cancelsthis setting mode.

You can select any type of repeat,random and scan modes by using theMENU button and the selector knob.Push the MENU button to displaythe menu items, then turn theselector knob to select ‘‘PLAYMODE.’’ Press the selector knob(ENTER) to set the selection.

Turn the selector knob to select anappropriate repeat, random or scanmode, then press the selector knob(ENTER) to set your selection.

To cancel the selected mode, pressthe MENU button and turn theselector knob to show ‘‘PLAYMODE,’’ then press ENTER. Whenyou see ‘‘NORMAL PLAY,’’ pressENTER again.

CONTINUED

To Select Repeat, Random or ScanMode:


Features

177

MENU ITEMS

10/07/12 16:33:17 31TE0630_182

－－

－

－－

This functionsamples all files in the selectedfolder in the order they are stored.To activate the scan feature, pressand release the SCAN button. Youwill see SCAN in the display. You willget a 10 second sampling of each filein the folder. Press and hold theSCAN button to get out of the scanmode and play the last file sampled.

You can also select the scan featurefrom the menu items with theselector knob (see page ).

This featurereplays all the files on the selectedfolder in the order they are stored.Select normal play to turn it off.Pressing either side of theCATEGORY bar (FOLDER bar onmodels without XM Radio) also turnsoff this feature.

This featureplays the files in the selected folderin random order. You will seeF-RANDOM in the display. Selectnormal play to turn it off.

This featureplays all the files in random order.You will see RANDOM in the display.Select normal play to turn it off.

Thisfeature continuously plays a file.Select normal play to turn it off.Pressing either side of the SKIP baralso turns off this feature.

177

SCAN TRKREPEAT ONE FLD

RANDOM IN FLD

RANDOM ALLREPEAT ONE TRK


178

PLAY MODE ITEMS

10/07/12 16:33:26 31TE0630_183

－ This functionsamples the first file in each folder inthe order they are stored. Toactivate the folder scan feature,press and release the SCAN buttonrepeatedly. You will see F-SCAN inthe display. You will get a 10 secondsampling of the first file in eachfolder. Press and hold the SCANbutton to get out of the folder scanmode and play the last file sampled.

You can also select the folder scanfeature from the menu items withthe selector knob (see page ).

You can disconnect the USB flashmemory device at any time even ifthe USB mode is selected on theaudio system. Make sure to followthe USB flash memory device’sinstructions when you remove it.

If you see an error message in thedisplay, see page .

To play the radio, press the FM, AM,or button. Press the CD/AUX button to switch between discmode (if a disc is loaded) and theUSB and AUX. On models withoutXM Radio, press the CD button toswitch to the disc mode. Pressingthe AUX button switches the audiomode between the USB and AUX.


If you reconnect the same USB flashmemory device, the system willbegin playing where it left off.

Select normal play to turn eitherscan feature off. Pressing either sideof the CATEGORY (FOLDER) orSKIP bar also turns off the feature.

177

180

To Stop Playing a USB FlashMemory Device

SCAN FLD

USB Flash Memory Device ErrorMessages


Disconnecting a USB Flash MemoryDevice

Features

179

10/07/12 16:33:38 31TE0630_184

If you see an error message on theaudio display while playing a USBflash memory device, find thesolution in the chart to the right. Ifyou cannot clear the error message,take your vehicle to your dealer.



Appears when the files in the USB flashmemory device are DRM or an unsupportedformat. This error message appears for about 3seconds, then plays the next song.Appears when the USB flash memory device isempty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC filesin the USB flash memory device. Save someMP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flashmemory device.Appears when an unsupported device isconnected. See page 173 for the specificationinformation for the USB flash memory device.If it appears when a supported device isconnected, reconnect the device.

USB ROM Error


Use of unsupportedfiles

No files in USB flashmemory device

Use of unsupportedUSB flash memorydevice

USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Models without navigation system)

180



UNPLAYABLEFILE

USB NO SONG

UNSUPPORTED

10/07/12 16:33:44 31TE0630_185

Most audio system functions can stillbe controlled by standard buttons,dials, and knobs, but some functionscan only be accessed using theinterface dial. The interface dial hastwo parts, a knob and a selector.

The knob turns left and right. Use itto make selections or adjustments toa list or menu on the screen.

The selector can be pushed left,right, up, down, and in. Use theselector to scroll through lists, toselect menus, and to highlight menuitems. When you make a selection,push the center of the selector(ENTER) to go to that selection.

The audio system can also beoperated by voice control. See thenavigation system manual forcomplete details.

Interface Dial Voice Control System

Audio System (Models with navigation system)

Features

181

SELECTORKNOB

ENTER

10/07/12 16:33:53 31TE0630_186

Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)

182

INTERFACE DIAL

CENTER DISPLAY

SKIP BAR

NAVIGATION SCREEN

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

TUNE BAR

FM/AM BUTTON

CATEGORY BAR

AUDIO BUTTON

SOUND BUTTON


SCAN/A.SEL(SCAN/AUTO SELECT) BAR

10/07/12 16:33:58 31TE0630_187

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position. Press the AUDIO button toview the audio control display. Turnthe system on by pressing thepower/volume knob or the FM/AMbutton. Adjust the volume by turningthe power/volume knob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to are shown onthe display. To change bands, press

the FM/AM button. You can alsochange bands by pushing theinterface selector up. Each time youpush it up, the band will change toFM1, FM2, or AM. On the FM bands,STEREO will be shown on thenavigation screen and ST on thecenter display, if the station isbroadcasting in stereo. Stereoreproduction on AM is not available.

On the AM band, AM noisereduction turns on automatically.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: tune, skip (seek), scan, thepreset buttons, and auto select.On the FM band, you can also usethe features provided by the radiodata system (RDS). For moreinformation on the RDS, see page

.186

CONTINUED

To Play the FM/AM Radio To Select a Station


Features

183

STEREO INDICATOR BAND

10/07/12 16:34:08 31TE0630_188

－

－－

The skip (seek)function searches up and down fromthe current frequency to find astation with a strong signal. Toactivate it, press either side ( or

) of the SKIP bar, then releaseit. You can also activate the skipfunction (SEEK is displayed on thescreen) by pushing the interfaceselector to the right or left.

The SCAN functionsamples all stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN side ofthe SCAN/A.SEL bar, then release it.

To scan with the interface dial, pushthe selector down, and then push itto the right. You will see SCANflashing on the screen.

Use the TUNE bar to tunethe radio to a desired frequency.Press the right side of the bar totune to a higher frequency, or theleft side to tune to a lower frequency.To tune with the interface dial, pushthe selector down, and turn the knobto TUNE icon. Then press ENTERon the selector, and turn the knob tothe desired frequency. To exit theTUNE mode, press ENTER on theselector, then push the selector up.


SKIP (SEEK)

SCANTUNE

184

TUNE ICON

SCAN INDICATOR

10/07/12 16:34:16 31TE0630_189

－

－

When the system finds a strongsignal, it will stop and play thatstation for about 10 seconds. If youdo nothing, the system will then scanfor the next strong station and play itfor 10 seconds. When it plays astation that you want to listen to,press the scan side of the bar again,or push the interface selector to theright again.

Each preset button orpreset icon can store one frequencyon AM and two frequencies on FM.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo sets of FM frequencies withthe preset buttons (on-screenicons).

Use the tune, skip (seek), scan, orRDS function to tune the radio to adesired station.

Press the preset button, and holdit until you hear a beep. You canalso store frequencies with theinterface dial. Select the preseticon you want to store thefrequency on, then press ENTERon the interface selector, and holdit for more than 2 seconds.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

If you aretraveling and can no longer receiveyour preset stations, you can use theauto select feature to find stations inthe local area.

Push the interface selector down toscroll down the screen, highlightA.SEL, then press ENTER on theinterface selector. You will seeA.SEL on the screen, and the systemgoes into scan mode for severalseconds.

2.

3.

4.

1.

CONTINUED

To store a preset memory location:


Preset

AUTO SELECT

Features

185

A.SEL INDICATOR

A.SEL ICON

PRESET ICON

10/07/12 16:34:26 31TE0630_190

On the FM band, you can select afavorite station and display theprogram service name provided bythe radio data system (RDS).

, press theA. SEL side of the bar. This restoresthe presets you originally set.

For information on FM/AM radiofrequencies and reception, see page

.

You can also press the A.SEL side ofthe SCAN/A.SEL bar. You will seeA.SEL on the screen, and the systemgoes into scan mode for severalseconds. The system stores thefrequencies of six AM and twelveFM stations in the preset buttons.

press ENTERon the interface selector.

You will see ‘‘0’’ displayed if autoselect cannot find a strong station forevery preset button.If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons (icons) as previouslydescribed.

The RDS INFO display functionshows the name of the station youare listening to. With the audiosystem on and the FM band selected,you can turn this function on or off.

To switch the function between onand off, press and release the TITLEbutton. With the system on, you willsee the ‘‘RDS INFO ON’’ message onthe display. If the station you arelistening to is an RDS station, thedisplay shows the station name.

235

To turn off auto selectTo turn off auto select,


Radio Data System (RDS)

RDS INFO Display

186

RDS INFO DISPLAY ON

10/07/12 16:34:37 31TE0630_191

ROCK: Rock, classic rock and softrock musicCOUNTRY: Country musicSOFT: Adult hits and soft musicTOP 40: Top 40 hitsOLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldiesR & B: Rhythm and blues, and softrhythm and bluesRELIGION: Programs concernedwith religionCLASSIC: Classical musicJAZZ: JazzINFO: News, information, sports,talk shows, foreign language,personality, public, college, andweather

With the FM band selected, you canselect the program type provided bythe RDS. Press the AUDIO button todisplay the radio information on thescreen. Push down the selector onthe interface dial, then turn the knobto select RDS SEARCH icon. PressENTER to set your selection. Theprincipal RDS categories are shownas follows:

If the station you are listening to isnot an RDS station, the audio screenand the center display continue toshow the frequency.

ALL: All RDS category stations

TRAFFIC: Traffic information

When you turn off this function bypressing the TITLE button, thecenter display shows ‘‘RDS INFOOFF.’’

CONTINUED

Radio Data System (RDS) Category


Features

187

RDS SEARCH ICON

10/07/12 16:34:53 31TE0630_192

▲ ▼

You can also select an RDS categorywith the CATEGORY bar. Presseither side ( or ) of theCATEGORY bar to display an RDScategory in the center display. Selecta category by pressing either side ofthe bar.

This function searches up and downa frequency for the strongest signalfrom the frequencies that carry theselected RDS category information.This can help you to find a station inyour favorite category. To activate it,press and release either side( or ) of the SKIP bar. Youwill also see the selected RDScategory name blinking in the centerdisplay while searching it. When thesystem finds a station, the selectedRDS category name will be displayedagain for about 5 seconds in thecenter display.


Turn the selector to select an RDScategory. You can use the search orscan function to find radio stationson the selected RDS category bypressing the selector to the rightrepeatedly. Press ENTER to set yourselection. If you do nothing while theRDS category is selected, theselected category is canceled.

RDS Program Search


188

RDS CATEGORY U.S. model is shown.

RDS CATEGORY

10/07/12 16:35:03 31TE0630_193

To activate RDS program searchwith the interface dial, push theAUDIO button to display the FMradio information on the screen.Push the selector down, and turn theknob to select the RDS SEARCHicon. Press ENTER on the selector.The screen shows you the RDSprogram category list.

Turn the knob to the desired RDScategory. The scan function samples all

stations with strong signals on theselected RDS category. To activate it,press and release the SCAN side ofthe SCAN/A.SEL bar. You will seeSCAN in the center display. Thesystem will scan for a station with astrong signal in the selected RDScategory. You will also see theselected RDS category nameblinking in the center display whilesearching it. When the system findsone, it will stop and play that stationfor about 10 seconds.

While the RDS category is selected,move the selector knob to the rightto select SEEK in the upper rightcorner of the screen. Then pressENTER to activate the seek function.

CONTINUED

RDS Program SCAN


Features

189

RDS CATEGORY LIST

SEEK is selected.

SEEK/SCAN ICON

10/07/12 16:35:12 31TE0630_194

Turn the knob to the desired RDScategory.

To activate RDS program scan withthe interface dial, push the AUDIObutton to display the FM radioinformation on the screen. Push theselector down, and turn the knob toselect the RDS SEARCH icon. PressENTER on the selector. The screenshows you the RDS category list.

If you do nothing, the system willscan for the next strong station andplay it for 10 seconds. When it playsa station that you want to listen to,press the SCAN side of the SCAN/A.SEL bar again.


While the RDS category is selected,move the selector knob to the rightto select SCAN in the upper rightcorner of the screen. Then pressENTER to activate the scan function.

You can use the RDS programsearch or scan function even if theRDS information display function isoff. In this case, the display shows afrequency in place of a RDS stationname.


190

SEEK/SCAN ICON

RDS CATEGORY LIST

SCAN is selected.

10/07/12 16:35:20 31TE0630_195

This function displays the radio textinformation of the selected RDSstation.

To activate radio text display, usethe interface dial. Push the selectordown, and turn the knob to selectRADIO TEXT icon. Press ENTER onthe selector to enter the setting.

The display shows up to 64characters on the selected RDSstation.

If the selected RDS station has theradio text information, you will seethe text indicator on the screen.

Radio Text Display


Features

191

The text is displayedaccording to theinformation from RDS.

RADIO TEXT ICON

TEXT INDICATOR

10/07/12 16:35:29 31TE0630_196

To adjust them, press the AUDIObutton, push the interface selectordown, and turn the interface knob toSOUND. Then press ENTER on theselector.

BASS, TREBLE, FADER, andBALANCE are each adjustable. Youcan also adjust the strength of thesound coming from the subwooferspeaker. In addition, you can set thespeed-sensitive volumecompensation (SVC).

These adjustments can be made bythe SOUND button or the interfacedial.

Select the mode you want to adjustby turning the interface dial.

You can also adjust the sound bypushing the SOUND buttonrepeatedly. Each mode is shown inthe center display as it changes.Turn the power/volume knob toadjust the setting to your liking.When the level reaches the center,you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.

The system will return to the audioplaying mode in the center displayabout 10 seconds after you stopadjusting a mode.

Adjusting the Sound


192

SOUND ICON

10/07/12 16:35:38 31TE0630_197

－

－

－To adjust bassand treble, select BASS or TREBLE,and press ENTER on the interfaceselector. The current setting isshown on the display. Turn theinterface knob to the desired level,and enter your selection by pressingENTER on the interface selector.

The SVC mode controls the volumebased on vehicle speed. The fasteryou go, the louder the audio volumebecomes. As you slow down, theaudio volume decreases.

The SVC has four modes: SVC OFF,SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVCHIGH. The default setting is MID.To change the SVC mode, selectSVC, then press ENTER on theinterface selector. The currentsetting is shown on the screen. Turnthe interface knob to the desiredlevel, and enter your selection bypressing ENTER on the interfaceselector. If you feel the sound is tooloud, choose low. If you feel thesound is too quiet, choose high.

Thesemodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.Fader adjusts the front-to-backstrength, while balance adjusts theside-to-side strength. To adjust faderand balance, select FADER orBALANCE, then press ENTER onthe interface selector. The currentsetting is shown on the screen. Turnthe interface knob to the desiredlevel, and enter your selection bypressing ENTER on the interfaceselector. To equalize the fader orbalance, turn the interface knob untilthe marks on the sound grid come tothe center of the adjustment bar.

To adjust thestrength of the sound from thesubwoofer speaker, select it andpress ENTER on the interfaceselector. Turn the interface knob tothe desired level, and enter yourselection by pressing ENTER on theinterface selector.

If the fader adjustment is set to F9(maximum front level), thesubwoofer is turned off.

BASS/TREBLE

FADER/BALANCE

SUBWOOFER Speed-sensitive VolumeCompensation (SVC)


Features

193

10/07/12 16:35:47 31TE0630_198

Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)

194

AUDIO BUTTON INTERFACE DIAL


XM RADIO BUTTON

TITLE BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

CATEGORY BAR

TUNE BAR SCAN/A.SEL(SCAN/AUTO SELECT) BAR

SKIP BAR

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

10/07/12 16:35:53 31TE0630_199

Push the AUDIO button to displayXM information on the screen. Youcan operate the XM Radio systemwith the interface dial.

To listen to XM Radio, turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position, and press the

button. The last channel youlistened to will show in the audioscreen and the center display. Adjustthe volume by turning the power/volume knob.

Your vehicle is capable of receivingXM Radio anywhere in the UnitedStates and Canada, except Hawaii,Alaska, and Puerto Rico. XM is aregistered trademark of Sirius XMRadio , Inc. and XM CANADA is aregistered business name ofCanadian Satellite Radio Inc.

XM Radio receives signals from twosatellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offersmany channels in several categories.Along with a large selection ofdifferent types of music, XM Radioalso allows you to view channel andcategory selections in the audiodisplay.

CONTINUED

Operating the XM Radio


Features

195

10/07/12 16:36:02 31TE0630_200

－

－

－To switch between thecategory mode and channel mode,press and hold the TITLE buttonuntil the mode changes. TheCATEGORY or CHANNEL mode isdisplayed on the screen. To switchthe mode with the interface dial,push down the interface selector toselect AUDIO MENU, then turn theknob to select MODE, and pressENTER on the selector repeatedly.

In the category mode, such as Jazz,Rock, Classical, etc., you cannavigate through all of the channelswithin that category. In the channelmode, you can select all of theavailable channels.

Each time you press and release theTITLE button, the center displaychanges in the following sequence:NAME (artist name), TITLE (musictitle), and CHANNEL NAME(channel name).

On the screen, you will see theselected CHANNEL (number),CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),and TITLE (music title).

Press either side of theTUNE bar to change channelselections. Press the side of thebar for higher numbered channelsand the side for lowernumbered channels. You can alsochange channels with the interfaceselector, push down the interfaceselector to select AUDIO MENU,then turn the interface knob tochoose TUNE and press ENTER onthe selector. Turn the interface knobto the appropriate direction. In thecategory mode, you can only selectchannels within that category.

Push down theinterface selector to select AUDIOMENU, then turn the interface knobto select CHANNEL LIST and pressENTER on the selector. Turn theinterface knob to select a channel,then press ENTER to set yourselection.

MODE

TUNE

CHANNEL LIST


196

10/07/12 16:36:10 31TE0630_201

－

▼ ▲ －

－

You can store up to 12preset channels using the six presetbuttons. Each button stores onechannel from the XM1 band and onechannel from the XM2 band.

To store a channel:Press the button or scrollup by pushing the interfaceselector up. Either XM1 or XM2will be shown on the display.

Presseither side of the bar to selectanother category. You can alsochange a category by pushing theinterface selector left or right.

The scan function givesyou a sampling of all channels whilein the channel mode. In the categorymode, only the channels within thatcategory are scanned. To activateSCAN, press the SCAN side of theSCAN/A.SEL bar. To scan with theinterface dial, scroll down, and pushthe interface selector to the right.You will see SCAN on the screen andcenter display.

The system plays each channel innumerical order for a few seconds,then selects the next channel. Whenyou hear a channel you want tocontinue listening to, push theinterface selector to the right againor press the SCAN side of the bar tocancel.

Use the tune, skip (seek), or scanfunction to tune to a desiredchannel.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store thefirst six channels.

Pick the preset button you wantfor that channel. Press and holdthe preset button until you hear abeep. You can also pick thenumber with the interface dial.Select your desired number andpress and hold ENTER on theinterface selector.

In category mode, only channelswithin that category can beselected. In channel mode, allchannels can be selected.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Preset

CATEGORY ( or )

SCAN


Features

197

XM BAND

10/07/12 16:36:22 31TE0630_202

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Press the button or scrollup again. The other XM band willbe shown. Store the next sixchannels using steps 2 and 3.

Once a channel is stored, pressand release the proper presetbutton to tune to it.

XM is loading theaudio or program information.

The channelcurrently selected is no longerbroadcasting.

The encryptioncode is being updated. Wait until theencryption code is fully updated.Channels 0 and 1 should still worknormally.

The signal iscurrently too weak. Move the vehicleto an area away from tall buildings,and with an unobstructed view of thesouthern horizon.

The selected channelnumber does not exist, or is not partof your subscription, or this channelhas no artist or title information atthis time.

The selectedchannel has no artist or titleinformation at this time.

There is a problemwith the XM antenna. Please consultyour dealer.

5. XM Radio Display Messages

‘‘LOADING’’

‘‘OFF AIR’’

‘‘UPDATING’’

‘‘NO SIGNAL’’

‘‘ - - - - ’’

‘‘NO INFO’’

‘‘ANTENNA’’


198

10/07/12 16:36:34 31TE0630_203

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas.Satellite signals are more likely to beblocked by tall buildings andmountains the farther north youtravel from the equator.

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on the north side of aneast/west mountain road.

Driving in tunnels.

Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road.

CONTINUED


Features

199

Signal may be blocked bymountains or large obstacles tothe south.

Signal weaker inthese areas.

SATELLITE

GROUND REPEATER

10/07/12 16:36:42 31TE0630_204

Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.

Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.

Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

There may be other geographicsituations that could affect XM Radioreception.

After you’ve registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in theXM Radio mode while you wait foractivation. This should take about 30minutes.

If your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM Radio. With the ignitionswitch in the ACCESSORY (I) or theON (II) position, press the

button. A variety of musictypes and styles will play.

If you decide to purchase XM radioservice, contact XM Radio at

, or at1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contactXM CANADA at , orat 1-877-209-0079. You will need togive them your radio I.D. numberand your credit card number. To getyour radio I.D. number, press the

side of the TUNE bar until ‘‘0’’appears in the display. Your I.D. willappear in the display.

While waiting for activation, makesure your vehicle remains in an openarea with good reception. Once youraudio system is activated, CAT(category) or CH (channel) willappear in the center display, andyou’ll be able to listen to XM Radiobroadcasts. XM Radio will continueto send an activation signal to yourvehicle for at least 12 hours from theactivation request. If the service hasnot been activated after 36 hours,contact XM Radio. In Canada,contact XM CANADA .


www.xmradio.com

www.xmradio.ca


Receiving XM Radio Service

200

10/07/12 16:36:54 31TE0630_205

CONTINUED

Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)

Features

201

SKIP BAR

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

CD BUTTON

INTERFACE DIALAUDIO BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

NAVIGATION SCREEN

CENTER DISPLAY

TITLE BUTTON

DISC SLOT

DISC LOAD BUTTON DISC EJECT BUTTON



10/07/12 16:37:02 31TE0630_206

Your vehicle’s audio system has anin-dash disc changer with the samecontrols used for the radio. Tooperate the disc changer, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or the ON (II) position.

The disc changer can play these discformats:

CD (CD-DA)MP3/WMA

The disc packages or jackets shouldhave one of these marks.

When playing a disc in MP3, you willsee ‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMAformat, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in thedisplay.

The changer can also play MP3 orWMA format (see page ).

If a file on a WMA disc is protectedby digital rights management(DRM), the audio unit displaysUNSUPPORTED, and then skips tothe next file.

Video CDs and DVDs will not workin this unit.

Some CD-DA and CD-ROM mixeddiscs are not playable.

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

208


202

NOTE:

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

10/07/12 16:37:17 31TE0630_207

To load multiple discs in oneoperation:

With the ignition in theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position, press and hold the LOADbutton until you hear a beep andsee ‘‘LOAD’’ in the center display,then release the button.

‘‘NO DISC’’ is shown on the screenfor an empty position in thechanger. When the green loadindicator comes on and you see‘‘LOAD’’ in the center display,insert the disc into the slot. Insertit only about halfway; the drive willpull it in the rest of the way.

Press and release the LOADbutton.

To load a single disc:

Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. If you are not loadingall six positions, the system willthen begin playing the last discloaded.

If you stop loading discs before allsix positions are filled, the systemwill wait for 10 seconds, stop the loadoperation, and begin playing the lastdisc loaded.

Insert a disc into the slot. Insert itonly about halfway; the drive willpull it in the rest of the way. Youwill see ‘‘BUSY’’ in the centerdisplay. When you insert the firstdisc, the changer will start to playthe disc.

Do not try to insert a disc until‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You coulddamage the audio unit.

If you press the LOAD button whilea disc is playing, the system will stopplaying that disc and start theloading sequence. It will then playthe disc just loaded.

You can select the position to load adisc. Turn the interface knob orpress a preset button to select theposition, then press ENTER on theselector. This starts the loadingsequence. If you do not select theposition, the system loads the disc tothe first empty position in numericalorder.

Do not try to insert a disc until‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You could damagethe audio unit.

When ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in thecenter display again, insert thenext disc into the slot.

1.

1.

2.

3.

4.

2.

Loading Discs in the Changer


Features

203

10/07/12 16:37:31 31TE0630_208

When you play CD-TEXT, you willsee the track name, artist name, andalbum name on the screen. Whenyou play MP3/WMA discs, you willsee the track name and folder nameon the screen. If the disc was notrecorded with this information, it willnot be displayed.

The player can play CD-TEXT, MP3,and WMA formats.

Select the changer by pressing theCD button. The system will beginplaying the last selected disc in thedisc changer. You will see thecurrent disc position highlighted.

To select a different disc, press thecorresponding number on the presetbuttons, or turn the interface knob tohighlight the desired disc number,then press ENTER on the interfaceselector.

Each time you press and release theside of the skip bar or push the

interface selector to the right, theplayer skips forward to thebeginning of the next track. Pressand release the side of the skipbar or push the interface selector tothe left to skip backward to thebeginning of the current track. Pressthe side or push the interfaceselector to the left again to skip tothe previous track. To move rapidlywithin a track, press and hold eitherside of the skip bar.

To Play a Disc To Change Tracks


204

CURRENT DISC

10/07/12 16:37:40 31TE0630_209

You can also choose a track directlyfrom a track list. Press ENTER onthe interface selector, and the tracklist screen will be shown. If there areno track names, track numbers aredisplayed. You will see the currenttrack is highlighted. Turn theinterface knob to select the desiredtrack, then press ENTER on theinterface selector.

To exit the track list display, pressthe AUDIO button, or push theinterface selector to the left.

When you press the SCAN side ofthe SCAN/A. SEL bar or scroll downand push the interface selector tothe left, the next track of the currenttrack plays for about 10 seconds.You will see SCAN next to TRACKon the screen and center display. Tolisten to the rest of the track, pressand hold the SCAN side of the baruntil you hear a beep or push theinterface selector to the left againwithin 10 seconds.

If you don’t, the system advances tothe next track, plays about 10seconds of it, and continues throughthe rest of the tracks the same way.

When you press the SCAN side ofthe SCAN/A. SEL bar repeatedlyuntil you see D-SCAN in the centerdisplay, or push the interfaceselector to the right, the first track ofthe current disc plays for about 10seconds. You will see SCAN next toDISC on the screen. The discnumber is blinking and SCAN is alsoshown in the center display. To listento the rest of the disc, press and holdthe SCAN side of the bar until youhear a beep, or push the interfaceselector to the right again within 10seconds.

If you don’t, the system advances tothe next disc, plays about 10 secondsof its first track, and continuesthrough the rest of the discs thesame way. When the system reachesthe last disc, DISC SCAN is canceled,and that disc continues to play.

To Choose a Track

Track Scan

Disc Scan


Features

205

TRACK LIST

10/07/12 16:37:51 31TE0630_210

To replay the current trackcontinuously, select TRACKREPEAT, and press ENTER on theinterface selector. As a reminder,you will see REPEAT next toTRACK on the screen. To turn thisfeature off, highlight TRACKREPEAT (if not already highlighted),and press ENTER on the interfaceselector again.

You can select any type of repeat andrandom modes by using theinterface dial.Push the AUDIO button to displaythe audio information on the screen,then scroll down by pushing downthe selector to select the audio menu.

To cancel the selected repeat orrandom mode, have the selectedmode highlighted, then pressENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface knob to select adesired repeat or random mode, thenpress ENTER to set your selection.

To Select Repeat or RandomMode:

Track Repeat


206

Push down the selector. AUDIO MENU SCREEN

10/07/12 16:38:00 31TE0630_211

To replay the current disccontinuously, select DISC REPEAT,and press ENTER on the interfaceselector. As a reminder, you will seeREPEAT next to DISC on the screen.To turn this feature off, highlightDISC REPEAT (if not alreadyhighlighted), and press ENTER onthe interface selector again.

To play the tracks on the currentdisc in random order, select TRACKRANDOM, and press ENTER on theinterface selector. As a reminder,you will see RANDOM next toTRACK on the screen. To turn thisfeature off, highlight TRACKRANDOM (if not alreadyhighlighted), and press ENTER onthe interface selector again.

To take the system out of disc mode,press the FM/AM button, the

button, or the AUX button (ifan appropriate unit is connected). Toreturn to disc mode, press the CDbutton.

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with thepower/volume knob or the ignitionswitch, play will continue at the samepoint when you turn it back on.


Disc Repeat Random Play To Stop Playing a Disc


Features

207

10/07/12 16:38:10 31TE0630_212

The changer plays MP3/WMA filesin recorded order. Each disc canhold up to 400 playable files within 8folder layers. When playing MP3discs, a disc can support a maximumnumber of 100 folders, and eachfolder can hold 255 playable files.

Using the interface selector, you cansee the list of all the files and folderswithin a disc. While playing a MP3/WMA disc, press the AUDIO button.The currently playing folder and fileinformation comes on the screen.

To play an MP3/WMA disc, use thedisc controls previously described,along with the following information.

Depending on the software the fileswere made with, it may not bepossible to play some files, or displaysome text data.

While playing an MP3/WMA disc,you can select a folder within thedisc by pressing either side of thecategory bar. Each time you presseither side of the bar, the folder titleand its first file’s information appearin the center display in recordedorder.

Changing and Selecting the Folders/Files

Playing an MP3/WMA Disc Changing the Folders


208

MP3/WMA INDICATOR

10/07/12 16:38:21 31TE0630_213

This feature, when activated,samples the first file in each folderfor 10 seconds. To scan a folder,press the SCAN side of the SCAN/A. SEL bar repeatedly. You will seeSCAN next to FOLDER and thefolder number blinking.

To listen to the rest of the folder,press and hold the SCAN side of thebar until you hear a beep. If you donothing, the system advances to thenext folder, plays 10 seconds of it,and continues with the remainingfolders in the same way. When thesystem has finished sampling thefirst file in all folders, folder scan iscanceled, and the last file playedcontinues to play.

Push ENTER on the selector toshow the folder list. Turn theselector knob, highlight the folderyou want to see the informationwithin, and press ENTER.

If the root folder has some additionalfolders in the lower layer, they willbe listed on the screen.

You can see the list of all the files inthe selected folder. Turn the selectorknob, then press ENTER to set yourselection.


Folder ScanF

eatures

209

CURRENT TRACK

CURRENT FOLDER

10/07/12 16:38:29 31TE0630_214

To remove the disc that is currentlyplaying, press the eject button. Youwill see ‘‘EJECT’’ in the centerdisplay. When you remove the discfrom the slot, the systemautomatically enters the previousmode AM, FM1, FM2, or XM Radio.The system also begins the loadsequence so you can load anotherdisc. If you do not load another disc,the load sequence is canceled, andthe system continues playing in theprevious mode.

If you do not remove the disc fromthe slot, the system will reload thedisc after 10 seconds. To beginplaying the disc, press the CD button.

This feature, when activated, replaysall files in the selected folder. Toactivate folder repeat mode, selectFOLDER REPEAT by using theinterface knob, and press ENTER onthe interface selector. You will seeREPEAT next to FOLDER on thescreen. To turn this feature off,highlight FOLDER REPEAT (if notalready highlighted), and pressENTER on the interface selectoragain.

To select any type of the repeatmodes, use the interface dial. Formore information, see page .

This feature, when activated, playsall files in the current folder inrandom order. To activate folderrandom play, select FOLDERRANDOM by using the interfaceknob, and press ENTER on theinterface selector. You will seeRANDOM next to FOLDER on thescreen. To turn this feature off,highlight FOLDER RANDOM (if notalready highlighted), and pressENTER on the interface selectoragain.

To select any type of the randommodes, use the interface dial. Formore information, see page .206

206


Removing Discs from theChanger

Folder Repeat Folder Random

210

10/07/12 16:38:39 31TE0630_215

To remove a different disc from thechanger, first select it by pressingthe corresponding number on thepreset button or turning theinterface knob, and pressing ENTERon the interface selector. When thatdisc begins playing, press the ejectbutton.

When you press the eject buttonwhile listening to the radio, or withthe audio system turned off, the discthat was last selected is ejected.After that disc is ejected, pressingthe eject button again will eject thenext disc in numerical order. Bydoing this six times, you can removeall the discs from the changer.

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is off:To eject one disc, press and releasethe eject button.To eject all discs, press and hold theeject button until the first disc beginsto eject.

For information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page

.232


Protecting DiscsF

eatures

211

10/07/12 16:38:46 31TE0630_216

The chart on the right explains theerror messages you may see in thecenter display while playing a disc.

If you see an error message in thecenter display while playing a disc,press the eject button. After ejectingthe disc, check it for damage ordeformation. If there is no damage,insert the disc again.For additional information ondamaged discs, see page .

The audio system will try to play thedisc. If there is still a problem, theerror message will reappear. Pressthe eject button, and pull out the disc.Insert a different disc. If the newdisc plays, there is a problem withthe first disc. If the error messagecycle repeats and you cannot clear it,take your vehicle to a dealer.

CauseError Message Solution

233

High Temperature

Track/File format notsupported

Mechanical Error

Servo Error

Disc Error

Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.Current track will be skipped. The nextsupported track or file plays automatically.Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s).Check the disc for serious damage, signs ofdeformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt(see page 233). Insert the disc again. If the codedoes not disappear, or the disc(s) cannot beremoved, consult your dealer. Do not try toforce the disc out of the player.

Check the disc for serious damage, signs ofdeformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt(see page 233).

Disc Changer Error Messages (Models with navigation system)

212

HEAT ERROR

UNSUPPORTED


OWNERSMANUAL PUSH

EJECTMECH ERROR


OWNERSMANUAL

CHECK DISC

10/07/12 16:38:54 31TE0630_217

Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)

Features

213

AUDIO BUTTON

MAP BUTTON

CANCEL BUTTON

CENTER DISPLAY

AUX BUTTON

SKIP BAR


iPod INDICATOR

NAVIGATION SCREEN

INTERFACE DIAL

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

10/07/12 16:39:00 31TE0630_218

This audio system can operate theaudio files on the iPod with thesame controls used for the in-dashdisc changer. To play an iPod,connect it to the USB adapter cablein the console compartment by usingyour dock connector, then press theAUX button. The ignition switchmust be in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position. The iPod will alsobe recharged with the ignition switchin these positions.

The audio system reads and playsplayable sound files on the iPod. Thesystem cannot operate an iPod as amass storage device. The system willonly play songs stored on the iPodwith iTunes.

iPod and iTunes are registeredtrademarks owned by Apple Inc.

You can select the AUX mode byusing the navigation system voicecontrol buttons, but cannot operatethe play mode functions.

iPods compatible with your audiosystem using the USB adapter cableare:

SoftwareVer. 1.1.2 or more

Ver. 2.0.1 or more

Ver. 1.3.0 or more


Ver. 1.1.3 or more

Ver. 1.0.3 or more

Ver. 1.0.1 or more


ModeliPod classic(80/160 G)iPod classic(120 G)iPod with video(iPod 5thgeneration)iPod nanoiPod nano2nd generationiPod nano3rd generationiPod nano4th generationiPod nano5th generationiPod touchiPod touch2nd generation

To Play an iPod

Voice Control System


214

10/07/12 16:39:10 31TE0630_219

Install the dock connector to theUSB adapter cable securely.

Connect your dock connector tothe iPod correctly and securely.


Do not use an extension cablebetween the USB adapter cableequipped with your vehicle andyour dock connector.

Do not connect your iPod using ahub.

Do not keep the iPod in thevehicle. Direct sunlight and highheat will damage it.


We recommend backing up yourdata before playing it.

Use only compatible iPods with thelatest software. iPods that are notcompatible will not work in this audiounit.

1. 2.

3.

CONTINUED

Connecting an iPod


Features

215

NOTE:

DOCK CONNECTOR

USB CONNECTOR

USB ADAPTER CABLE

USB CONNECTOR

10/07/12 16:39:24 31TE0630_220

－

If the iPod indicator does not appearin the audio display, check theconnections, and try to reconnect theiPod a few times.

If the audio system still does notrecognize the iPod, the iPod mayneed to be reset. Follow theinstructions that came with youriPod, or you can find resetinstructions online at

The current file number and total ofthe selected playable files aredisplayed in the center display.Pressing the AUDIO button displaysthe artist, album and track (file)names on the navigation screen.

Use the SKIP bar while an iPod isplaying to select passages andchange files.



www.apple.com/itunes/

To Change or Select Files

SKIP


216

10/07/12 16:39:31 31TE0630_221

You can also change files with theinterface dial. Press the AUDIObutton to show the audio controldisplay on the navigation screen.Push the selector to the right side toskip forward and to the left side toskip backward.

You can also select a file from any ofthe iPod menus: playlists, artists,albums and songs, by using theinterface dial. Press the AUDIObutton to display the audio controldisplay on the navigation screen.Push up the interface selector todisplay the iPod menu. Turn theknob on the interface dial to select adesired list.

Push ENTER on the selector todisplay the items on that list, thenturn the knob on the interface dial toselect a desired list. Pushing theselector up or down moves aselection to the top or bottom of thescreen items. Press ENTER to setyour selection.

CONTINUED

To Select a File from iPod Menu


Features

217

10/07/12 16:39:40 31TE0630_222

If you select ‘‘ALL’’ on either theartists or albums list, all availablefiles on the selected list are played.

Press the AUDIO button to go backto the normal audio playing display.Pressing the CANCEL button goesback to the previous screen, andpressing the MAP button cancels theaudio control display on the screen.

You can select any type of repeat andrandom mode on the audio menu.Press the AUDIO button to displaythe audio control screen, then pushdown the selector to display theaudio menu. Turn the knob on theinterface dial to select an audiomode: repeat, album random, andtrack random. Press ENTER to setyour selection.

To cancel the selected mode, pressENTER again while the highlightedmode is selected on the audio controldisplay.

To Select Repeat or Random Mode:


218

Push down the selector.

10/07/12 16:39:49 31TE0630_223

－

－

－This featurecontinuously plays a file.To turn it off, press ENTER again.

Pressing either side of the SKIP barchanges the file while keeping therepeat feature.

This featureplays all available files from theselected items in the iPod menu list(playlists, artists, albums or songs)in random order. You will seeTRACK RANDOM on the screen.

To turn it off, have this modehighlighted and press ENTER again.

This featureplays all available albums from theselected items in the iPod menu list(playlists, artists, albums or songs)in random order. The files in eachalbum are played in the recordedorder. You will see ALBUMRANDOM on the screen.

CONTINUED

REPEAT

TRACK RANDOM

ALBUM RANDOM


Features

219

10/07/12 16:39:58 31TE0630_224

＊

＊

To turn it off, have this modehighlighted and press ENTER again.

You can also select another list fromthe iPod menu while keeping therandom function.

Available operating functions vary onmodels or versions. Some functionsmay not be available on the vehicle’saudio system.

To play the radio, press the FM/AM,or button. Press the CD buttonto switch to the disc mode. Press theAUX button to switch back to theiPod.

You can disconnect the iPod at anytime when you see the ‘‘OK todisconnect’’ message in the iPoddisplay. Always make sure you see‘‘OK to disconnect’’ message in theiPod display before you disconnect it.Make sure to follow the iPod’sinstructions on how to disconnectthe dock connector from the USBadapter cable.

The displayed message mayvary on models or versions. Onsome models, there is nomessage to disconnect.

When you disconnect the iPod whileit is playing, the center display andthe audio screen (if selected) showNO DATA.

If you reconnect the same iPod, thesystem may begin playing where itleft off, depending on what mode theiPod is in when it is reconnected.

If you see an error message in thecenter display, see page .

:

221

To Stop Playing Your iPod

iPod Error Messages


Disconnecting an iPod

220

NOTE:

10/07/12 16:40:11 31TE0630_225

If you see an error message in thecenter display while playing an iPod,find the solution in the chart to theright. If you cannot clear the errormessage, take your vehicle to yourdealer.



Appears when the iPod is empty. Store somefiles in the iPod.Appears when an unsupported iPod isconnected. See page 214 for specificationinformation on iPods. If it appears when asupported iPod is connected, update the iPodsoftware to the newer version.Appears when the system does notacknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.

USB ROM Error


No files in iPod

Use of unsupportediPod

Recognition failure ofiPod

iPod Error Messages (Models with navigation system)

Features

221



iPod NO SONG

UNSUPPORTEDVER.

CONNECT RETRY

10/07/12 16:40:18 31TE0630_226

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)

222

SKIP BAR

CENTER DISPLAY

CANCEL BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

MAP BUTTON

CATEGORY BAR

USB INDICATOR

AUX BUTTON


NAVIGATION SCREEN

INTERFACE DIAL

POWER/VOLUME KNOB


10/07/12 16:40:23 31TE0630_227

＊

＊

This audio system can operate theaudio files on a USB flash memorydevice with the same controls usedfor the in-dash disc changer. To playa USB flash memory device, connectit to the USB adapter cable in theconsole compartment, then press theAUX button. The ignition switchmust be in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position.

Only AAC format files recordedwith iTunes are playable on thisaudio unit.

The recommended USB flashmemory devices are 256 MB orhigher, and formatted with the FATfile system. Some digital audioplayers may be compatible as well.

The audio system reads and playsthe audio files on the USB flashmemory device in MP3, WMA orAAC formats. Depending on theformat, the display shows MP3,WMA or AAC when a USB flashmemory device is playing. The USBflash memory device limit is up to700 folders or up to 65535 files. Depending on the type and

number of files, it may take sometime before they begin to play.

We recommend backing up yourdata before playing a USB flashmemory device.

Do not use a device such as a cardreader or hard drive as the deviceor your files may be damaged.

Do not connect your USB flashmemory device using a hub.

Do not use an extension cable tothe USB adapter cable equippedwith your vehicle.

Do not keep a USB flash memorydevice in the vehicle. Directsunlight and high heat will damageit.

Some USB flash memory devices(such as devices with security lock-out features, etc.) will not work inthis audio unit.

:

CONTINUED

To Play a USB Flash MemoryDevice


Features

223

NOTE:

10/07/12 16:40:37 31TE0630_228

You can select the AUX mode byusing the navigation system voicecontrol buttons, but cannot operatethe play mode functions.

Some versions of MP3, WMA, orAAC format may not be supported. Ifan unsupported file is found, theaudio unit displays UNSUPPORTED,then skips to the next file.

Depending on the software thefiles were made with, it may not bepossible to play some files, ordisplay some text data.

Depending on the type ofencoding and writing softwareused, there may be cases wherecharacter information does notdisplay properly.

The order of files in USB playbackmay be different from the order offiles displayed in PC or otherdevices etc. Files are played in theorder stored in USB flash memorydevice.


Voice Control System


224

Combining a low sampling f requencywith a low bitrate may result inextremely degraded sound quality.

10/07/12 16:40:45 31TE0630_229

When the USB device is connectedand the USB mode is selected on theaudio system, the USB indicator isshown in the center display. It alsoshows the folder and file numbers.Pressing the AUDIO button displaysthe folder and file names, and theelapsed time in the navigation screen.

Connect the USB flash memorydevice to the USB adapter cablecorrectly and securely.


2.1.

CONTINUED

Connecting a USB Flash MemoryDevice


Features

225

USB ADAPTER CABLE

USB CONNECTOR

USB CONNECTOR

10/07/12 16:40:54 31TE0630_230

－

－

▲▼

Use the SKIP bar while a USB flashmemory device is playing to selectpassages and change files.



You can also change files with theinterface dial. Press the AUDIObutton to show the audio controldisplay on the navigation screen.Push the selector knob to the rightside to skip to the beginning of thenext file, and to the left side to skipto the beginning of the current file.Pushing it to the left again skips tothe beginning of the previous file.

To select adifferent folder, press and releaseeither side of the CATEGORY bar.Press the side to skip to the nextfolder, and press the side to skipto the beginning of the previousfolder.

To Change or Select Files

SKIP

Folder Selection


226

SKIP DIRECTION(Backward)

SKIP DIRECTION(Forward)

10/07/12 16:41:03 31TE0630_231

Push up the selector on the interfacedial to switch the display to thefolder list, then turn the knob on theinterface dial to select a folder.

Press ENTER to change the displayto the file list, then turn the knob onthe interface dial to select a file.Press ENTER to set your selection.

You can also select a folder or filefrom the list by using the interfacedial. Press the AUDIO button toshow the audio control display on thenavigation screen.

CONTINUED

To Select a File from Folder and FileLists


Features

227

10/07/12 16:41:12 31TE0630_232

You can select any type of repeat,random and scan modes on the audiomenu screen. Press the AUDIObutton to show the audio controldisplay on the navigation screen.Push down the selector on theinterface dial to display the audiomenu items.

To go back to the normal playingdisplay, press the AUDIO button.Pressing the CANCEL button goesback to the previous screen andpressing the MAP button cancels theaudio mode display.

Turn the knob on the interface dialto select a play mode: folder random,track random, folder repeat, trackrepeat. Press ENTER to set yourselection.

To Select Repeat, Random or ScanMode:


228

10/07/12 16:41:19 31TE0630_233

－

－

－

－

－

－

CONTINUED

This featurereplays all the files in the selectedfolder in the order they are stored.Pressing either side of theCATEGORY bar also turns off thisfeature.

This featurecontinuously plays a file. Pressingeither side of the SKIP bar also turnsoff this feature.

Thisfeature plays the files in the selectedfolder in random order.

This functionsamples all files in the selectedfolder in the order they are stored.To activate the scan feature, pushthe selector to the right. You will seeTRACK SCAN on the screen. Youwill also see SCAN on the centerdisplay and the file number blinking.You will get a 10 second sampling ofeach file in the folder. Push theselector repeatedly to get out of thescan mode. The system plays the lastfile sampled.

You can also select the scan featurewith the SCAN side of the SCAN/A.SEL bar on the control panel.Press and release the SCAN side ofthe bar. Press and hold the SCAN

side of the bar to get out of the scanmode and play the last file sampled.

This functionsamples the first file in each folder inthe order they are stored. Toactivate the folder scan feature, pushthe selector to the right repeatedly.You will see FOLDER SCAN on thescreen. You will also see SCAN onthe center display and the foldernumber blinking. You will get a 10second sampling of the first file ineach folder. Push the selectorrepeatedly to get out of the scanmode. The system plays the last filesampled.

This featureplays all the files in random order.

To cancel the selected mode, pushdown the selector to display theaudio menu on the audio controldisplay. Turn the knob on theinterface dial to select thehighlighted play mode, then pressENTER to turn off that selectedmode.


FOLDER REPEAT

TRACK REPEAT

FOLDER RANDOM

TRACK SCAN

FOLDER SCAN

TRACK RANDOM

Features

229

10/07/12 16:41:30 31TE0630_234

If you see an error message in thecenter display, see page .

You can disconnect the USB flashmemory device at any time even ifthe USB mode is selected on theaudio system. Make sure to followthe USB flash memory device’sinstructions when you remove it.

When you disconnect the USB flashmemory device while it is playing,the center display and the audioscreen (if selected) show NO DATA.

To play the radio, press the FM/AM,or button. Press the CD buttonto switch to the disc mode. Press theAUX button to switch back to theUSB.

If you reconnect the same USB flashmemory device, the system willbegin playing where it left off.

You can also select the folder scanfeature with the SCAN side of theSCAN/A.SEL bar on the controlpanel. Press and release the SCANside of the bar repeatedly.Press and hold the SCAN side of thebar to get out of the folder scanmode and play the last file sampled.

Pressing either side of theCATEGORY or SKIP bar also turnsoff the feature.

231

USB Flash Memory Device ErrorMessages

To Stop Playing a USB FlashMemory Device

Disconnecting a USB Flash MemoryDevice


230

10/07/12 16:41:40 31TE0630_235

If you see an error message in thecenter display while playing a USBflash memory device, find thesolution in the chart to the right. Ifyou cannot clear the error message,take your vehicle to your dealer.



Appears when the files in the USB flashmemory device are DRM or an unsupportedformat. This error message appears for about 3seconds, then plays the next song.Appears when the USB flash memory device isempty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC filesin the USB flash memory device. Save someMP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flashmemory device.Appears when an unsupported device isconnected. See page 223 for the specificationinformation for the USB flash memory device.If it appears when the supported device isconnected, reconnect the device.

USB ROM Error


Use of unsupportedfiles

No files in USB flashmemory device

Use of unsupportedUSB flash memorydevice

USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Models with navigation system)

Features

231



UNPLAYABLE FILE

USB NO SONG

UNSUPPORTED

10/07/12 16:41:46 31TE0630_236

When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,use only high quality discs labeledfor audio use.

When recording a CD-R orCD-RW, the recording must beclosed for it to be used by the discchanger.

When a disc is not being played,store it in its case to protect it fromdust and other contamination. Toprevent warpage, keep discs out ofdirect sunlight and extreme heat.

A new disc may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on therecording surface of the disc,causing skipping or other problems.Remove these pieces by rubbing theinner and outer edges with the sideof a pencil or pen.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe disc changer.

Handle a disc by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the disc.These, along with contaminationfrom finger prints, liquids, and felt-tip pens, can cause the disc to notplay properly, or possibly jam in thedrive.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the disc from the centerto the outside edge.

Play only standard, round, 5-inch(12 cm) discs. Smaller or odd-shaped discs may jam in the driveor cause other problems.

Handle your discs properly toprevent damage and skipping.

General Information Protecting Discs

Protecting Your Discs

232

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

10/07/12 16:41:59 31TE0630_237

The in-dash disc player/changer hasa sophisticated and delicatemechanism. If you insert a damageddisc as indicated in this section, itmay become stuck inside anddamage the audio unit.

Examples of these discs are shownto the right:

Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and excessively thick discs

Damaged discs Poor quality discs

1.

2. 3.

CONTINUED

Additional Information onRecommended Discs


Features

233

Sealed

Warped

Bubbled/Wrinkled

With Label/Sticker

Using PrinterLabel Kit

With PlasticRing

Chipped/Cracked

Burrs

10/07/12 16:42:14 31TE0630_238

Small, irregular shaped discs Discs with scratches, dirty discs

CD-R or CD-RW may not play dueto the recording conditions.

Scratches and fingerprints on thediscs may cause the sound to skip.

Recommended discs are printedwith the following logo.

Audio unit may not play thefollowing formats.

This audio unit cannot play a Dual-disc .

4. 5.


234

Fingerprints, scratches, etc.

3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape

Arrow ShapeCan Shape

10/07/12 16:42:28 31TE0630_239

The radio can receive the completeAM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHzFM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz

How well the radio receives stationsis dependent on many factors, suchas the distance from the station’stransmitter, nearby large objects,and atmospheric conditions.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least 10 kHzapart (530, 540, 550). Stations on theFM band are assigned frequencies atleast 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

CONTINUED

Radio ReceptionFM/AM Radio Frequencies

FM/AM Radio Reception

Features

235

10/07/12 16:42:40 31TE0630_240

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.


FM/AM Radio Reception

236

10/07/12 16:42:48 31TE0630_241

▲ ▼＋

－

＋－

The VOL button adjusts the volumeup ( ) or down ( ). Press the topor bottom of the button, hold it untilthe desired volume is reached, thenrelease it.

Three controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

The MODE button changes themode. Pressing the buttonrepeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,disc (if a disc(s) is loaded) or AUX(if an appropriate audio unit isconnected). On models with XMRadio, you can also select XM1 andXM2.

If you are listening to the radio, usethe CH button to change stations.Each time you press the top ( ) ofthe button, the system goes to thenext preset station on the band youare listening to. Press the bottom( ) to go back to the previouspreset station. If you press and holdthe CH button ( ) or ( ), thesystem goes into the skip (seek)mode. It stops when it finds a stationwith a strong signal.

If an iPod or a USB flash memorydevice is plugged into the system,you can also select AUX.

CONTINUED

Remote Audio Controls

Features

237

MODE BUTTON

VOL BUTTON CH BUTTON

10/07/12 16:42:56 31TE0630_242

＋

－

＋－

＋

－

＋

－

If you are playing a conventional CD(without the text data and notcompressed in MP3 or WMA), youcan use the skip function to selectdiscs. Press and hold the top ( ) ofthe CH button until you hear a beep,to skip forward to the next disc.Press and hold the bottom ( ) toskip backward to the previous disc.

If you are playing a disc, iPod or USBflash memory device, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack/file each time you press thetop ( ) of the CH button. Press thebottom ( ) to return to thebeginning of the current track/file.Press it twice to return to theprevious track/file.

If you are playing a USB flashmemory device or iPod with the USBadapter cable, press and release thetop ( ) of the CH button to skipforward to the beginning of the nextfile. Press the bottom ( ) to skipbackward to the beginning to thecurrent file. Press it twice to returnto the previous file.

When playing a USB flash memorydevice, you can also use the seekfunction to skip the folder. Toactivate this, press and hold eitherside of the CH button until you heara beep.

You can also use the skip function toselect folders. Press and hold the top( ) of the CH button until you heara beep, to skip forward to the firstfile in the next folder. Press thebottom ( ) to skip backward to theprevious folder.

Remote Audio Controls

238

10/07/12 16:43:03 31TE0630_243

The auxiliary input jack is inside theconsole compartment. The systemwill accept auxiliary input fromstandard audio accessories using a1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo miniplug.

When you plug in a mini-jack cablebetween a compatible audio unit andthe jack, you will see AUX in thedisplay and the system automaticallyswitches to AUX mode.

When a compatible audio unit isconnected to the jack, press the AUXor CD/AUX button to select it.

Auxiliary Input Jack

Features

239

10/07/12 16:43:09 31TE0630_244

The system will retain your AM andFM presets even if power isdisconnected.

Your vehicle’s audio system maydisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, you mustenter a specific five-digit code withthe preset buttons. Because thereare hundreds of numbercombinations possible from the fivedigits, making the system workwithout knowing the exact code isnearly impossible.

You should have received a radiocode card that lists your audiosystem’s code and serial numbers. Itis best to store this card in a safeplace at home. In addition, youshould write the audio system’sserial number in this owner’s manual.

If you lose the card, you must obtainthe code number from your dealer.To do this, you will need the audiosystem’s serial number.

If your vehicle’s battery is discon-nected or goes dead, the audiosystem will disable itself. If thishappens, you will see‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the frequencydisplay (on the screen on modelswith navigation system) the nexttime you turn on the system. Use thepreset buttons to enter the five-digitcode. The code is on the radio codecard included in your owner’smanual kit. When it is enteredcorrectly, the radio will start playing.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over; complete thefive-digit sequence, then enter thecorrect code. You have ten tries toenter the correct code. If you areunsuccessful in ten attempts, youmust then leave the system on for 1hour before trying again.

Radio Theft Protection

240

10/07/12 16:43:17 31TE0630_245

To set the time, press the CLOCKbutton until you hear a beep. Thedisplayed time begins to blink.

Change the hours by pressing the H(hour) button until the numbersadvance to the desired time. Changethe minutes by pressing the M(minute) button until the numbersadvance to the desired time.

Press the CLOCK button again toenter the set time.

You can quickly set the time to thenearest hour. If the displayed time isbefore the half hour, press and holdthe CLOCK button, then press the R(reset) button to set the time back tothe previous hour. If the displayedtime is after the half hour, the sameprocedure sets the time forward tothe beginning of the next hour.

The navigation system receivessignals from the global positioningsystem (GPS), and the displayedtime is updated automatically by theGPS. Refer to the navigation systemmanual for how to adjust the time.

1:06 would RESET to 1:00.1:52 would RESET to 2:00.

For example: On models with navigation system


CONTINUED

Setting the Clock

Features

241


MINUTE BUTTON(PRESET 5)

CLOCK BUTTON

RESET BUTTON(PRESET 6)

HOUR BUTTON(PRESET 4)U.S. EX-L is shown.

10/07/12 16:43:29 31TE0630_246

△

Turn the selector knob to select‘‘CLOCK ADJUST.’’

Press the selector knob (ENTER)to enter your selection. Thedisplay changes to the clockadjusting display.

Turn the selector knob to selectthe item which you want to adjust.Turning the selector knob willchange the selected item betweenthe clock display setting, hours,minutes, and SET. The selecteditem is indicated with in thedisplay.

You can also adjust the clock andswitch the clock display between24-hours and 12-hours in the menumode.

To adjust the clock setting:

Press and release the MENUbutton. The display shows you themenu items.

You can adjust the clock settingwith the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position.

1.

2.

3.

4.


Setting the Clock

Adjusting the Clock with MENUButton

242

10/07/12 16:43:40 31TE0630_247

Press the selector knob (ENTER)to enter your selection. Thedisplay will return to the clockadjusting display.

Turn the selector knob to changethe setting between 12H and 24H.

To set the time, turn the selectorknob and select the hours or theminutes, then press the knob toenter your selection. The displaychanges to the setting display.

Turn the selector knob to countthe numbers up or down.

Press the selector knob (ENTER)to enter your selection. Thedisplay will return to the clockadjusting display.

While setting the clock, pressingthe RETURN button will go backto the previous display.Pressing the MENU button againwill cancel this setting mode.

To enter the clock setting, turnthe selector knob to select ‘‘SET,’’then press the knob. The displaywill return to the menu itemdisplay.

Press either the RETURN orMENU button to go back to thenormal display.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

Setting the Clock

Features

243

MINUTE SETTING

10/07/12 16:43:57 31TE0630_248

With the system set, you can stillopen the trunk with the remotetransmitter without triggering thealarm. The alarm will sound if thetrunk lock is forced, or the trunk isopened with the trunk release leveror the emergency trunk opener.

Once the security system is set,opening either door without usingthe key or the remote transmitter,the hood, or the trunk will cause thealarm to activate. It will also activateif the audio unit is removed from thedashboard or the wiring is cut.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, trunk, or either door is notfully closed. If the system will not set,turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and check theindicators on the instrument panel.Close either door or the trunkindicated on the display. Check thehood visually since it is not part ofthe display, and shut it if necessary.

The security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights and taillights flashes ifsomeone attempts to break into yourvehicle or remove the audio unit.This alarm continues for twominutes, then the system resets. Toreset an activated system before thetwo minutes have elapsed, unlockthe driver’s door with the key or theremote transmitter.

The security system automaticallysets 15 seconds after you lock thedoors, hood, and trunk. For thesystem to activate, you must lock thedoors from the outside with the key,driver’s lock tab, door lock masterswitch, or remote transmitter. Thesecurity system indicator on theinstrument panel starts blinkingimmediately to show you the systemis setting itself.

Security System

244

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

10/07/12 16:44:05 31TE0630_249

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

Use the remote transmitterto quickly check that the hood, thetrunk, and both doors are closed.Push the lock button twice within 5seconds. There should be an audibleconfirmation beep.

Security System

Features

245

NOTE:

10/07/12 16:44:09 31TE0630_250

Compass operation can be affectedby driving near power lines orstations, across bridges, throughtunnels, over railroad crossings, pastlarge vehicles, or driving near largeobjects that can cause a magneticdisturbance. It can also be affectedby accessories such as antennas androof racks that are mounted bymagnets.

The compass may need to bemanually calibrated after exposure toa strong magnetic field. If thecompass seems to be continuallyshowing the wrong direction and isnot self-calibrating, or the compassdisplay is blinking with the CALindicator on, do the followingprocedure.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the compass isself-calibrating, then the compassdisplay is shown in the display.

Press and hold the MENU buttonfor about 5 seconds until you heara beep. The display shows you thecompass setting menu items.


Do this procedure in an openarea, away from buildings, powerlines, and other vehicles.

1.

2.

EX-L and all V6 without navigationsystemCompass Operation

Compass Calibration

Compass

246

NOTE:

COMPASS

COMPASS SETTING MENU ITEMS


10/07/12 16:44:21 31TE0630_251

Turn the selector knob to select‘‘CALIBRATION.’’

Press the selector knob (ENTER)to enter your selection. Thedisplay shows you ‘‘PUSH CALSTART.’’

The audio system is not related tothe compass system. Even if thecompass system is calibrating, thedisplay returns to the normal displaywhich you last selected.

When the calibration is successfullycompleted, the CAL indicator goesoff and the compass display will stopblinking and show an actual heading.

Drive the vehicle slowly in twocomplete circles.

Press the selector knob (ENTER).The compass display is blinkingand the CAL indicator is shown.

While setting the compass,pressing the RETURN button willgo back to the previous display.Pressing the MENU button willcancel the compass setting mode.

5.

6.

4.3.

Compass

Features

247

10/07/12 16:44:32 31TE0630_252

In most areas, there is a variationbetween magnetic north and truenorth. Zone selection is required sothe compass can compensate for thisvariation. To check and select thezone, do this:

Once the correct zone is displayed,press the selector knob. Thedisplay then returns to normal.


Press and hold the MENU buttonfor about 5 seconds until you heara beep. The display shows you thecompass setting menu items.

Turn the selector knob to select‘‘ZONE.’’ Press the selector knob(ENTER) to enter your selection.The display shows you thecurrently selected zone number.

Find the zone for your area on themap (see page ). If the correctzone is not shown, turn theselector knob to cycle the zonelists up or down.

If necessary, press the RETURNbutton to return to the previousdisplay. Pressing the MENUbutton will cancel the compasssetting mode.

4. 5.

1.

2.

3.

249

Compass Zone Selection

Compass

248

ZONE NUMBER

10/07/12 16:44:44 31TE0630_253

The audio system is not related tothe compass system. Even if thecompass system is in the zonesetting mode, the display returns tothe normal display which you lastselected.

Compass

Features

249

Zone Map

10/07/12 16:44:48 31TE0630_254

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

Press and release the SET/DECEL button on the steeringwheel. The CRUISE CONTROLindicator on the instrument panelcomes on to show the system isnow activated.

Push the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel. The CRUISEMAIN indicator on the instrumentpanel comes on.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

The cruise control system can beleft on, even when it is not in use.

1.

2.

3.Using Cruise Control

Cruise Control

250

SET/DECELBUTTON

CRUISE BUTTON RES/ACCELBUTTON

CANCEL BUTTON

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

10/07/12 16:44:57 31TE0630_255

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

If you need to decrease yourspeed quickly, use the brakes as younormally would.

Press and hold the SET/DECELbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/DECELbutton repeatedly. Each time youdo this, your vehicle will slowdown about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Tap the brake or clutch pedallightly with your foot. TheCRUISE CONTROL indicator onthe instrument panel will go out.When the vehicle slows to thedesired speed, press the SET/DECEL button.

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. When you reach thedesired cruising speed, release thebutton.

Push on the accelerator pedal.Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed, then press the SET/DECEL button.

To increase the speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button. Each time you dothis, your vehicle will speed upabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Cruise control may not hold the setspeed when you are going up anddown hills. If your vehicle speedincreases going down a hill, use thebrakes to slow down. This will cancelthe cruise control. To resume the setspeed, press the RES/ACCEL button.The CRUISE CONTROL indicatoron the instrument panel will comeback on.

CONTINUED

Changing the Set Speed

Cruise Control

Features

251

NOTE:

10/07/12 16:45:09 31TE0630_256

Pressing the CRUISE button turnsthe system completely off and erasesthe previous cruising speed.

When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake or clutch pedal, thesystem will remember the previouslyset cruising speed. To return to thatspeed, accelerate to above 25 mph(40 km/h), and then press andrelease the RES/ACCEL button. TheCRUISE CONTROL indicator comeson. The vehicle will accelerate to thesame cruising speed as before.

You can cancel cruise control in anyof these ways:

Tap the brake or clutch pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

Push the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel.

Even with the cruise control turnedon, you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

Resting your foot on the brake orclutch pedal causes the cruisecontrol to cancel.

Resuming the Set SpeedCanceling Cruise Control

Cruise Control

252

10/07/12 16:45:19 31TE0630_257

×

The HomeLink universaltransceiver built into your vehiclecan be programmed to operate up tothree remotely controlled devicesaround your home, such as garagedoors, lighting, or home securitysystems.

Units manufactured between April 1,1982 and January 1, 1993 may beequipped with safety stop andreverse features. If your unit doesnot have an external entrapmentprotection system, an easy test toconfirm the function andperformance of the safety stop andreverse feature is to lay a 2 4under the closing door. The doorshould stop and reverse uponcontacting the piece of wood.

As an additional safety feature,garage door openers manufacturedafter January 1, 1993 are required tohave external entrapment protectionsystems, such as an electronic eye,which detect an object obstructingthe door.

Before programming yourHomeLink to operate a garage dooropener, confirm that the opener hasan external entrapment protectionsystem, such as an ‘‘electronic eye,’’or other safety and reverse stopfeatures.

If your garage door wasmanufactured before April 1, 1982,you may not be able to programHomeLink to operate it. These unitsdo not have safety features thatcause the motor to stop and reverseit if an obstacle is detected duringclosing, increasing the risk of injury.Do not use HomeLink with anygarage door opener that lacks safetystop and reverse features.

All V6 models

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

General InformationF

eatures

253

10/07/12 16:45:26 31TE0630_258

－

－

If you justreceived your vehicle and have nottrained any of the buttons inHomeLink before, you should eraseany previously learned codes beforetraining the first button. To do this,press and hold the two outsidebuttons on the HomeLinktransceiver for about 10 20 seconds,until the red indicator flashes.Release the buttons, then proceed tostep 1.

Refer to the safety information thatcame with your garage door openerto test that the safety features arefunctioning properly. If you do nothave this information, contact themanufacturer of the equipment.Before programming HomeLink to agarage door or gate opener, makesure that people and objects are outof the way of the device to preventpotential injury or damage.When programming a garage dooropener, park just outside the garage.


Training HomeLinkImportant Safety PrecautionsBefore you begin

254

10/07/12 16:45:33 31TE0630_259

If you are training the second or third buttons, go directly to step 1.

CONTINUED


Features

255

10/07/12 16:45:51 31TE0630_260

HomeLink is a registeredtrademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.





256

10/07/12 16:45:57 31TE0630_261

－

－

BluetoothIf equipped

handsfreelink.honda.com

www.handsfreelink.ca,

HandsFreeLink (HFL)allows you to place and receivephone calls using voice commands,without handling your cell phone.

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list ofcompatible phones, pairingprocedures, and special featurecapabilities:

In the U.S., visitor call (888) 528-7876.

Press andrelease to give a command or answera call.

Press andrelease to end a call, go back to theprevious command, or cancel thecommand.

In Canada, visitor call (888) 528-7876.

CONTINUED

Using HFL

HFL Talk button

HFL Back button

HFL Buttons

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

Features

257

HFL BACK BUTTON

HFL TALK BUTTON HFL TALK BUTTON

HFL BACK BUTTON

On models with navigation system On models without navigation system

NAVI VOICECONTROLBUTTONS

10/07/12 16:46:09 31TE0630_262

＃＃＃＃

Try to reduce all backgroundnoise. If the microphone picks upvoices other than yours,commands may be misinterpreted.

Many commands can be spokentogether. For example, you cansay ‘‘Call 123-456- ’’ or‘‘Dial Peter.’’

Press and release the HFL Talkbutton each time you want tomake a command. After the beep,speak in a clear, natural tone.

When HFL is in use, navigationvoice commands cannot berecognized.

To change the volume level ofHFL, use the audio system volumeknob or the steering wheel volumecontrols.

Air or wind noise from thedashboard and side vents,windows and moonroof mayinterfere with the microphone.Adjust or close them as necessary.

Voice Control Tips


258

MICROPHONE

10/07/12 16:46:19 31TE0630_263

To hear general HFL information,including help on pairing a phoneor setting up the system, say‘‘Tutorial.’’

For help at any time, including alist of available commands, say‘‘Hands free help.’’

A notification that there is anincoming call, or HFL is in use, willappear on the navigation screenwhen the audio system is on.

When there is an incoming call, orHFL is in use, ‘‘HANDSFREELINK’’will appear on the display.

‘‘ ’’ indicator will be displayed onthe audio display when a phone islinked.


Help Features Information Display


Features

259

U.S. model with navigation system isshown.

BLUETOOTH INDICATOR

BLUETOOTH INDICATOR


PHONE NUMBER

10/07/12 16:46:31 31TE0630_264

＃＃＃＃

How to Use HFL


260

‘‘Phone Setup’’

‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial’’

‘‘Edit’’

‘‘Delete’’

The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

Press HFLTalk button

Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command.

Hear which paired phone is currently linked to the system

Once a phonebook entry is stored, you can say a name here.

(See page 265)

(See page 266)

‘‘Status’’

‘‘List’’

‘‘Next Phone’’

‘‘Pair’’

‘‘Jim Smith’’

‘‘Set Pairing Code’’Set the pairing code to a ‘‘Fixed’’ or ‘‘Random’’ number(See page 265)

(See page 263)Pair a phone to the system

(See page 264)Edit the name of a paired phone

(See page 264)Delete a paired phone from the system

(See page 264)Hear a list of all phones paired to the system

(See page 265)Search for another previously paired phone to link to

(See page 266)Enter desired phone number‘‘123-456- ’’

10/07/12 16:46:40 31TE0630_265

CONTINUED


Features

261

‘‘Redial’’

‘‘Transfer’’

‘‘Mute’’

‘‘Send’’

‘‘Phonebook’’

‘‘Store’’

‘‘Edit’’

‘‘Delete’’

‘‘ReceiveContact’’

‘‘List’’



(See page 267)Redial the last number called

(See page 270)Transfer a call from HFL to your phone, or from your phone to HFL

(See page 271)Mute your voice to the person at the other end of the call

(See page 271)Send numbers or names during a call

(See page 272)Store a phonebook entry

(See page 272)Edit the number of an existing phonebook entry

(See page 273)Delete a phonebook entry

(See page 273)If your phone supports this function, use this to transfer contacts fromyour phone to HFL

(See page 273)Hear a list of all stored phonebook entries

10/07/12 16:46:49 31TE0630_266

＊

＊


262

‘‘Change Language’’

‘‘Hands Free Help’’

‘‘SystemSet up’’

‘‘Tutorial’’

‘‘Clear’’

‘‘Auto Transfer’’

‘‘Call Notification’’

‘‘Security’’

‘‘Change Passcode’’



: Canadian models

Set how you would like to be notified of an incoming call(See page 279)

Hear a list of available commands and additional information describing each command(See page 259)

(See page 278)Apply a security passcode to the system that must be input at each keycycle to access the system

(See page 279)Change your security passcode

(See page 279)Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when youenter the vehicle

(See page 280)Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries and securitypasscode

(See page 280)Change language from English to French

(See page 259)Hear a tutorial for general rules on using the system

10/07/12 16:46:56 31TE0630_267

To use HFL, you need to pair yourBluetooth-compatible cell phone tothe system.

This command group is available forpaired cell phones.

You cannot pair your phone whilethe vehicle is moving.

Your phone must be in discoveryor search mode to pair. Refer toyour phone’s manual.

Up to six phones can be paired.

Your phone’s battery may drainfaster when it is paired to HFL.

If after three minutes your phoneis not ready to pair or a phone isnot found, the system will time outand return to idle.

Press and release the HFL Talkbutton. If you are pairing a phonefor the first time, HFL will giveyou information about the pairingprocess. If it is not the first phoneyou are pairing, say ‘‘

’’ and say ‘‘ .’’

Follow the HFL prompts and putyour phone in discovery or searchmode. HFL will give you a 4-digitpairing code and begin searchingfor your phone.

When your phone finds aBluetooth device, select HFL fromthe options and enter the 4-digitcode from the previous step.

Follow the HFL prompts andname the newly paired phone.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Phone Setup

Phonesetup Pair

Phone pairing tips

To pair a cell phone:


Features

263

10/07/12 16:47:09 31TE0630_268

Say ‘‘ .’’

Say ‘‘ ’’ after the prompts.

If there is more than one phonepaired to the system, HFL will askyou which phone’s name you wantto change. Follow the HFLprompts and rename the phone.

Press and release the HFL Talkbutton before a command.


Say ‘‘ .’’


HFL will ask you which phone youwant to delete. Follow the HFLprompts to continue with thedeletion.


HFL will read out all the pairedphone’s names.


Say ‘‘ .’’1.

2.

3. 3.

1.

2.1.

2.

3.

Phone setup

Edit

Phone setup

DeleteList

Phone setup

To hear the names of all pairedphones:

To rename a paired phone: To delete a paired phone:


264

10/07/12 16:47:25 31TE0630_269


Say ‘‘ .’’


HFL will tell you which phone islinked to the system.


Say ‘‘ .’’Say ‘‘ .’’


Say ‘‘ ’’ after theprompts.

HFL disconnects the linked phoneand searches for another pairedphone.

Once another phone is found, it islinked to the system. HFL willinform you which phone is nowlinked.

If no other phones are found orpaired, HFL will inform you that theoriginal phone is linked again.


If you want HFL to create arandom code each time you pair aphone, say ‘‘ .’’ If you wantto choose your own 4-digit code tobe used each time, say ‘‘ ’’and follow the HFL prompts.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

4.

To hear which paired phone iscurrently linked:

To change from the currently linkedphone to another paired phone:

To change the pairing code setting:

Phone setup

Status

Phone setupPhone setup

Next phoneSet pairing code

Random

Fixed


Features

265

10/07/12 16:47:43 31TE0630_270

You can make calls using any phonenumber or a name in the HFLphonebook. You can also redial thelast number called.


Say ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’

Follow the HFL prompts and saythe phone number you want to dial.

Follow the HFL prompts toconfirm the number and say‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’

Once connected, you will hear theperson you called through the audiospeakers.


Follow the HFL prompts toconfirm the name and make thecall.

Follow the HFL prompts and saythe name stored in the HFLphonebook that you want to call.

Say ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’Bluetooth is the wireless technologythat links your phone to HFL. HFLuses a Class 2 Bluetooth, whichmeans the maximum range betweenyour phone and vehicle is 30 feet (10meters).

During a call, HFL allows you to talkup to 30 minutes after you removethe key from the ignition switch.However, this may weaken thevehicle’s battery.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

Making a Call

Call Dial

Call Dial

Call Dial

To make a call using a phonenumber:

To make a call using a name in theHFL phonebook:


266

10/07/12 16:47:58 31TE0630_271

Select a phonebook you want tochoose a phone number from.

If the phonebook you select is PIN-protected, you will need to enter thePIN to access it. See page formore information.

Press and release the HFL Talkbutton and say ‘‘ .’’

Select ‘‘.’’

Press the INFO button, then select‘‘ .’’

1.

2.

3.

276


CONTINUED

To redial the last number called byHFL:

To make a call from an importedphonebook:

Redial

Search ImportedPhonebook

Cellular Phone


Features

267

10/07/12 16:48:09 31TE0630_272

Select the name. All the phonenumbers stored for that name willbe listed.

To search for a specific name in thephonebook, enter the keyword foreither the first or last name.

To display all names in thephonebook, select the ‘‘ ’’ option.

Selecting ‘‘,’’ the phone

number will be stored in HFL, sothat you can call it using HFL’s nametag by voice.

Select the phone number, andpush the interface selector to theright.

4.

5.List

Store inHandsFreeLink


268

Push up the interface selector toshow a list.

10/07/12 16:48:18 31TE0630_273

Press the INFO button, and theINFO screen will be shown.

From the INFO screen, select‘‘Cellular Phone,’’ then select ‘‘Dial.’’

The navigation display will changeas shown above. Enter a callnumber.

To make a call, press the selectoron the interface dial to the right.

To end the call, press the HFLBack button.

1. 2. 3.

4.

5.

To make a call using the navigationdisplay (on models with navigationsystem):


Features

269

10/07/12 16:48:29 31TE0630_274

When you receive a call, an incomingcall notification (if activated) willplay and interrupt the audio systemif it is on.

Press the HFL Talk button to answerthe call, or the HFL Back button tohang up.

If your phone has Call Waiting, pressand release the HFL Talk button toput the original call on hold andanswer the incoming call.

To return to the original call, pressthe HFL Talk button again. If youdon’t want to answer the incomingcall, disregard it and continue withyour original call. If you want to hangup the original call and answer thenew call, press the HFL Back button.

Press and release the HFL Talkbutton and say ‘‘ .’’

You can transfer a call from HFL toyour phone, or from your phone toHFL.

Receiving a Call Transferring a Call

Transfer

Call Waiting


270

10/07/12 16:48:38 31TE0630_275

＃

You can mute your voice to theperson you are talking to during acall.

To mute your voice during a call,press and release the HFL Talkbutton and say ‘‘ .’’

To unmute your voice, press andrelease the HFL Talk button and say‘‘ ’’ again.

HFL allows you to send numbers ornames during a call. This is usefulwhen you call a menu-driven phonesystem.


Say ‘‘ .’’

Follow the HFL prompts and saythe name or number you want tosend.

Follow the HFL prompts to sendthe tones and continue the call.

To send a pound ( ), say‘‘pound.’’ To send a star (*), say ‘‘star.’’

You can store up to 50 names withtheir associated numbers in HFL.The numbers you store can be notonly phone numbers but other types,such as account numbers orpasswords, which can be sent duringa menu-driven call.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Muting a Call

Mute

Mute

Send Numbers or Names Duringa Call

Send

Phonebook

To send a name or number during acall:


Features

271

NOTE:

10/07/12 16:48:52 31TE0630_276

Avoid using duplicate nameentries.

Avoid using ‘‘home’’ as a nameentry.

It is easier for HFL to recognize amultisyllabic or longer name. Forexample, use ‘‘Peter’’ instead of‘‘Pete,’’ or ‘‘John Smith’’ instead of‘‘John.’’


Say ‘‘ .’’


Follow the HFL prompts and saythe name entry you want to edit.

When asked, say the new numberfor that name.

Follow the HFL prompts tocomplete the edit.


Say ‘‘ .’’


Say a name you want to list as yourphonebook entry.

Say the number you want to storefor the name entry.

Follow the HFL prompts and say‘‘ ’’ to store the entry.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Phonebook

Edit

Phonebook

Store

Enter

To edit the number stored in a name:To store a phonebook entry:


272

NOTE:

10/07/12 16:49:10 31TE0630_277



Say ‘‘ .’’


Say the name you want to deleteand follow the HFL prompts tocomplete the deletion.

Say ‘‘ .’’


HFL begins reading the names inthe order they were stored.

If you hear a name you want to call,immediately press the HFL Talkbutton and say ‘‘ .’’


Follow the HFL prompts, select anumber from your cell phone, andsend it to HFL.


Say ‘‘ .’’

Follow the HFL prompts andname the number, or say‘‘ ’’ if it is not the numberyou want to store.

Follow the HFL prompts if youwant to store another number.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

5.

Phonebook

Delete

Phonebook

List

Call

Receive contact

Phonebook

Discard

To delete a name: To list all names in the phonebook: To store a specific phone numberfrom your cell phone directly to theHFL phonebook (available on somephones):


Features

273

10/07/12 16:49:25 31TE0630_278

(available on some phones)

handsfreelink.honda.com


www.handsfreelink.ca,

The entire phonebook data of thecell phone that is linked to HFL canbe imported to the navigation system.

Select ‘‘,’’ and HFL will begin

importing the phonebook. Select‘‘ ’’ after the import is completed.

Once a phonebook has beenimported, you can search the phonenumbers by the person’s name.

Select ‘‘,’’ and a list of imported

phonebooks will be displayed.

Select a phonebook from the list.

In the U.S., visitor call (888) 528-7876.

For a list of cell phones that arecompatible with this feature:

If you select fromthe Information screen menu, youwill see five HFL options.

In Canada, visitor call (888) 528-7876.

Cellular Phonebook

Import CellularPhonebook

OK

Search ImportedPhonebook

Cellular Phone

Import Cellular Phonebook: Search Imported Phonebook:


274

IMPORTED DATEIMPORTEDPHONEBOOK

PIN ICON

10/07/12 16:49:42 31TE0630_279

Select a person from the list. Up tothree category icons are displayed inthe left side of the list:

Select the person’s number you wantto call, and press the HFL Talkbutton.

These indicate how many numbersare stored for the name. If a namehas more than three category icons,‘‘…’’ is displayed.

If the phonebook is PIN-protected,you will need to enter the 4-digit PIN.

To search for a specific name in thephonebook, enter the keyword foreither the first or last name.

To display all names in thephonebook, select the ‘‘ ’’ option.

CONTINUED

List


Features

275

Push up the interface selector toshow a list.

Preference

Pager

Home

Mobile

Work

Fax

Car

Voice

Other

10/07/12 16:49:58 31TE0630_280

Select ‘‘,’’ and a list of imported

phonebooks will be displayed.

After making a selection, thefollowing screen will appear.

Select ‘‘ ,’’ then ‘‘ ’’ to completethe deletion.

You can add, change, or remove aPIN number from any phonebook.

You can delete any importedphonebook.

Select a phonebook you want todelete. If the phonebook is PIN-protected, you will need to enter the4-digit PIN number.

If you have selected a phonebookwithout a PIN, you will see the abovedisplay.

Enter the new 4-digit PIN. You willhave to re-enter the PIN forconfirmation.

Delete ImportedPhonebook

Yes OK

PIN NumberDelete Imported Phonebook:

To add a PIN:


276

10/07/12 16:50:10 31TE0630_281

Select ‘‘ ,’’ then select‘‘ ’’ after you enterthe current PIN.

Enter the new 4-digit PIN number.You will be asked to re-enter the PINfor verification.

The display will change as shownabove.

Select the phonebook you want. Thedisplay will change as shown above.

Enter the current PIN for thisphonebook.

To remove a PIN:To change the PIN to a new number:PIN number

Do not use PIN


Features

277

10/07/12 16:50:19 31TE0630_282

This command group allows you tochange or customize HFL basicsettings.


Say ‘‘ .’’

Once a passcode is set, youwill need to enter it to use HFL eachtime you start the vehicle. If youforget the code, your dealer will haveto reset it for you, or you will have toclear the entire system (see page

).

Follow the HFL prompts and saythe 4-digit passcode you want toset.


Follow the HFL prompts toconfirm the number.

1.

2.

3.

4.

280

System Setup

System setup

Security

To set a 4-digit passcode to lock theHFL system for security purposes:


278

NOTE:

10/07/12 16:50:29 31TE0630_283

＊

＊

If you get into the vehicle while youare on the phone, the call can beautomatically transferred to HFLwith the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.


Say ‘‘ .’’


Say ‘‘ .’’Press and release the HFL Talkbutton before a command.

Say ‘‘ .’’

Follow the HFL prompts toconfirm the number.

Follow the HFL prompts and saythe new 4-digit passcode.


The default setting is a ring tone.

Follow the HFL prompts and say‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’ Youcan also say ‘‘ ’’ for no audibleincoming call notification.


HFL will let you know if autotransfer is on or off, depending onthe previous setting. Follow theHFL prompts to change thesetting.


2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3. 1.

:

CONTINUED

System setup

System setup

System setupChange passcode

Ring tone PromptOff

Call notif ication

Auto transfer

To change your security passcode: To select either a ring tone or aprompt as the incoming callnotif ication :

To activate or deactivate the autotransfer function:


Features

279

10/07/12 16:50:47 31TE0630_284

This operation clears the passcodes,paired phones, all names in the HFLphonebook, and all importedphonebook data.


Say ‘‘ .’’


Follow the HFL prompts tocontinue to complete the clearingprocedure.

You can also clear the system whenyou have forgotten the passcode andcannot access HFL. When HFL asksyou for the passcode, say ‘‘

.’’ Paired phones, all names inthe HFL phonebook and all importedphonebook data will be lost.


Follow the HFL prompts.

Say the language you want tochange to in that language.


Say ‘‘ .’’

Follow the HFL prompts tochange the language to English orFrench.

If you have not named your pairedphone in the language you justselected, HFL will ask you to name itin the current language.

When French is your currentlyselected language, you can give voicecommands in French.

1.

2.

3.

2.

1.1.

2.

Canadian models only Canadian models only

System setup

Clear

Systemclear

Quick Language Selection Change Language

Change language

To clear the system:

To quickly change the language: To change the system languagebetween English and French:


280

10/07/12 16:51:04 31TE0630_285

The name and logos areregistered trademarks owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use ofsuch marks by Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. is under license. Othertrademarks and trade names arethose of their respective owners.

BluetoothAs required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.



Bluetooth Wireless Technology


Features

281

10/07/12 16:51:12 31TE0630_286

282

10/07/12 16:51:14 31TE0630_287

Before you begin driving yourvehicle, you should know whatgasoline to use and how to check thelevels of important fluids. You alsoneed to know how to properly storeluggage or packages. Theinformation in this section will helpyou. If you plan to add anyaccessories to your vehicle, pleaseread the information in this sectionfirst.

.............................Break-in Period . 284.................Fuel Recommendation . 284

.........Service Station Procedures . 285....................................Refueling . 285

........Check Fuel Cap Message . 287Opening and Closing

................................the Hood . 288...................................Oil Check . 290

.............Engine Coolant Check . 291...............................Fuel Economy . 292

...Accessories and Modifications . 295.............................Carrying Cargo . 297

Before Driving

Before

Driving

283

10/07/12 16:51:19 31TE0630_288

Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

You should also follow theserecommendations with anoverhauled or exchanged engine, orwhen the brakes are replaced.

Your vehicle is designed to operateon unleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 87 or higher. Useof a lower octane gasoline can causea persistent, heavy metallic rappingnoise that can lead to engine damage.

Avoid hard braking for the first200 miles (300 km).

Do not tow a trailer.

Do not change the oil until thescheduled maintenance time.

You may hear a knocking noise fromthe engine if you drive the vehicle atlow engine speed (below about 1,000rpm) in a higher gear. To stop this,raise the engine speed by shifting toa lower gear.

We recommend using qualitygasolines containing detergentadditives that help prevent fuelsystem and engine deposits.

In addition, in order to maintain goodperformance, fuel economy, andemissions control, we stronglyrecommend, in areas where it isavailable, the use of gasoline thatdoes NOT contain manganese-basedfuel additives such as MMT.

Use of gasoline with these additivesmay adversely affect performance,and cause the malfunction indicatorlamp on your instrument panel tocome on. If this happens, contactyour authorized dealer for service.

On models with manual transmission

Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

284

10/07/12 16:51:32 31TE0630_289

CONTINUED

Park with the driver’s side closestto the service station pump.

To open the fuel fill door, pushdown on the lever located to theleft of the driver’s seat.

Some gasoline today is blended withoxygenates such as ethanol orMTBE. Your vehicle is designed tooperate on oxygenated gasolinecontaining up to 10% ethanol byvolume and up to 15% MTBE byvolume. Do not use gasolinecontaining methanol.

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

For further important fuel-relatedinformation for your vehicle, orinformation on gasoline that does notcontain MMT, visit Owner Link at

. In Canada, visitfor additional

information on gasoline.

1.

2.owners.honda.comwww.honda.ca

Refueling

Fuel Recommendation, Service Station Procedures

Before

Driving

285

Push

TETHER

HOLDER FUEL FILL CAP

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

10/07/12 16:51:44 31TE0630_290

Screw the fuel fill cap back onuntil it clicks at least once. If youdo not properly tighten the cap,you will see a ‘‘CHECK FUELCAP’’ message on the informationdisplay. If the system still detectsan evaporative system leak afterretightening the cap, themalfunction indicator lamp maycome on (see page ).

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank equalizes.The fuel fill cap is attached to thefuel filler with a tether. Place thecap in the holder on the fuel filldoor.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Thisleaves some room in the fuel tankfor the fuel to expand withtemperature changes.

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking offeven though the tank is not full,there may be a problem with yourvehicle’s fuel vapor recoverysystem. The system helps keepfuel vapor from going into theatmosphere. Try filling at anotherpump. If this does not fix theproblem, consult your dealer.

5.

6.

3. 4.

406

Service Station Procedures

286

10/07/12 16:51:51 31TE0630_291

If the system still detects a leak inyour vehicle’s evaporative emissionssystem, the malfunction indicatorlamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fillcap was not already tightened, turnthe engine off, and check orretighten the fuel fill cap until itclicks at least once. The MIL shouldgo off after several days of normaldriving once the cap is tightened orreplaced. If the MIL does not go off,have your vehicle inspected by adealer. For more information, seepage .

Turn the engine off, and confirm thefuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosenit, then retighten it until it clicks atleast once. The message should gooff after several days of normaldriving once you tighten or replacethe fuel fill cap. To scroll to anotherdisplay, press the select/reset knob.

The ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ messagewill appear each time you restart theengine until the system turns themessage off.

Your vehicle’s onboard diagnosticsystem will detect a loose or missingfuel fill cap as an evaporative systemleak. The first time a leak is detecteda ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ messageappears on the information display.

406


Check Fuel Cap MessageB

eforeD

riving

287

10/07/12 16:51:59 31TE0630_292

Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

Reach in between the hood andthe front grille with your fingers.The hood latch handle is abovethe ‘‘H’’ logo. Push this handle upuntil it releases the hood. Lift thehood.

If the hood latch handle moves stiffly,or if you can open the hood withoutlifting the handle, the mechanismshould be cleaned and lubricated.

1. 2.

Opening and Closing the Hood


288

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE LATCH

10/07/12 16:52:06 31TE0630_293

Holding the grip, pull the supportrod out of its clip. Insert the endinto the hole in the hooddesignated by an arrow.

Lift the hood up most of the way.The hydraulic supports will lift itup the rest of the way and hold itup.

To close the hood, lift it up slightly toremove the support rod from thehole. Put the support rod back intoits holding clip. Lower the hood toabout a foot (30 cm) above thefender, then let it drop. Make sure itis securely latched.

To close the hood, lower it toabout a foot (30 cm) above thefender, then press down firmlywith your hands. Make sure thehood is securely latched.

3. V6 models4-cylinder models


Before

Driving

289

V6 modelsCLIP

GRIP SUPPORT ROD

4-cylinder models

10/07/12 16:52:14 31TE0630_294

Wait a few minutes after turning theengine off before you check the oil.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto its hole.

Remove the dipstick again, andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.Remove the dipstick (orange

handle/loop).

Wipe off the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

1.

2.

3.

4.

350

Oil Check

Adding Engine Oil


290

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

V6 modelsDIPSTICK(orange handle) DIPSTICK (orange loop)4-cylinder models 4-cylinder models

10/07/12 16:52:25 31TE0630_295

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Refer toon page for information

about checking other items on yourvehicle.

354

346

Engine Coolant Check

AddingEngine Coolant

Owner’s MaintenanceChecks


Before

Driving

291

UPPER MARKLOWER MARK

MINV6 models

RESERVE TANK

V6 models

MAX

MIN

MAX RESERVE TANK

4-cylinder models

10/07/12 16:52:35 31TE0630_296

－－

－－

Fuel economy is not a fixed number.It varies based on driving conditions,driving habits, and vehicle condition.Therefore, it is not possible for oneset of estimates to predict fueleconomy precisely for all drivers inall environments.

Represents urbandriving in light traffic. A range ofmiles per gallon achieved is alsoprovided.

The EPA fuel economy estimatesshown in the example to the rightare a useful tool for comparisonwhen buying a vehicle. EPAestimates include:

Represents a combination of city andhighway driving. The scalerepresents the range of combinedfuel economy for other vehicles inthe class.

Represents amixture of rural and interstatedriving, in a warmed-up vehicle,typical of longer trips in free-flowingtraffic. A range of miles per gallon

achieved is also provided.

Provides an estimated annual fuelcost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000km) per year multiplied by the cost

per gallon (based on EPA fuel costdata) divided by the combined fueleconomy.

For more information on fueleconomy ratings and factors thataffect fuel economy, visit

(Canada: Visit)

www.fueleconomy.gov www.vehicles.gc.ca

Fuel Economy

Actual Mileage and EPA FuelEconomy Estimates Comparison.

City MPGCombined Fuel Economy

Highway MPGEstimated Annual Fuel Cost

292

Combined FuelEconomy

(Sample U.S. EPA label shown)

Estimated AnnualFuel Cost

City MPG Highway MPG

10/07/12 16:52:46 31TE0630_297

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Aggressive driving (hardacceleration and braking)Excessive idling, accelerating andbraking in stop-and-go trafficCold engine operation (enginesare more efficient when warmedup)Driving with a heavy load or theair conditioner runningImproperly inflated tires

The following factors can lower yourvehicle’s fuel economy:

A properly maintained vehiclemaximizes fuel economy. Poormaintenance can significantly reducefuel economy. Always maintain yourvehicle according to the maintenancemessages displayed on theinformation display (see

on page ).For example:

Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering,and hard braking increase fuelconsumption.

Aerodynamic drag has a big effecton fuel economy at speeds above45 mph (75 km/h). Reduce yourspeed and you reduce the drag.Trailers, car top carriers, roofracks and bike racks are also bigcontributors to increased drag.

If your vehicle has amanual transmission, you canboost your fuel economy by upshifting as early as possible.

Idlingresults in 0 miles per gallon (0 kmsper liter).

An underinflated tire increases‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reducesfuel economy.

It puts a heavierload on the engine, increasing fuelconsumption.

Inparticular, a build-up of snow ormud on your vehicle’s undersideadds weight and rolling resistance.Frequent cleaning helps your fueleconomy.

346CONTINUED

Fuel Economy

Fuel Economy Factors Use the recommended viscositymotor oil, displaying the APICertif ication Seal (see page

).

Improving Fuel Economy

Owner’sMaintenance Checks

Drive moderately

Observe the speed limit

Always drive in the highest gearpossible

Avoid excessive idling

Maintain proper tire inflation

Avoid carrying excess weight inyour vehicle

Keep your vehicle clean

351

Vehicle Maintenance

Drive EfficientlyB

eforeD

riving

293

10/07/12 16:53:05 31TE0630_298

－

－

Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.Reset trip counter to zero.Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.Follow one of the simple calculations above.

The A/Cputs an extra load on the enginewhich makes it use more fuel. Usethe fresh-air ventilation whenpossible.

Combine several short trips intoone. A warmed-up engine is morefuel efficient than a cold one.

Direct calculation is therecommended source of informationabout your actual fuel economy.Using frequency of fill-ups or takingfuel gauge readings are NOTaccurate measures of fuel economy.Fuel economy may improve over thefirst several thousand miles(kilometers).

1)2)3)4)

Fuel Economy

Checking Your Fuel Economy

Measuring Techniques

Minimize the use of the airconditioning system

Plan and combine trips

Calculating Fuel Economy

294

Miles drivenGallons of

fuelMiles per

Gallon

100 Kilometers L per 100 kmLiter

10/07/12 16:53:17 31TE0630_299

Before installing any accessory:

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Your dealer has Honda accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle. These accessories havebeen designed and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ) or interfere withthe proper operation of yourvehicle.

Although non-Honda accessoriesmay fit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

Before installing any electronicaccessory, have the installercontact your dealer for assistance.If possible, have your dealerinspect the final installation.

Do not install accessories on theside pillars or across the rearwindows. Accessories installed inthese areas may interfere withproper operation of the sidecurtain airbags.

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Honda accessories, canmake your vehicle unsafe. Beforeyou make any modifications or addany accessories, be sure to read thefollowing information.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer controlled systems, suchas your airbags, anti-lock brakes, andtire pressure monitoring system.

408

Accessories

Accessories and Modifications

Before

Driving

295

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

10/07/12 16:53:30 31TE0630_300

Some examples are:

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components withnon-Honda components couldseriously affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

Raising your vehicle with anon-Honda suspension kit canaffect the handling, stability, andreliability.

Lowering the vehicle with a non-Honda suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult your dealer.

Modifying your steering wheel orany other part of your vehicle’ssafety features can make thesystems ineffective.

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

Non-Honda wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents and will not becompatible with the tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS).

Modifying Your Vehicle

Accessories and Modifications

296

10/07/12 16:53:39 31TE0630_301

＊

＊

Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas:

Glove box

Door and seat-back pockets

Roof-rack (if installed)

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tires, andmake it unsafe. Before carrying anytype of cargo, be sure to read thefollowing pages.

Center pockets

Console compartment

Trunk, including the rear seatwhen folded down

Carrying Cargo

Before

Driving

297

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT CENTER POCKETS

GLOVE BOX

TRUNK

DOOR POCKET

PASSENGER’S SEAT-BACK POCKET

DRIVER’S SEAT-BACK POCKET

If equipped:

10/07/12 16:53:50 31TE0630_302

－

－ ×

The maximum load for your vehicleis 850 lbs (385 kg).

Label Example

See Tire And Loading Informationlabel attached to the driver’sdoorjamb.

This figure includes the total weightof all occupants, cargo, andaccessories, and the tongue load ifyou are towing a trailer.

Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit

Locate the statement ‘‘Thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’splacard.

Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lbs.

The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. Forexample, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amountequals 1,400 lbs. and there will befive 150 lb. passengers in yourvehicle, the amount of availablecargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs.(1,400 750 (5 150) = 650 lbs.)

Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

Load Limits

Carrying Cargo

298

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

10/07/12 16:54:04 31TE0630_303

In addition, the total weight of thevehicle, all occupants, accessories,cargo, and trailer tongue load mustnot exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) or the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). Bothare on a label on the driver’sdoorjamb.

Example 1

Example 2

Example 3

Carrying Cargo

Before

Driving

299

Max Load 850 lbs(385 kg)



Passenger Weight150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)



Cargo Weight550 lbs(249 kg)



10/07/12 16:54:11 31TE0630_304

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Do not put any items on top of therear shelf. They can block yourview and be thrown around thevehicle during a crash.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe driver’s ability to operate thepedals, the operation of the seats,or the operation of the sensorsunder the seats.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop.

Keep all cargo below the bottomof the windows. If it is higher, itcould interfere with the properoperation of the side curtainairbags.

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the trunk, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible.

If you fold down the back seat, tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing the trunklid, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of

, follow the instructionson page .51

Carrying Cargo

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

Carrying Cargo in the Trunk

carbon monoxidepoisoning

300

10/07/12 16:54:22 31TE0630_305

OptionalThe cargo net can be used to helphold down items stored in the trunk.

Carrying Cargo

Cargo NetB

eforeD

riving

301

10/07/12 16:54:26 31TE0630_306

302

10/07/12 16:54:29 31TE0630_307

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate themanual and automatic transmissions.It also includes importantinformation on parking your vehicle,the braking system, the vehiclestability assist (VSA ) system, thetire pressure monitoring system(TPMS), and facts you need if youare planning to tow a trailer.

........................Preparing to Drive . 304.......................Starting the Engine . 305

...................Manual Transmission . 306..............Automatic Transmission . 309

Driving with the Paddle.......................................Shifters . 315

...........................................Parking . 320.............................Braking System . 321

...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 322Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ),

aka Electronic Stability Control.......................(ESC), System . 324

Tire Pressure Monitoring........................System (TPMS) . 326

...........................Towing a Trailer . 329

Driving

Driving

303

10/07/12 16:54:33 31TE0630_308

You should do the following checksand adjustments before you driveyour vehicle.

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check that the hood is fully closed.

Check that the trunk is fullyclosed.

Check that any items you may becarrying are stored properly orfastened down securely.

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicators in theinstrument panel (see page ).Check the seat adjustment (see

page ).

Check the seat adjustment (seepage ).

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the steering wheeladjustment (see page ).

Make sure the doors are securelyclosed and locked.

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

2.

1.

6.

7.

8.

9.

3.

4.

5.

76

14

55

10.

11.

93

94

106

On vehicles with power adjustableseats

On vehicles with manual adjustableseats

Preparing to Drive

304

10/07/12 16:54:50 31TE0630_309

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Press the clutch pedal down all theway. The START (III) positiondoes not function unless the clutchpedal is pressed.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. Do not holdthe key in the START (III)position for more than 15 secondsat a time. If the engine does notstart right away, pause for at least10 seconds before trying again.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Manual transmission:

Automatic transmission:

Starting the Engine

Driving

305

The immobilizer system protects yourvehicle f rom thef t. If an improperlycoded key (or other device) is used, theengine’s f uel system is disabled. Formore inf ormation, see page .

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air f ound ataltitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400meters) adds to this problem.

78

10/07/12 16:55:00 31TE0630_310

Come to a full stop before you shiftinto reverse. You can damage thetransmission by trying to shift intoreverse with the vehicle moving.Push down the clutch pedal, andpause for a few seconds beforeshifting into reverse, or shift into oneof the forward gears for a moment.This stops the gears so they won’t‘‘grind.’’

When slowing down, you can getextra braking from the engine byshifting to a lower gear. This extrabraking can help you maintain a safespeed and prevent your brakes fromoverheating while going down asteep hill. Before downshifting,make sure the engine speed will notgo into the tachometer’s red zone inthe lower gear.

The manual transmission issynchronized in all forward gears forsmooth operation. It has a lockout soyou cannot shift directly from fifth toreverse.

On vehicles with 6-speed manualtransmission, the lockout systemprevents you from shifting directlyfrom any forward gear to reverse

while the vehicle is moving at acertain speed (see page ).

When shifting up or down, makesure you push the clutch pedal downall the way, shift to the next gear,and let the pedal up gradually. Whenyou are not shifting, do not rest yourfoot on the clutch pedal. This cancause your clutch to wear out faster.

308On models with 5-speed manualtransmission, or modelswith 6-speed manual transmission

Manual Transmission

306

5-speed M/T 6-speed M/T

10/07/12 16:55:10 31TE0630_311

Drive in the highest gear that letsthe engine run and acceleratesmoothly. This will give you goodfuel economy and effectiveemissions control. The followingshift points are recommended:

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th

Normal acceleration

15 mph (25 km/h)25 mph (40 km/h)40 mph (65 km/h)50 mph (80 km/h)

Normal acceleration

15 mph (24 km/h)17 mph (27 km/h)27 mph (43 km/h)36 mph (58 km/h)41 mph (66 km/h)

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th5th to 6th

On models with 5-speed manualtransmission

On models with 6-speed manualtransmission

Recommended Shift Points

Manual Transmission

Driving

307

Rapid slowing or speeding upcan cause loss of control onslippery surfaces. If you crash,you can be injured.

Use extra care when driving onslippery surfaces.

10/07/12 16:55:19 31TE0630_312

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.

Before downshifting, make sure theengine will not go into thetachometer’s red zone.

Press the clutch pedal, and shift toreverse.

With the clutch pedal still pressed,start the engine.

If you are still unable to shift toreverse, apply the parking brake,and turn the ignition key to theACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)position.

If you need to use this procedure toshift to reverse, your vehicle may bedeveloping a problem. Have itchecked by your dealer.

The manual transmission has alockout so you cannot accidentallyshift from any forward gear toreverse while the vehicle is movingat a certain speed. If you cannot shiftto reverse when the vehicle isstopped, do the following:

With the clutch pedal pressed,move the shift lever to the first/second gear side of the neutralgate, then shift to reverse.

1.

2.

3.

4.

6-speed manual transmission onlyEngine Speed Limiter Reverse Lockout

Manual Transmission

308

Move the shift lever in sequence.

10/07/12 16:55:32 31TE0630_313

These indicators on the instrumentpanel show which position the shiftlever is in.

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it flashes while driving (inany shift position), it indicates apossible problem in the transmission.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on along with the ‘‘D’’indicator, there is a problem with theautomatic transmission controlsystem. Avoid rapid acceleration, andhave the transmission checked byyour dealer as soon as possible.

Using a paddle shift mode, the gearposition indicator shows you theselected gear number (see page

).315

Shift Lever Position Indicators

Automatic Transmission

Driving

309

4-cylinder models

SHIFT LEVER POSITION INDICATORS

GEAR POSITION INDICATORV6 models

10/07/12 16:55:42 31TE0630_314

Do this:Press the brake pedal andpress the shift lever releasebutton.Press the shift lever releasebutton.

Move the shift lever.

To shift from:

P to R

R to PN to RD to SS to DD to NN to DR to N

To shift from:

P to R

R to PN to R

D to D3D3 to 22 to 11 to 2

2 to D3D3 to DD to NN to DR to N

Do this:Press the brake pedal andpress the shift lever releasebutton.

Press the shift lever releasebutton.

Move the shift lever.

To shift from Park to any position,press firmly on the brake pedal, andpress the release button on the frontof the shift lever, then move thelever. You cannot shift out of Parkwhen the ignition switch is in theLOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)position.

4-cylinder models V6 models


Shifting

310

SHIFT LEVER

RELEASE BUTTON

4-cylinder model is shown.

10/07/12 16:55:51 31TE0630_315

－

－－

－

－

CONTINUED

To shift from D to D3,press the shift lever release button.This position is similar to D, exceptonly the first three gears areselected. Use D3 when towing atrailer in hilly terrain, or to provideengine braking when going down asteep hill. D3 can also keep thetransmission from cycling betweenthird and fourth gears in stop-and-godriving.

Use this position foryour normal driving. Thetransmission automatically selects asuitable gear (1 through 5) for yourspeed and acceleration. You maynotice the transmission shifting up athigher engine speeds when theengine is cold. This helps the enginewarm up faster.

Press the brakepedal and the release button on thefront of the shift lever to shift fromPark to reverse. To shift fromreverse to neutral, come to acomplete stop, and then shift. Pressthe release button before shiftinginto reverse from neutral.

Use neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to the Parkposition if you need to leave yourvehicle for any reason. Press on thebrake pedal when you are movingthe shift lever from neutral toanother gear.

This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Press the releasebutton on the front of the shift leverto move it.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see onpage .

To avoid transmission damage, cometo a complete stop before shiftinginto Park. You must also press therelease button to shift into Park. Theshift lever must be in Park beforeyou can remove the key from theignition switch.

313

4-cylinder models


Drive (D3)

Drive (D)Reverse (R)

Neutral (N)

Park (P)

Shift Lock Release

Driving

311

10/07/12 16:56:00 31TE0630_316

－－－ To shift into the Sposition, press the release button onthe front of the shift lever, and movethe lever to S. This position is similarto D, except only gears from first tofourth are selected. The S positionkeeps the transmission from cyclingbetween fourth and fifth gears instop-and-go driving.

To shift to second,press the release button on the frontof the shift lever. This position locksthe transmission in second gear. Itdoes not downshift to first gearwhen you come to a stop.

Use second gear:

To shift from second tofirst, press the release button on thefront of the shift lever. This positionlocks the transmission in first gear.By upshifting and downshiftingthrough 1, 2, D3, and D, you canoperate this transmission much likea manual transmission without aclutch pedal.

For more power when climbing.

To increase engine braking whengoing down steep hills.

For starting out on a slipperysurface or in deep snow.

To help reduce wheel spin.

When driving downhill with atrailer.

With the shift lever in D or S, youcan also use the paddle shifters toshift the transmission up or down.With the paddle shifters, you canoperate the transmission much like amanual transmission without aclutch pedal. For more informationon driving with the paddle shifters,see page .315

V6 models4-cylinder models 4-cylinder models


S Position (S)Second (2) First (1)

312

10/07/12 16:56:11 31TE0630_317

Put a cloth on the edge of the shiftlock release slot cover to preventscratches. Use a small flat-tipscrewdriver or metal fingernail fileto carefully pry up the edge of thecover and remove it from the slot.

Insert the key in the shift lockrelease slot.

This allows you to move the shiftlever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal and pressing the releasebutton does not work.

Set the parking brake.

Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Shift Lock ReleaseEngine Speed Limiter


Driving

313

COVER

4-cylinder model is shown.

10/07/12 16:56:22 31TE0630_318

Remove the key from the shiftlock release slot, then reinstall thecover. Make sure the notch on thecover is on the right side. Insertthe key into the ignition switch,press the brake pedal, and restartthe engine.

Push down on the key while youpress the release button on thefront of the shift lever and movethe shift lever out of Park toneutral.

If you need to use the shift lockrelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have itchecked by your dealer.

6.

5.


314

RELEASE BUTTON

SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT

10/07/12 16:56:29 31TE0630_319

＋

－

＋－

CONTINUED

Each time you pull (right), thetransmission shifts to a higher gear.Pull (left) to downshift. You willsee the selected gear number on theinstrument panel.

Downshifting with the paddle shifterallows you to increase the enginebraking when going down steep orlong hills, and provides more powerwhen climbing uphills. You canupshift the transmission manually toreduce the rpm.

When you pull either paddle shifter,the gear position indicator shows youthe selected gear number.

To shift up or down, use the(right) or (left) paddle shifter oneither side of the steering wheel.

When you are driving in the Dposition, you can shift thetransmission up or down manuallywith the paddle shifters.

V6 models only

Using the Paddle Shifters in theD position (D-Paddle Shift Mode)

Driving with the Paddle Shifters (Automatic Transmission Only)

Driving

315

GEAR POSITION INDICATOR

10/07/12 16:56:39 31TE0630_320

＋

The transmission control systemmonitors the accelerator pedal useand your driving conditions. Whenyou press the accelerator pedal as innormal driving, the system judgesthat you are driving at a constantcruising speed without using thepaddle shifters. Under theseconditions, D-paddle shift mode iscanceled, and the transmissionautomatically returns to drive mode(D).

Each time you pull either paddleshifter, the transmission shifts onegear up or down. If you want to shiftup or down more than two gears, pullthe paddle shifter twice, pause, andthen pull it again.

The transmission remains in theselected gear if you do not accelerate.

When the transmission returns todrive mode (D), the displayed gearnumber disappears.

Hold the paddle shifter for 2seconds to return to drive mode (D).

The automatic transmission will notallow you to shift up or down if:

You downshift before the enginespeed reaches the highestthreshold of the lower gear.

If you try to do this, the gearposition indicator will flash thenumber of the lower gear severaltimes, then return to a higher gear.

You upshift before the enginespeed reaches the lowestthreshold of the higher gear.

You pull both paddle shifters atthe same time.


316

10/07/12 16:56:50 31TE0630_321

＋－

CONTINUED

When you move the shift lever from‘‘D’’ to ‘‘S’’ position and pull eitherpaddle shifter, the gear positionindicator displays ‘‘M’’ along with theselected gear number.

To upshift, pull the (right) paddleshifter. To downshift, pull the(left) paddle shifter.

The transmission downshifts to firstgear and returns to drive mode (D)when the vehicle comes to acomplete stop or the vehicle speed isabout 6 mph (10 km/h).

If there is a problem in thetransmission while you are drivingwith the paddle shifters, the Dindicator flashes, the D-paddle shiftmode is canceled, and thetransmission returns to drive mode(D).

To enter the sequential shift mode,press the release button on the frontof the shift lever, move the lever tothe S position, then pull either paddleshifter. To return to drive mode (D),move the shift lever to the D position.While you are driving in thesequential shift mode, thetransmission will not automaticallyreturn to drive mode (D).

With the shift lever in the S position,you can manually shift up or downwith the paddle shifters. Thetransmission goes into the sequentialshift mode and holds the selectedgear.

V6 models only

Using the Paddle Shifters in the Sposition (Sequential Shift Mode)


Driving

317

GEAR POSITION INDICATOR

‘‘M’’ INDICATOR

10/07/12 16:56:59 31TE0630_322

The automatic transmission will notallow you to shift up or down if:

If you try to do this, the gearposition indicator will flash thenumber of the lower gear severaltimes, then return to a higher gear.

If the vehicle speed decreasesbelow the redline of the selectedlower gear while the indicator isflashing, the transmissiondownshifts, and the indicatordisplays the selected gear.

You pull both paddle shifters atthe same time.

Downshifting with the paddle shifterallows you to increase the enginebraking when going down steep orlong hills, and provides more powerwhen climbing uphills. You canupshift the transmission manually toreduce the rpm.

The transmission also shiftsautomatically as the vehicle comes toa complete stop. It downshifts to firstgear when the vehicle speed reaches6 mph (10 km/h) or less.

When you accelerate from a stop,the transmission starts in first gear,and you must manually upshiftbetween first and fifth gears. Makesure you upshift before the enginespeed reaches the tachometer’s redzone.

The transmission remains in theselected gear (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1). Thereis no automatic downshift when youpush the accelerator pedal to thefloor.

When you are driving in 4th or 5thgear, the transmission downshifts tothe lower gear under the followingconditions:

The vehicle slows down to acertain speed.

You press the brake pedal.

You downshift before the enginespeed reaches the highestthreshold of the lower gear.

You upshift before the enginespeed reaches the lowestthreshold of the higher gear.


318

10/07/12 16:57:13 31TE0630_323

＋

When you are in sequential shiftmode, and the vehicle is stopped,pull the (right) paddle shifter toshift to second gear. You will see‘‘M2’’ in the display. Starting insecond gear helps to reducewheelspin in deep snow or on aslippery surface.

Drive in the highest gear that letsthe engine run and acceleratesmoothly. This will give you goodfuel economy and effectiveemissions control. The followingshift points are recommended:

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th

Normal acceleration

15 mph (24 km/h)25 mph (40 km/h)40 mph (64 km/h)45 mph (72 km/h)


Starting in Second Gear Recommended Shift PointsD

riving

319

10/07/12 16:57:21 31TE0630_324

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make surethe parking brake is set firmly, oryour vehicle may roll if it is parkedon an incline.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, set the parking brakebefore you put the transmission inPark. This keeps the vehicle frommoving and putting pressure on theparking mechanism in thetransmission.

Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.

Make sure the moonroof (ifequipped) and the windows areclosed.

Turn off the lights.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.,in the trunk or take them with you.

Lock the doors.

Check the indicator on theinstrument panel to verify that thesecurity system is set.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The hot three waycatalytic converter could causethese materials to catch on fire.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb. If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, put it in first gear.

If the vehicle is facing downhill,turn the front wheels toward thecurb. If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, put it in reverse gear.

Parking Tips

Parking

320

10/07/12 16:57:32 31TE0630_325

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

Your vehicle is equipped with discbrakes at all four wheels. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The emergencybrake assist system increases thestopping force when you depress thebrake pedal hard in an emergencysituation. The anti-lock brake system(ABS) helps you retain steeringcontrol when braking very hard.

Resting your foot on the pedal keepsthe brakes applied lightly, builds upheat, reduces their effectiveness andreduces brake pad life. In addition,fuel economy can be reduced. It alsokeeps your brake lights on all thetime, confusing drivers behind you.

Check the brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious in your driving.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by taking your foot off theaccelerator and downshifting to alower gear.

The front and rear disc brakes on allmodels have audible brake pad wearindicators.

If the brake pads need replacing, youwill hear a distinctive, metallicscreeching sound when you applythe brake pedal. If you do not havethe brake pads replaced, they willscreech all the time. It is normal forthe brakes to occasionally squeal orsqueak when you apply them.

Braking System Design

Brake Pad Wear Indicators

Braking System

Driving

321

10/07/12 16:57:42 31TE0630_326

If this indicator comes on, the anti-lock function of the braking systemhas shut down. The brakes still worklike a conventional system, butwithout anti-lock. You should haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

The anti-lock brake system (ABS)helps prevent the wheels fromlocking up, and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal: it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before theABS activates. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

The electronic brake distribution(EBD) system, which is part of theABS, also balances the front-to-rearbraking distribution according tovehicle loading.

Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

If the ABS indicator comes on whiledriving, test the brakes as shown onpage .407

You should never pump the brake pedal.

ABS Indicator

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

322

10/07/12 16:57:50 31TE0630_327

If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on together,and the parking brake is fullyreleased, the EBD system may alsobe shut down.

It only helps with thesteering control during braking.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safespeed for the road and weatherconditions.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

Test your brakes as instructed onpage . If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your vehiclerepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Avoid sudden hard brakingwhich could cause the rear wheels tolock up and possibly lead to a loss ofcontrol.

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock.

407

Important Safety RemindersABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop thevehicle.

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

Driving

323

10/07/12 16:57:58 31TE0630_328

The VSA system cannot enhance thevehicle’s driving stability in allsituations and does not control yourvehicle’s entire braking system. It isstill your responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

The vehicle stability assist (VSA)system helps to stabilize the vehicleduring cornering if the vehicle turnsmore or less than desired. It alsoassists you in maintaining tractionwhile accelerating on loose orslippery road surfaces. It does thisby regulating the engine’s output andby selectively applying the brakes.

The main function of theVSA system is generally known asElectronic Stability Control (ESC).The system also includes a tractioncontrol function.

If the low tire pressure indicator orTPMS indicator comes on, the VSAsystem automatically turns on even ifthe VSA system is turned off bypressing the VSA OFF switch (seepage ). If this happens, youcannot turn the VSA system off bypressing the VSA OFF switch again.

Without VSA, your vehicle will havenormal braking and cornering ability,but it will not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.

When VSA is off, the VSA OFFindicator comes on as a reminder.

If this indicator comes on whiledriving, pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe, and turn off theengine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine. If the VSAsystem indicator stays on or comesback on while driving, have the VSAsystem inspected by your dealer.

When VSA activates, you will see theVSA system indicator blink.

When VSA activates, you may noticethat the engine does not respond tothe accelerator in the same way itdoes at other times. There may alsobe some noise from the VSAhydraulic system. You will also seethe VSA system indicator blink.

325

Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

VSA OFF Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

324

NOTE:

10/07/12 16:58:12 31TE0630_329

Driving with varying tire or wheelsizes may cause the VSA tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are of the same sizeand type as your original tires (seepage ).

VSA is turned on every time youstart the engine, even if you turned itoff the last time you drove thevehicle.

If you install winter tires, make surethey are the same size as those thatwere originally supplied with yourvehicle. Exercise the same cautionduring winter driving as you would ifyour vehicle was not equipped withVSA.

In certain unusual conditions whenyour vehicle gets stuck in shallowmud or fresh snow, it may be easierto free it with the VSA temporarilyswitched off. When the VSA systemis off, the traction control system isalso off. You should only attempt tofree your vehicle with the VSA off ifyou are not able to free it when theVSA is on.

Immediately after freeing yourvehicle, be sure to switch the VSA onagain. We do not recommend drivingyour vehicle with the VSA andtraction control systems switched off.

This switch is under the driver’s sidevent. To turn the VSA system on andoff, press and hold it until you hear abeep.

When VSA is off, the VSA OFFindicator comes on as a reminder.Press and hold the switch again. Itturns the system back on.

385

VSA and Tire SizesVSA OFF Switch

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

Driving

325

VSA OFF SWITCH

10/07/12 16:58:23 31TE0630_330

Your vehicle is equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that turns on every time you start theengine and monitors the pressure inyour tires while driving.

When the low tire pressure indicatoris on, one or more of your tires issignificantly underinflated. Youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure as indicated onthe vehicle’s tire information placard.

If you think you can safely drive ashort distance to a service station,proceed slowly, and inflate the tire tothe recommended pressure shownon the driver’s doorjamb.

If the tire is flat, or if the tirepressure is too low to continuedriving, replace the tire with thecompact spare tire (see page ).

If you cannot make the low tirepressure indicator go out afterinflating the tires to the specifiedvalues, have your dealer check thesystem as soon as possible.

Each tire has its own pressuresensor (not including the spare tire).If the air pressure of a tire becomessignificantly low while driving, thesensor in that tire immediately sendsa signal that causes the low tirepressure indicator to come on.

Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Underinflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Because tire pressure varies bytemperature and other conditions,the low tire pressure indicator maycome on unexpectedly.

393

Low Tire PressureIndicator

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

326

10/07/12 16:58:34 31TE0630_331

For example, if you check and fillyour tires in a warm area, then drivein extremely cold weather, the tirepressure will be lower thanmeasured and could be underinflatedand cause the low tire pressureindicator to come on. Or, if youcheck and adjust your tire pressurein cooler conditions, and drive intoextremely hot conditions, the tiremay become overinflated. However,the low tire pressure indicator willnot come on if the tires areoverinflated.

Refer to page for tire inflationguidelines.

When you restart the vehicle withthe compact spare tire, the TPMSindicator may also come on and stayon after driving several miles(kilometers).

Although your tire pressure ismonitored, you must manually checkthe tire pressures monthly.

Each tire, including the spare, shouldbe checked monthly when cold, andset to the recommended inflationpressure as specified on the tire

information label and in the owner’smanual (see page ).

This indicator comes on and stays onif there is a problem with the tirepressure monitoring system.

If this happens, the system will shutoff and no longer monitor tirepressures. Have the system checkedby your dealer as soon as possible.

If the low tire pressure indicator orTPMS indicator comes on, the VSAsystem automatically turns on even ifthe VSA system is turned off bypressing the VSA OFF switch (seepage ). If this happens, youcannot turn the VSA system off bypressing the VSA OFF switch again.

379

325

380

Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator


Driving

327

10/07/12 16:58:45 31TE0630_332




If you have a flat tire, the low tirepressure indicator will come on.Replace the flat tire with thecompact spare tire (see page ).

Each wheel (except the compactspare tire wheel) is equipped with atire pressure sensor. You must useTPMS specific wheels. It isrecommended that you always haveyour tires serviced by your dealer orqualified technician.

The low tire pressure indicator orthe TPMS indicator will go off, afterseveral miles (kilometers) driving,when you replace the spare tire withthe specified regular tire equippedwith the tire pressure monitor sensor.

Never use a puncture-repairing agentin a flat tire. If used, you will have toreplace the tire pressure sensor.Have the flat tire repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible.

After you replace the flat tire withthe compact spare tire, the low tirepressure indicator stays on. This isnormal; the system is not monitoringthe spare tire pressure. Manuallycheck the spare tire pressure to besure it is correct. After several miles(kilometers) driving with thecompact spare tire, the TPMSindicator comes on and the low tirepressure indicator goes off.

393

Changing a Tire with TPMS


328

10/07/12 16:58:55 31TE0630_333

Your vehicle has been designedprimarily to carry passengers andtheir cargo. You can also use it totow a trailer if you carefully observethe load limits, use the properequipment, and follow the guidelinesin this section.

Themaximum allowable weight of thetrailer and everything in or on itmust not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg).Towing a load that is too heavycan seriously affect your vehicle’shandling and performance. It canalso damage the engine anddrivetrain.

The weight thatthe tongue of a fully-loaded trailerputs on the hitch should beapproximately 10% of the totaltrailer weight. Too much tongueload reduces front-tire traction andsteering control. Too little tongueload can make the trailer unstableand cause it to sway.

Avoid towing a trailer during yourvehicle’s first 600 miles (1,000 km)(see page ).284

CONTINUED

Load Limits

Total Trailer Weight: Tongue Load:

Towing a Trailer

Break-In Period

Driving

329

Exceeding any load limit orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriously hurtor killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

10/07/12 16:59:07 31TE0630_334

To achieve a proper tongue load,start by loading 60% of the loadtoward the front of the trailer and40% toward the rear, then re-adjustthe load as needed.

The maximum allowable weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, allaccessories, all cargo, and thetongue load is:

EX and EX-L:

EX and EX-L:

V6 models with manual transmission:

V6 models with automatictransmission:



LX:

LX:

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR):

Canadian models

U.S. models

Towing a Trailer

330

4,299 lbs (1,950 kg)

4,409 lbs (2,000 kg)

4,541 lbs (2,060 kg)

4,475 lbs (2,030 kg)

1,970 kg

2,020 kg

2,075 kg

2,040 kg

10/07/12 16:59:15 31TE0630_335

The maximum allowable weight atthe vehicle axles is:

on the front axle

on the rear axle

on the front axle

on the rear axle

on the front axle

on the rear axle

on the front axle

on the rear axle

on the rear axle

on the front axle

on the rear axle

on the front axle

on the rear axle

on the front axle

on the rear axle

on the front axle

EX and EX-L:

EX and EX-L:





LX:

LX:

Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR):

Canadian models

U.S. models

Towing a Trailer

Driving

331

2,006 lbs (910 kg)

2,337 lbs (1,060 kg)

2,414 lbs (1,095 kg)

2,039 lbs (925 kg)

910 kg

930 kg

950 kg

2,050 lbs (930 kg)

2,535 lbs (1,150 kg)

2,050 lbs (930 kg)

2,425 lbs (1,100 kg)

950 kg

1,065 kg

1,095 kg

1,160 kg

1,110 kg

10/07/12 16:59:24 31TE0630_336

Discuss your needs with your trailersales or rental agency, and follow theguidelines in this section. Also makesure that all equipment is properlyinstalled and maintained, and that itmeets federal, state, province,territory, and local regulations.

Towing can require a variety ofequipment, depending on the size ofyour trailer, how it will be used, howmuch load you are towing, andwhere you tow.

The best way to confirm that allloads are within limits is to checkthem at a public scale. For publicscales in your area, check your localphone book, or contact your trailerdealer or rental agency forassistance.

If you cannot get to a public scale,you can estimate the total trailerweight by adding the weight of yourtrailer (as quoted by themanufacturer) with everything in oron the trailer.

If you normally pull the same loadeach time you tow a trailer, you canuse a suitable scale or a specialtongue load gauge to check thetongue load the first time you set upa towing combination (a fully loadedvehicle and trailer), then recheck thetongue load whenever the conditionschange.

Always use safety chains when youtow a trailer. Make sure the chainsare secured to the trailer and hitch,and that they cross under the tongueand can catch the trailer if itbecomes unhitched. Leave enoughslack to allow the trailer to turncorners easily, but do not let thechains drag on the ground.

Any hitch used on your vehicle mustbe properly bolted to the underbody.

Towing a Trailer

Towing Equipment andAccessories

Checking Loads

Safety Chains

Hitches

332

10/07/12 16:59:35 31TE0630_337

There are two common types oftrailer brakes: surge and electric.Surge brakes are common for boattrailers, since the brakes will get wet.

If you choose electric brakes, besure they are electronically actuated.Do not attempt to tap into yourvehicle’s hydraulic system. Nomatter how successful it may seem,any attempt to attach trailer brakesto your vehicle’s hydraulic systemwill lower braking effectiveness andcreate a potential hazard.

See your trailer dealer or rentalagency for more information oninstalling electric brakes.

Many states and Canadianprovinces/territories require specialoutside mirrors when towing a trailer.Even if they don’t, you should installspecial mirrors if you cannot clearlysee behind you, or if the trailercreates a blind spot.

Trailer lights and equipment mustcomply with federal, state, province,territory, and local regulations.Check with your local trailer sales orrental agencies for the requirementsin the area where you plan to tow,and use only equipment designed foryour vehicle.

Since lighting and wiring vary bytrailer type and brand, you shouldhave a qualified technician install asuitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer. Improperequipment or installation can causedamage to your vehicle’s electricalsystem and affect your vehiclewarranty.

Ask your trailer sales or rentalagency if any other items arerecommended or required for yourtowing situation.

Towing a Trailer

Trailer Brakes Additional Towing EquipmentTrailer LightsD

riving

333

10/07/12 16:59:46 31TE0630_338

The added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle’s handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.

The lights and brakes on yourvehicle and the trailer are workingproperly.

Your vehicle tires and spare areproperly inflated, and the trailertires and spare are inflated asrecommended by the trailermaker.

When preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the suspension andthe cooling system are in goodoperating condition.

The trailer has been properlyserviced and is in good condition.

All weights and loads are withinlimits.

The hitch, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.

All items in or on the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesin this section.

Towing a Trailer

Driving Safely With a TrailerPre-Tow Checklist

334

10/07/12 16:59:59 31TE0630_339

CONTINUED

If the automatic transmission fluidtemperature increases and exceedsthe specified limit, the transmissionwill also automatically downshift tothe first gear even with theSequential Sportshift Mode. Thisprevents the automatic transmissionfrom overheating. In this case, thegear position ‘‘1’’ next to the ‘‘M’’indicator in the instrument panelblinks for about five seconds, then itstays on.

When driving uphill and downhill,use the S position (without using thepaddle shifters) to provide theproper engine power and enginebraking on each gear. You can alsouse the paddle shifters. In this case,select third, second, or first gearwith the paddle shifter; depending onthe vehicle speeds and roadcondition. Do not use fourth and fifthgears.

Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses. Allow more time anddistance for braking. Do not brake orturn suddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

Drive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.

Do not exceed the limited speedwhen towing a trailer. At higherspeeds, the trailer may sway oraffect vehicle handling (see ‘‘

’’ in the next page foradditional gear information).

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, use the D positionwhen towing a trailer on level roads.

D3 is the proper shift lever positionto use when towing a trailer in hillyterrain.


4-cylinder models with automatictransmission

Towing a Trailer

Towing Speeds and Gears

Making Turns and Braking

Drivingon Hills

Driving

335

10/07/12 17:00:10 31TE0630_340

When climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red (Hot) mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed and always apply enginebraking by shifting down. If yourvehicle has a manual transmission,when going down a steep hill, usethe second gear to provide greaterengine braking.

Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, andremember, it will take longer to slowdown and stop when towing a trailer.

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the automatictransmission to overheat.

Crosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause the trailer tosway. When being passed by a largevehicle, keep a constant speed, andsteer straight ahead. Do not try tomake quick steering or brakingcorrections.

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed and use the S mode. Youcan also use the paddle shifters tochange the gear position. Select third,second or first gear depending onthe vehicle speeds and roadcondition. When going down a steephill, use second gear to providegreater engine braking. Shift downto first gear when driving up steephills.

If the automatic transmission shiftsfrequently while going up a hill, shiftto D3.

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed and shift down to thesecond gear.


4-cylinder models with automatictransmission

Driving on Hills

Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

Towing a Trailer

336

10/07/12 17:00:20 31TE0630_341

Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the of the steering wheel,then turn the wheel to the left to getthe trailer to move to the left, andturn the wheel right to move thetrailer to the right.

Follow all normal precautions whenparking, including firmly setting theparking brake and putting thetransmission in Park (automatic) orin first or reverse (manual). Also,place wheel chocks at each of thetrailer’s tires.

Your vehicle is not designed to betowed behind a motor home. If yourvehicle needs to be towed in anemergency, see page .415

bottom

Backing Up

Parking

Towing Your Vehicle

Towing a Trailer

Driving

337

10/07/12 17:00:28 31TE0630_342

338

10/07/12 17:00:30 31TE0630_343

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your vehicle wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

This section also includesinstructions on how to read theMaintenance Minder messages onthe information display, andinstructions for simple maintenancetasks you may want to take care ofyourself.

If you have the skills and tools toperform more complex maintenancetasks on your vehicle, you may wantto purchase the service manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your dealer.

......................Maintenance Safety . 340.................Maintenance Minder . 341

..............................Fluid Locations . 348........................Adding Engine Oil . 350

Changing the Engine Oil and...........................................Filter . 352

..............................Engine Coolant . 354....................Windshield Washers . 356

.......................Transmission Fluid . 357..........Automatic Transmission . 357

..............Manual Transmission . 359................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 362

....................Power Steering Fluid . 363....................................Timing Belt . 364

.............................................Lights . 365................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 374

.....................................Floor Mats . 375..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 375

.................................Wiper Blades . 376...............................................Tires . 379

...................Checking the Battery . 387.............................Vehicle Storage . 388

..................................Interior Care . 389

U.S. Vehicles:

439

Maintenance

Maintenance, replacement, orrepair of emissions controldevices and systems may be doneby any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are ‘‘certif ied’’ to EPAstandards.

Maintenance

339

TM

10/07/12 17:00:38 31TE0630_344

To eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.

To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not gasoline.

Donot run the engine unlessinstructed to do so.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.

Wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingwith the battery or compressed air.

All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by acertified technician or qualifiedmechanic.

Let theengine and exhaust system cooldown before touching any parts.

Be sure there isadequate ventilation whenever youoperate the engine.

Maintenance Safety

Important Safety Precautions

Injury from moving parts.

Burns from hot parts.

Carbon Monoxide poison fromengine exhaust.

Potential Vehicle Hazards

340

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle, or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner’smanual.

10/07/12 17:00:51 31TE0630_345

－－－－－－－－－－－－

CONTINUED

Calculated EngineOil Life (%)100% 91%90% 81%80% 71%70% 61%60% 51%50% 41%40% 31%30% 21%20% 16%15% 11%10% 6%5% 1%

0%

DisplayedEngine Oil Life (%)

100%90%80%70%60%50%40%30%20%15%10%5%0%

Your vehicle displays engine oil lifeand maintenance service items onthe information display to show youwhen you should have your dealer doengine oil replacement and indicatedmaintenance service.

Based on the engine operatingconditions, the onboard computer inyour vehicle calculates the remainingengine oil life and displays it as apercentage.

To see the current engine oil life,turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, then press and releasethe select/reset knob repeatedlyuntil the engine oil life indicatorappears (see page ).

The remaining engine oil life isshown on the display according tothis table:

64

Maintenance Minder

Engine Oil Life DisplayM

aintenance

341

ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR

SELECT/RESET KNOB

U.S. V6 model is shown.

TM

10/07/12 17:01:02 31TE0630_346

If the remaining engine oil life is 15to 6 percent, you will see the engineoil life indicator every time you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position. The Maintenance Minderindicator will also come on, and themaintenance item code(s) for otherscheduled maintenance itemsneeding service will be displayednext to the engine oil life indicator.

The 15 and 10 percent oil lifeindicators remind you that yourvehicle will soon be due forscheduled maintenance.

When the remaining engine oil life is5 to 1 percent, you will see a‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with thesame maintenance item code(s),every time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

Maintenance Minder

342

MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR

ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR


MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE(S)

TM

10/07/12 17:01:11 31TE0630_347

CONTINUED

The maintenance item code or codesindicate the main and sub itemsrequired at the time of the oil change(see page ).

You can switch the informationdisplay from the engine oil lifedisplay to the odometer or the tripmeter. Press and release the select/reset knob on the instrument panel.

When the engine oil life is 15 to 1percent, the Maintenance Minderindicator ( ) comes on everytime you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, then it goes outif you switch the information display.

When you see this message, havethe indicated maintenanceperformed by your dealer as soon aspossible.

When the remaining engine oil life is0 percent, the engine oil life indicatorwill blink. The display comes onevery time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. TheMaintenance Minder indicator( ) also comes on and remainson in the instrument panel. Whenyou see this message, immediatelyhave the indicated maintenance doneby your dealer.

If you do not perform the indicatedmaintenance, negative distancetraveled is displayed and begins toblink after the vehicle has beendriven 10 miles (10 km) or more.

Negative distance traveled meansyour vehicle has passed themaintenance required point.Immediately have the indicatedmaintenance done by your dealer.

347

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance

343

NEGATIVE DISTANCE TRAVELED

TM

10/07/12 17:01:24 31TE0630_348

Your dealer will reset the displayafter completing the requiredmaintenance service. You will see‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the informationdisplay the next time you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If maintenance service is done bysomeone other than your dealer,reset the Maintenance Minder asfollows:


Press the select/reset knobrepeatedly until the engine oil lifeindicator is displayed.

To change the information displayfrom the engine oil life display to theodometer or the trip meter, pressand release the select/reset knob.

When the engine oil life is 0 percentor negative distance traveled, theMaintenance Minder indicator( ) remains on even if youchange the information display.

Immediately have the serviceperformed, and make sure to resetthe display as described as follows.

All maintenance items displayed onthe information display are in code.For an explanation of thesemaintenance codes, see page .

1.

2.347

Maintenance Minder

Resetting the Engine Oil LifeDisplay

Maintenance Main Items and SubItems

344

MAINTENANCEMINDER INDICATOR

MAINTENANCEMAIN ITEM

MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM(S)

ENGINEOIL LIFE


TM

10/07/12 17:01:37 31TE0630_349

CONTINUED

If you have the required servicedone but do not reset the display, orreset the display without doing theservice, the system will not show thecorrect maintenance intervals. Thiscan lead to serious mechanicalproblems because you will no longerhave an accurate record of whenmaintenance is needed.

Your authorized Honda dealerknows your vehicle best and canprovide competent, efficient service.

Press the select/reset knob forabout 10 seconds. The engine oillife and the maintenance itemcode(s) will blink.

Press the select/reset knob foranother 5 seconds. Themaintenance item code(s) willdisappear, and the engine oil lifewill reset to ‘‘100.’’

4.3.

Maintenance Minder

Important MaintenancePrecautions

Maintenance

345

TM

10/07/12 17:01:46 31TE0630_350

＃

－

－

－

－

－

－

U.S. Vehicles:However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Make sure tohave the service facility or personreset the display as previouslydescribed. Keep all receipts as proofof completion, and have the personwho does the work fill out yourHonda Service History or CanadianMaintenance Log. Check yourwarranty booklet for moreinformation.

We recommend using Honda partsand fluids whenever you havemaintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same highquality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, allmaintenance services should beperformed in accordance with theintervals indicated by theinformation display.

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the appropriatepage listed.

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,and license plate lights monthly.See page .

290

291

357

362

379

365

Maintenance Minder

Owner’s Maintenance Checks

346

TM

10/07/12 17:01:59 31TE0630_351

－－

＊

＊

＃

＃

＊

＃

Maintenance Minder

347

Maintenance Sub Items

Rotate tires

Replace air cleaner element

Replace dust and pollen filter

Inspect drive belt

Replace transmission fluid

Replace spark plugs

Replace timing belt and inspect water pump

(V6 engine only)

Inspect valve clearance

Replace engine coolant

Maintenance Main Items

Replace engine oil

Replace engine oil and oil filter

Inspect front and rear brakes

Check parking brake adjustment

Inspect these items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots

Suspension components

Driveshaft boots

Brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA)

All fluid levels and condition of fluids

Exhaust system

Fuel lines and connections

A

B

Symbol

1

2

3

4

5

Symbol1

1

:

Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).

If the message ‘‘SERVICE’’ does not appear more than 12 months after thedisplay is reset, change the engine oil every year.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the centercolumn on page .

Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.

Independent of the Maintenance Minder information, replace the brakefluid every 3 years.

NOTE:

1 :

346

TM

If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000miles (24,000 km).

If you drive primarily in urban areas that have highconcentrations of soot in the air from industry and fromdiesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles(24,000 km).

If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over110°F, 43°C), or in very low temperatures (under 20°F,

29°C), replace every 60,000 miles (U.S.)/100,000 km(Canada).

Main

tenance

Min

der

10/07/12 17:02:09 31TE0630_352

Fluid Locations

4-cylinder models

348

ENGINE COOLANTRESERVOIR

BRAKE FLUID(Black cap)

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange handle)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

CLUTCH FLUID(ManualTransmission only)(Light gray cap)

POWER STEERINGFLUID(Red cap)

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

ENGINE OILFILL CAP

RADIATOR CAP

10/07/12 17:02:14 31TE0630_353

Fluid Locations

V6 modelsM

aintenance

349

ENGINE COOLANTRESERVOIR

RADIATOR CAP

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange loop)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

BRAKE FLUID(Black cap)

CLUTCH FLUID(ManualTransmission only)(Light gray cap)

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

POWER STEERINGFLUID(Red cap)

10/07/12 17:02:20 31TE0630_354

Unscrew and remove the engine oilfill cap on top of the valve cover.Pour in the oil slowly and carefully soyou do not spill any. Clean up anyspills immediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, andtighten it securely. Wait a fewminutes, and recheck the oil level onthe engine oil dipstick. Do not fillabove the upper mark; you coulddamage the engine.

Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade 0W-20detergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements.

Recommended Engine Oil

Adding Engine Oil

350

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

V6 models4-cylinder models

10/07/12 17:02:29 31TE0630_355

Your vehicle does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect the engine or transmissionperformance and durability.

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API Certification Seal,and it is the proper weight. You mustfollow the oil and filter changeintervals shown on the informationdisplay.

Honda Motor Oil is the preferred0W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda Motor Oil in your vehicle foroptimum engine protection. Makesure the API Certification Seal says‘‘For Gasoline Engines’’.

The oil viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.0W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your vehicle toimprove cold weather starting andfuel economy.

Synthetic Oil

Engine Oil Additives

Adding Engine Oil

Maintenance

351

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

Ambient Temperature

10/07/12 17:02:40 31TE0630_356

Remove the oil filter and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourdealer) is required.

Open the hood, and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the maintenancemessages shown on the informationdisplay. The oil and filter collectcontaminants that can damage yourengine if they are not removedregularly.

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Make sure the oil filter gasket isnot stuck to the contacting surfaceof the engine. If it is, remove itbefore installing a new oil filter.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledtechnician.

3.2.

1.

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

352

OIL DRAIN BOLT

WASHER

OIL DRAIN BOLT

WASHER


10/07/12 17:02:50 31TE0630_357

Install a new oil filter according tothe instructions that come with it.

Refill the engine with the recom-mended oil.

Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Turn off the engine, let it sit forseveral minutes, then check the oillevel on the dipstick. If necessary,add more oil.

Make sure to clean off any dirtand dust on the contacting surfaceof a new oil filter.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten the drain bolt to:

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator should go out within 5seconds. If it does not, turn off theengine, and check your work.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

V6 models

4-cylinder models

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

Maintenance

353

OIL FILTER OIL FILTER


4.2 US qt (4.0 )

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)4.5 US qt (4.3 )

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

10/07/12 17:03:02 31TE0630_358

－－

Always use Honda Long-life Anti-freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolantis pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent distilledwater. Never add straight antifreezeor plain water.

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is notavailable, you may use anothermajor-brand non-silicate coolant as atemporary replacement. Make sure itis a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.Continued use of any non-Hondacoolant can result in corrosion,causing the cooling system tomalfunction or fail. Have the coolingsystem flushed and refilled withHonda antifreeze/coolant as soon aspossible.

4-cylinder models only

Adding Engine Coolant

Engine Coolant

354

RESERVE TANK RESERVE TANKV6 models4-cylinder models

If you regularly drive your vehicleunder severe conditions in very lowtemperature (under 31°F, 35°C), ahigher concentration of coolant shouldbe used. Consult your Honda dealerf or more inf ormation on the propercoolant.

10/07/12 17:03:11 31TE0630_359

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill any.Clean up any spill immediately; itcould damage components in theengine compartment.

Put the radiator cap back on, andtighten it fully.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing it down and turning itcounterclockwise.

Relieve any pressure in the coolingsystem by turning the radiator capcounterclockwise, withoutpressing down.

Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.

4.1.

2.

3.5.

6.

Engine Coolant

Maintenance

355

RADIATOR CAP

RADIATOR CAP


Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

10/07/12 17:03:24 31TE0630_360

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition the blade edges.

Check the level in the windshieldwasher reservoir at least monthlyduring normal use.

Check the fluid level by removingthe cap and looking at the levelgauge.

The low washerlevel indicator comes on when thelevel is low (see page ).60

On Canadian models:

Windshield Washers

356

LEVEL GAUGELEVEL GAUGE


Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir. Antif reezecan damage your vehicle’s paint, whilea vinegar/water solution can damagethe windshield washer pump. Use onlycommercially-available windshieldwasher f luid.

10/07/12 17:03:35 31TE0630_361

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Start the engine, let it run until theradiator fan comes on, then shutoff the engine. For accurateresults, wait about 60 seconds (butno longer than 90 seconds) beforedoing step 2.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

1.

2. 3.

CONTINUED


Transmission Fluid

Maintenance

357

DIPSTICK

V6 models4-cylinder models 4-cylinder models

DIPSTICK

UPPERMARK

LOWERMARK

10/07/12 17:03:46 31TE0630_362

Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill any. Clean upany spill immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the dipstickhole to bring it to the levelbetween the upper and lowermarks.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the Maintenance Minder (seepage ).

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your dealer.

Always use Honda ATF DW-1(automatic transmission fluid).

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

5.

4.6.

341

Transmission Fluid

358

V6 models

LOWERMARK

UPPERMARK

TM

Use only Honda ATF DW-1 (automatictransmission f luid). Do not mix withother transmission f luids.Using transmission f luid other thanHonda ATF DW-1 may causedeterioration in transmission operationand durability, and could result indamage to the transmission.Damage resulting f rom the use oftransmission f luid other than HondaATF DW-1 is not covered by the Hondanew vehicle warranty.

10/07/12 17:03:55 31TE0630_363

Check the fluid level with thetransmission at normal operatingtemperature and the vehicle sittingon level ground.

Reinstall the under cover and put theholding clips back in place. Makesure the under cover is installedunder the edge of the front bumper.

If Honda MTF is not available, youmay use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40viscosity motor oil with the APICertification Seal that says ‘‘FORGASOLINE ENGINES’’ as atemporary replacement. However,motor oil does not contain the properadditives, and continued use cancause stiffer shifting. Replace assoon as it is convenient.


If you are not sure how to check andadd fluid, contact your dealer.

Remove the transmission filler bolt,and carefully feel inside the bolt holewith your finger.

The fluid level should be up to theedge of the bolt hole. If it is not, addHonda Manual Transmission Fluid(MTF) until it starts to run out of thehole. Reinstall the filler bolt, andtighten it securely.

To check the transmission fluid level,remove the under cover holding clipswith a flat-tip screwdriver, thenremove the under cover carefully.

341

CONTINUED

4-cylinder models

Transmission Fluid

Manual TransmissionM

aintenance

359

Correct level

FILLER BOLT

TM

10/07/12 17:04:09 31TE0630_364

Remove the check bolt and look fortransmission fluid coming out of thebolt hole. If a small amount of fluiddrips out of the bolt hole, reinstallthe check bolt.

Check the fluid level with thetransmission at normal operatingtemperature and the vehicle sittingon level ground.

If no fluid comes out, remove thefiller bolt and washer. Slowly addHonda Manual Transmission Fluid(MTF) until it starts to run out of thecheck bolt hole.

V6 models

Transmission Fluid

360

FILLER BOLT

WASHERCHECK BOLTDRAIN BOLT

10/07/12 17:04:15 31TE0630_365

Pour the fluid into the filler holeslowly and carefully so you do notspill any. Clean up any spillsimmediately; it could damagecomponents in the enginecompartment.

If Honda MTF is not available, youmay use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40viscosity motor oil with the APICertification Seal that says ‘‘FORGASOLINE ENGINES’’ as atemporary replacement. However,motor oil does not contain the properadditives, and continued use cancause stiffer shifting. Replace assoon as it is convenient.


If you are not sure how to check andadd fluid, contact your dealer.

Let the fluid run out until it stops,then reinstall the check bolt and thefiller bolt.Make sure to put a new washer oneach bolt when reinstalling it.

Reinstall the under cover and put theholding clips back in place. Makesure the under cover is installedunder the edge of the front bumper.

347

Transmission Fluid

Maintenance

361

TM

10/07/12 17:04:23 31TE0630_366

Check the fluid level in thereservoirs monthly. There are up totwo reservoirs, depending on themodel. They are:

Brake fluid reservoir (all models)Clutch fluid reservoir(manual transmission only)

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid cancause corrosion and decrease the lifeof the system. Have the brakesystem flushed and refilled withHonda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 as soon as possible.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Independent of the MaintenanceMinder information, replace thebrake fluid every 3 years.

Brake and Clutch Fluid

Brake Fluid

362

MAX

MIN

10/07/12 17:04:33 31TE0630_367

Check the level on the side of thereservoir when the engine is cold.The fluid should be between theUPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.If not, add power steering fluid to theUPPER LEVEL.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If it is not, addbrake fluid to bring it up to that level.Use the same fluid specified for thebrake system.

A low fluid level can indicate a leakin the clutch system. Have thissystem inspected as soon as possible.

CONTINUED

Manual transmission onlyPower Steering FluidClutch Fluid

Brake and Clutch Fluid, Power Steering Fluid

Maintenance

363

MAX

4-cylinder modelsMIN

UPPER LEVEL

LOWER LEVEL

10/07/12 17:04:42 31TE0630_368

－－

The timing belt should be replacedaccording to the MaintenanceMinder (see page ).

Replace the timing belt every 60,000miles (100,000 km) if you regularlydrive your vehicle in any of thefollowing conditions:

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. You may use another powersteering fluid as an emergencyreplacement, but have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently, and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill any. Clean upany spills immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

In very high temperatures(over 110°F, 43°C).In very low temperatures(under 20°F, 29°C).If you frequently tow a trailer.

341

V6 modelsTiming Belt

Power Steering Fluid, Timing Belt

364

UPPER LEVEL

V6 models LOWER LEVEL

TM

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

10/07/13 17:38:16 31TE0630_369

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thetrunk or pull a trailer, readjustmentmay be required. Adjustmentsshould be done by your dealer oranother qualified technician.

Your vehicle has halogen headlightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its base, and protect the glassfrom contact with your skin or hardobjects. If you touch the glass, cleanit with denatured alcohol and a cleancloth.

Open the hood.

To change a bulb on thepassenger’s side, remove theengine coolant reserve tank bypulling it out of its stay.

1.

CONTINUED

Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb

Lights

High Beam HeadlightM

aintenance

365

STAY4-cylinder models

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.

10/07/12 17:05:05 31TE0630_370

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pushing on thetab to unlock it, then slide theconnector off the bulb.

Remove the bulb by turning itapproximately one-quarter turncounterclockwise.

To change a bulb on the driver’s side,undo the fastener and remove the airintake cover by pushing the tab.Then remove the duct.

3.

2.On V6 models

Lights

366

FASTENER AIR INTAKE COVER BULB

TABDUCTV6 models STAY V6 models

10/07/12 17:05:14 31TE0630_371

To change the passenger’s sidebulb, start the engine, turn thesteering wheel all the way to theleft, and turn off the engine. Tochange the driver’s side bulb, turnthe steering wheel to the right.

Install the new bulb, and turn itone-quarter turn clockwise to lockit in place.

Push the electrical connector ontothe bulb.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

Reinstall the engine coolantreserve tank.


Remove the bulb by turning itapproximately one-quarter turncounterclockwise.

Pull the inner fender cover awayfrom the fender and bumper.

Use a flat-tip screwdriver toremove the two holding clips fromthe inner fender.

Reinstall the air intake cover andduct securely. Reinstall thefastener and secure it by pushingon the head until it locks.

6.

5.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.

7.

4.

CONTINUED

Passenger’s side

Driver’s side on V6 models

Low Beam Headlight

Lights

Maintenance

367

HOLDING CLIPS BULB

TAB

10/07/12 17:05:27 31TE0630_372

Install the new bulb, and turn itone-quarter turn clockwise to lockit in place.

Push the electrical connector ontothe bulb.

Put the inner fender cover in place.Install the two holding clips. Lockeach one in place by pushing onthe center.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

Open the hood.

To change the turn signal bulb onthe passenger’s side, remove theengine coolant reserve tank bypulling it out of its stay.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

To remove the burned out bulb,push it in and turn itcounterclockwise until it unlocks.

Remove the air intake duct (seepage ).

1. 2.

8.

7.

6.

9.

3.

366


Lights

Replacing a Front Turn Signal/Parking Light Bulb

368

BULBV6 model is shown. STAY

10/07/12 17:05:41 31TE0630_373

Install the new bulb and turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

Reinstall the coolant reserve tank.

To change the bulb on the driver’sside, start the engine, turn thesteering wheel all the way to theright, then turn off the engine. Tochange the bulb on the passenger’sside, turn the steering wheel to theleft.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Use a flat-tip screwdriver toremove the two holding clips fromthe inner fender.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the burned out bulb straightout of its socket.Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

Reinstall the air intake cover andduct securely. Reinstall thefastener and secure it by pushingon the head until it locks.

6.

1.

7.

5.

4.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Passenger’s side


Lights

Replacing a Front Side MarkerLight Bulb

Maintenance

369

HOLDING CLIPSBULB

10/07/12 17:05:55 31TE0630_374

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.


Reinstall the inner fender cover.Then reinstall the holding clips,and lock them in place by pushingon their centers.

Open the trunk.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Insert the socket back into thelight assembly. Turn it clockwiseto lock it in place.

Remove the screws in the centerof each of the two fasteners on theside of the trunk lining. Pull thelining back.

Determine which of the threebulbs is burned out: stop/taillight,back-up light or turn signal light.

5.

6.

7.

2.

1.

4.

3.

5.

Lights

Replacing Rear Bulbs

370

SCREW

SOCKETBULB

10/07/12 17:06:08 31TE0630_375


Push the trunk lid trim back intoposition.

Open the trunk, and remove thesocket from the light assembly byturning it one-quarter turn counter-clockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

Reinstall the socket. Turn itclockwise until it locks. Make surethe new bulb is working.

Put the fasteners into the holes onthe side of the trunk lining.Reinstall the screws.

2.

1.

3.6.

7.

8.

Lights

Replacing the High-mount BrakeLight Bulb

Maintenance

371

SOCKET

BULB

10/07/12 17:06:19 31TE0630_376

If equipped

Passenger’s side

Your vehicle uses halogen lightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its plastic case, and protect theglass from contact with your skin orhard objects. If you touch the glass,clean it with denatured alcohol and aclean cloth.

The fog lights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thetrunk or pull a trailer, readjustmentmay be required. Adjustment shouldbe done by your dealer or anotherqualified technician.

Pull down the under cover fromthe bumper carefully.


Remove the bulb by turning itabout one-quarter turncounterclockwise.

Remove the three holding clipswith a flat-tip screwdriver.

1. 2.

3.

Replacing a Fog Light Bulb

Lights

372

ELECTRICALCONNECTOR TABHOLDING CLIPS

Halogen light bulbs get very hot whenlit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch onthe glass can cause the bulb to overheatand shatter.

10/07/12 17:06:31 31TE0630_377

To change the bulb, start theengine, turn the steering wheel allthe way to the right, then turn offthe engine.

Use a flat-tip screwdriver toremove the two holding clips fromthe inner fender, and pull the innerfender cover back.

Insert the new bulb into the hole,and turn it one-quarter turnclockwise to lock it in place.

Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

Reinstall the inner fender. Makesure it is installed under the edgeof the front bumper.

Reinstall the holding clips, andpush in the head of each clip.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pushing on thetab and pulling the connectordown.

Remove the bulb from the foglight assembly by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Turn on the fog lights to test thenew bulb.

Reinstall the under cover and putthe holding clips back in place.6.

7.

8.

4.

5.

9.

10.

11. Passenger’s side

Driver’s side

Driver’s side

Lights

Maintenance

373

ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR

TAB

HOLDING CLIPS

10/07/12 17:06:45 31TE0630_378

Dirt build-up around the openings ofthe seat belt anchors can cause thebelts to retract slowly. Wipe theopenings with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

If your seat belts get dirty, use a softbrush with a mixture of mild soapand warm water to clean them. Donot use bleach, dye, or cleaningsolvents. Let the belts air dry beforeyou use the vehicle.

The license plate has two lightsabove it. The bulbs should bereplaced by your dealer.

Cleaning the Seat BeltsRear License Plate Light Bulbs

Lights, Cleaning the Seat Belts

374

OPENING

10/07/12 17:06:53 31TE0630_379

This filter removes the dust andpollen that is brought in from theoutside through the heating andcooling system/climate controlsystem.

Have your dealer replace this filterwhen this service is indicated by amaintenance message on theinformation display. It should bereplaced every 15,000 miles (24,000km) if you drive primarily in urbanareas that have high concentrationsof soot in the air, or if the airflowfrom the heating and coolingsystem/climate control systembecomes less than usual.

If you remove a floor mat, make sureto re-anchor it when you put it backin your vehicle.

If you use a non-Honda floor mat,make sure it fits properly and that itcan be used with the floor matanchors. Do not put additional floormats on top of the anchored mat.

The driver’s and right rearpassenger’s floor mats that camewith your vehicle hook over the floormat anchors. This keeps the floormats from sliding forward andpossibly interfering with the pedals(driver’s floor mat) or with the seatweight sensors (right rear floor mat).

Floor Mats, Dust and Pollen Filter

Dust and Pollen FilterFloor MatsM

aintenance

375

REAR (Right passenger’s side)FRONT (Driver’s side)

10/07/12 17:07:04 31TE0630_380

To replace a wiper blade:

Raise the wiper arm off thewindshield. Raise the driver’s sidefirst, then the passenger’s side.

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every six months.Replace them if you find signs ofcracking in the rubber, areas that aregetting hard, or if they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm:

Put a cloth on the edge of the locktab to prevent scratches, thenpush up on the lock tab carefullywith a flat-tip screwdriver.

2.

1.

Wiper Blades

376

WIPER ARMS LOCK TAB

Do not open the hood when the wiperarms are raised, or you will damage thehood and wiper arms.

10/07/12 17:07:13 31TE0630_381

Pivot the blade assembly towardthe wiper arm until it releasesfrom the wiper arm.

When replacing a wiper blade,make sure not to drop the wiperblade or wiper arm down on thewindshield.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

Remove the blade from its holderby grabbing the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

Make sure the two rubber tabsinside the blade fit to each notch ofthe reinforcement, as shown.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Wiper Blades

Maintenance

377

WIPER ARM BLADE

TOP

BLADE

REINFORCEMENT

10/07/12 17:07:24 31TE0630_382

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Push downthe lock tab. Make sure the wiperblade assembly locks in place.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield, the passenger’sside first, then the driver’s side.

Place the top of the wiper blade onthe end of the blade assembly, andslide the blade onto the assemblyuntil the tabs are fitted onto thewiper blade.

Make sure the blade is completelyinstalled.

5.

6.

7.

Wiper Blades

378

TOP

10/07/12 17:07:31 31TE0630_383

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.

The following pages give moredetailed information on how to takecare of your tires and what to dowhen they need to be replaced.

Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride harshly, are moreprone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.

The tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) warns you when a tirepressure is low. See page formore information.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure in each tire at least once amonth. Even tires that are in goodcondition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) permonth. Remember to check thespare tire at the same time.

Even though your vehicle isequipped with TPMS, werecommend that you visually checkyour tires every day. If you think atire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

Check the air pressures when thetires are cold. This means thevehicle has been parked for at least 3hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km). Add or release air, if needed, tomatch the recommended cold tirepressures on the next page.

326

CONTINUED

Inflation Guidelines

Tires

Maintenance

379

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

10/07/12 17:07:44 31TE0630_384

If you check air pressures when thetires are hot (driven for severalmiles/kilometers), you will seereadings 4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3to 0.4 kgf/cm ) higher than the coldreadings. This is normal. Do not letair out to match the recommendedcold air pressure. The tire will beunderinflated.

While tubeless tires have someability to self-seal if they arepunctured, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

You should get your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

For convenience, the recommendedtire sizes and cold tire pressures areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

For additional information aboutyour tires, see page .

The following charts show therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal driving conditions.

424

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal Driving

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal DrivingFront/Rear:

Front/Rear:

V6 models

4-cylinder models

Recommended Tire Pressures

Tires

Normal Driving

380

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

P235/45R18 94V32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

P225/50R17 93V32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

10/07/12 17:07:59 31TE0630_385

Your tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down, you will see a 1/2inch (12.7 mm) wide band across thetread. This shows there is less than1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left onthe tire.

A tire this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see threeor more tread wear indicators.

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

We strongly recommend that you donot drive faster than the postedspeed limits and conditions allow. Ifyou ever drive in a sanctionedcompetitive event at sustained highspeeds (over 118 mph or 190 km/h),be sure to adjust the cold tirepressures as shown below. If you donot, excessive heat can build up andcause sudden tire failure.

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure

Tire Inspection

Tires

High Speed DrivingM

aintenance

381

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

P235/45R18 94V 35 psi (240 kPa ,2.4 kgf/cm )P225/50R17 93V

10/07/12 17:08:13 31TE0630_386

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

Have your dealer check the tires ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tire should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tiresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. For best results,have the installer perform a dynamicbalance.

The service life of your tires isdependent on many factors,including, but not limited to, drivinghabits, road conditions, vehicleloading, inflation pressure,maintenance history, speed, andenvironmental conditions (evenwhen the tires are not in use).

In addition to your regularinspections and inflation pressuremaintenance, it is recommended thatyou have annual inspectionsperformed once the tires reach fiveyears old. It is also recommendedthat all tires, including the spare, beremoved from service after 10 yearsfrom the date of manufacture,regardless of their condition or stateof wear.

The last four digits of the TIN (tireidentification number) are found onthe sidewall of the tire and indicatethe date of manufacture (See

on page ).426

Tires

Tire MaintenanceTire Service Life

TireLabeling

382

10/07/12 17:08:22 31TE0630_387

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, rotatethe tires according to themaintenance messages displayed onthe information display.Move the tires to the positionsshown in the illustration each timethey are rotated. If you purchasedirectional tires, rotate only front-to-back.

When the tires are rotated, makesure the air pressures are checked.

Tire Rotation

Tires

Maintenance

383

(For Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

(For DirectionalTires and Wheels)

FrontFrontImproper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Useonly Honda wheel weights f orbalancing.

10/07/12 17:08:29 31TE0630_388

Replace your tires with radial tires ofthe same size, load range, speedrating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s sidewall).

Mixing radial and bias-ply tires onyour vehicle can reduce brakingability, traction, and steeringaccuracy. Using tires of a differentsize or construction can cause theABS and vehicle stability assistsystem (VSA) to work inconsistently.

Replacement wheels are available atyour dealer.

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling.

If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheels.

Also be sure you use only TPMSspecific wheels. If you do not, thetire pressure monitoring system willnot work on that tire.

The ABS and VSA system work bycomparing the speed of each wheel.When replacing tires, use the samesize originally supplied with thevehicle. Tire size and constructioncan affect wheel speed and maycause the system to activate.

Replacing Tires and Wheels

Tires

384

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

10/07/12 17:08:39 31TE0630_389

＋Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘AllSeason’’ on the sidewall have an all-weather tread design suitable formost winter driving conditions.

For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

If you mount snow tires on yourvehicle, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas the original tires. Mount snowtires on all four wheels. The tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay be lower than your original tires.Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.

Mount tire chains on your tires whenrequired by driving conditions orlocal laws. Install them only on thefront tires.

Because your vehicle has limited tireclearance, Honda stronglyrecommends using the chains listedbelow, made by Security ChainCompany (SCC).

See page for DOT tire qualitygrading information, and page

for tire size information.

Tires

V6 models:

V6 models:

Wheels

Cable-type:

4-cylinder models:

4-cylinder models:

4-cylinder models:SCC Radial ChainSC1036

V6 models:Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain

SC1040

424

426

CONTINUED

Wheel and Tire Specifications Winter Driving

Snow Tires

Tire Chains

Tires

Maintenance

385

18 x 8J

P235/45R18 94V

17 x 7 1/2J

P225/50R17 93V

10/07/12 17:08:54 31TE0630_390

Clean the wheels as you would therest of the exterior. Wash them withthe same solution, and rinse themthoroughly.

When installing chains, follow themanufacturer’s instructions, andmount them as tight as you can.Make sure they are not contactingthe brake lines or suspension. Driveslowly with them installed. If youhear them coming into contact withthe body or chassis, stop andinvestigate. Remove them as soon asyou begin driving on cleared roads.

Aluminum alloy wheels have aprotective clear-coat that keeps thealuminum from corroding andtarnishing. Cleaning the wheels withharsh chemicals (including somecommercial wheel cleaners) or a stiffbrush can damage the clear-coat. Toclean the wheels, use a milddetergent and a soft brush or sponge.

Wheels

Tires

386

Using the wrong chains, or notproperly installing chains, candamage the brake lines andcause a crash in which you canbe seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding theselection and use of tire chains.

Traction devices that are the wrongsize or improperly installed candamage your vehicle’s brake lines,suspension, body, and wheels. Stopdriving if they are hitting any part ofthe vehicle.

10/07/12 17:09:01 31TE0630_391

－Check the condition of the batterymonthly by looking at the testindicator window. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator’scolors.

Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder). Toremove it, cover the terminals with asolution of baking soda and water. Itwill bubble up and turn brown. Whenthis stops, wash it off with plainwater. Dry off the battery with acloth or paper towel. Coat theterminals with grease to help preventfuture corrosion.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle’selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative ( ) cable first, andreconnect it last.

If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your dealer or aqualified mechanic.

The location of the test indicatorwindow varies betweenmanufacturers.

CONTINUED

WARNING:

Wash your hands after handling.

Checking the Battery

Maintenance

387

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

V6 models

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

4-cylinder models

10/07/12 17:09:12 31TE0630_392

Fill the fuel tank.

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc., arecompletely dry.

If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than 1month), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected, or goes dead, the timesetting may be lost. To reset the time,see page .

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, the audiosystem may disable itself. The nexttime you turn on the radio, you willsee ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in thefrequency display. Use the presetbuttons to enter the code (see page

).

The navigation system will alsodisable itself. The next time you turnon the ignition switch, the systemwill require you to enter a PINbefore it can be used. Refer to thenavigation system manual.

241

240


Checking the Battery, Vehicle Storage

Vehicle Storage

388

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledtechnician do the batterymaintenance.

10/07/12 17:09:22 31TE0630_393

Support the front wiper bladearms with a folded towel or rag sothey do not touch the windshield.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand trunk seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand trunk seals.

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Non-porous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in reverse(manual) or Park (automatic).

If possible, periodically run theengine until it reaches fulloperating temperature (thecooling fans cycle on and offtwice). Preferably, do this once amonth.

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe vehicle is being storedindoors).

Disconnect the battery.

Vacuum dirt and dust from theleather frequently. Pay closeattention to the pleats and seams.Clean the leather with a soft clothdampened with a 90% water and 10%neutral wool detergent solution.Then buff it with a clean, dry cloth.Remove any dust or dirt on leathersurfaces immediately.

EX-L and all V6 modelsLeather

Vehicle Storage, Interior Care

Maintenance

389

10/07/12 17:09:33 31TE0630_394

390

10/07/12 17:09:36 31TE0630_395

This section covers the morecommon problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 392....................Changing a Flat Tire . 393

.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 398................................Jump Starting . 400

..............If the Engine Overheats . 403.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 405..........Charging System Indicator . 405

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 406...............Brake System Indicator . 407

..............................................Fuses . 408..............................Fuse Locations . 412

......................Emergency Towing . 415

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

391

10/07/12 17:09:41 31TE0630_396

Use the compact spare tire as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tire repaired or replaced,and put it back on your vehicle assoon as you can.

Follow these precautions:

Replace the tire when you can seethe tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement tire should be the samesize and design, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Check the air pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some roadsurfaces. Use greater cautionwhile driving.

Do not mount snow chains on thecompact spare tire.

Do not use your compact sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

The low tire pressure indicatorcomes on and stays on after youreplace the flat tire with thecompact spare tire. After severalmiles (kilometers) driving with thecompact spare tire, the TPMSindicator comes on and the lowtire pressure indicator goes off.

Compact Spare Tire

392

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

10/07/12 17:09:51 31TE0630_397

CONTINUED

If you have a flat tire while driving,pull over safely. Drive slowly alongthe shoulder until you get to an areafar away from traffic lanes.

Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Have allpassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.

Take the tool kit out of the trunk.

Unscrew the wing bolt and takethe spare tire out of its well.Park the vehicle on firm, level, and

non-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in Park (automatic)or reverse (manual). Apply theparking brake.

The tools are in the trunk. Openthe trunk and raise the trunk floorby pulling up the strap.

5.

4.

3.

2.

1.

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

393

JACKSPARE TIRE

TOOL KITTRUNK FLOOR STRAP

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

10/07/12 17:10:03 31TE0630_398

Take the jack out of the tool kitcase.

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turnwith the wheel nut wrench.

Place the jack under the jackingpoint nearest the tire you need tochange. Turn the end bracketclockwise until the top of the jackcontacts the jacking point. Makesure the jacking point tab isresting in the jack notch.

6. 7. 8.


394

JACK WHEEL NUT

JACKING POINTS

10/07/12 17:10:12 31TE0630_399

CONTINUED

Use the extension and the wheelnut wrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.

Remove the wheel nuts, thenremove the flat tire. Handle thewheel nuts carefully; they may behot from driving. Place the flat tireon the ground with the outsidesurface facing up.

9. 11.

10.


Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

395

WHEEL WRENCH EXTENSION BRAKE HUB

10/07/12 17:10:20 31TE0630_400

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel nut wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tighten thewheel nuts fully.

Lower the vehicle to the ground,and remove the jack.

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Remove the center cap beforestoring the flat tire in the trunkwell.

15.

12.

13.

14.


396

CENTER CAP

80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

10/07/12 17:10:29 31TE0630_401

Place the flat tire face down in thespare tire well.

Remove the spacer cone from thewing bolt, turn it over, and put itback on the bolt.

To remove the spacer cone, squeezethe tabs on the wing bolt todisengage it from the center of thespacer cone, then pull the boltdownward.

To install the wing bolt to the spacercone, reverse this procedure.

Secure the flat tire by screwingthe wing bolt back into its hole.

Store the jack and tools in the toolkit case. Place the tool kit case inthe flat tire.

Your vehicle’s original tire has atire pressure monitoring systemsensor. To replace a tire, refer to

(seepage ).

Lower the trunk floor, then closethe trunk lid.

Store the center cap in the trunk.Make sure it does not getscratched or damaged.

16.

17.

19.

18.

20.

21.

22.

328


Changing a Tire with TPMS

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

397

WING BOLT

SPACER CONE

SPACER CONE

TAB

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

10/07/12 17:10:41 31TE0630_402

Diagnosing why the engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position:

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe START (III) position, you do nothear the normal noise of the enginetrying to start. You may hear aclicking sound, a series of clicks, ornothing at all.

Check these things:

Check the transmission interlock.If you have a manual transmission,the clutch pedal must be pushedall the way to the floor or thestarter will not operate. With anautomatic transmission, it must bein Park or neutral.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. Turn on theheadlights, and check theirbrightness. If the headlights arevery dim or do not come on at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

Turn the ignition switch to theSTART (III) position. If theheadlights do not dim, check thecondition of the fuses. If the fusesare OK, there is probablysomething wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified mechanic todetermine the problem (see

on page ).

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery is dis-charged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition of thebattery connections (see page ).You can then try jump starting thevehicle from a booster battery (seepage ).

400

400

387

415

If the Engine Won’t Start

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Jump Starting

Emergency Towing

398

10/07/12 17:10:52 31TE0630_403

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position, but the engine does not run.

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

Are you using a properly codedkey? An improperly coded key willcause the immobilizer systemindicator in the instrument panelto blink rapidly (see page ).

Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the low fuel indicator maynot be working.

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .

78

305

408

415

If the Engine Won’t Start

The Starter Operates Normally

Starting theEngine

EmergencyTowing

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

399

10/07/12 17:11:01 31TE0630_404

Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions. Open the hood, and check the

physical condition of the battery.In very cold weather, check thecondition of the electrolyte. If itseems slushy or frozen, do not tryjump starting until it thaws.

To jump start your vehicle:

Turn off all the electricalaccessories: heater, A/C, audiosystem, lights, etc. Put thetransmission in neutral (manual)or Park (automatic), and set theparking brake.

You cannot start your vehicle with anautomatic transmission by pushingor pulling it.

The numbers in the illustrationsshow you the order to connect thejumper cables.

1.

2.

Jump Starting

400

BOOSTER BATTERY

4-cylinder models

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

10/07/12 17:11:12 31TE0630_405

＋

＋－

CONTINUED

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourbattery. Connect the other end tothe positive ( ) terminal on thebooster battery.

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the engine mountingbolt (automatic) or thetransmission mounting bolt(manual), as shown. Do notconnect this jumper cable to anyother part of the engine.

3. 4. 4-cylinder models

Jump Starting

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

401

BOOSTER BATTERYV6 models4-cylinder models with automatictransmission

4-cylinder models with manualtransmission

10/07/12 17:11:20 31TE0630_406

－

Keep the ends of the jumper cablesaway from each other and any metalon the vehicle until everything isdisconnected. Otherwise, you maycause an electrical short.

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Start the vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.

Once your vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from your vehicle,then from the booster battery.Connect the second jumper cable to

the negative ( ) terminal on thebooster battery. Connect the otherend to the engine hanger as shown.Do not connect this jumper cable toany other part of the engine.

7.

6.

5.

V6 models

Jump Starting

402

V6 models

10/07/12 17:11:27 31TE0630_407

The pointer of your vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange under most conditions.If it climbs to the red mark, youshould determine the reason (hotday, driving up a steep hill, etc.).

If your vehicle overheats, you shouldtake immediate action. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in neutral(manual) or Park (automatic), andset the parking brake. Turn off allaccessories, and turn on thehazard warning lights.

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine. Wait until you seeno more signs of steam or spray,then open the hood.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading,the engine should start to cooldown almost immediately. If itdoes, wait until the temperaturegauge comes down to the midpoint,then continue driving.

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

2.

1.

3.

4.

5.

415

CONTINUED

EmergencyTowing

If the Engine Overheats

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

403

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to the engine.

10/07/12 17:11:38 31TE0630_408

If you do not find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Add coolantif the level is below the MIN mark.

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

Start the engine, and set thetemperature to maximum heat(climate control to AUTO at‘‘ ’’). Add coolant to theradiator up to the base of the fillerneck. If you do not have theproper coolant mixture available,you can add plain water.Remember to have the coolingsystem drained and refilled withthe proper mixture as soon as youcan.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and checkthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair (see

on page ).

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointerreaches the middle of the tempera-ture gauge, or lower, before check-ing the radiator.

6.

7.

8.

9.11.

10.

415

If the Engine Overheats

EmergencyTowing

404

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

10/07/12 17:11:48 31TE0630_409

This indicator should never come onwhen the engine is running. If itstarts flashing or stays on, the oilpressure has dropped very low orlost pressure. Serious enginedamage is possible, and you shouldtake immediate action.

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood, and check the oillevel (see page ). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

Start the engine, and watch the oilpressure indicator. If it does not goout within 10 seconds, turn off theengine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving(see on page

).

If the charging system indicatorcomes on brightly when the engineis running, the battery is not beingcharged.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.

Go to a service station or garagewhere you can get technicalassistance.

Safely pull off the road and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning lights.

1.

2.

3.

4.

290

415

350

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Emergency Towing

Charging SystemIndicator

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

405

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe vehicle stopped.

10/07/12 17:12:00 31TE0630_410

If the indicator comes onwhile driving, it means one

of the engine’s emissions controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour vehicle’s performance, it canreduce your fuel economy and causeincreased emissions. Continuedoperation may cause serious damage.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, the malfunctionindicator lamp may also come onwith the ‘‘D’’ indicator.

If the indicator comes on repeatedly,even though it may turn off as youcontinue driving, have your vehiclechecked by your dealer as soon aspossible.

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make sure

these codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

If the battery in your vehicle hasbeen disconnected or gone dead,these codes may be erased. It cantake several days of driving undervarious conditions to set the codesagain.

If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the indicator coming oncould be due to a loose or missingfuel fill cap. Tighten the cap until itclicks at least once. Tightening thecap will not turn the indicator offimmediately; it takes several days ofnormal driving.

To check if they are set, turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, without starting the engine.The malfunction indicator lamp willcome on for 20 seconds. If it thengoes off, the readiness codes are set.If it blinks five times, the readinesscodes are not set. If possible, do nottake your vehicle for an emissionstest until the readiness codes are set.Refer to formore information (see page ).433

Readiness Codes Emissions Testing

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

406

If you keep driving with themalf unction indicator lamp on, you candamage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and the engine. Those repairsmay not be covered by your vehicle’swarranties.

10/07/12 17:12:11 31TE0630_411

If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and carefully.

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system’s dual circuitdesign will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down, andyou will have to press harder on thepedal.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of the longdistance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed and repaired assoon as possible (see

on page ).

If the ABS indicator and the VSAsystem indicator come on with thebrake system indicator, have yourvehicle inspected by your dealerimmediately.

The brake systemindicator normallycomes on when

you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position and as a reminder tocheck the parking brake. It will stayon if you do not fully release theparking brake.

If the brake system indicator comeson while driving, the brake fluid levelis probably low. Press lightly on thebrake pedal to see if it feels normal.If it does, check the brake fluid levelthe next time you stop at a servicestation (see page ).

If the fluid level is low, take yourvehicle to a dealer, and have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

362

415Emergency

Towing

Brake System Indicator

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

407

U.S. Canada

10/07/12 17:12:20 31TE0630_412

The vehicle’s fuses are contained inthree fuse boxes.

The driver’s side interior fuse box isunder the dashboard on the driver’sside. The fuse label is attached to theside panel.

The passenger’s side interior fusebox is on the lower passenger’s sidepanel. To remove the fuse box lid,put your finger in the notch on thelid, and pull it upward slightly, thenpull it toward you and take it out ofits hinges.

The under-hood fuse box is on thedriver’s side. To open it, push thetabs as shown.

Fuses

408

INTERIOR (Driver’s side)

TAB

NOTCH

INTERIOR (Passenger’s side) UNDER-HOOD

FUSE BOX FUSE LABEL

10/07/12 17:12:30 31TE0630_413

Also check the combined fuse box inthe under-hood fuse box.

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, the first thingyou should check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

, and , or the diagram onthe fuse box lid or the fuse label,which fuse or fuses control thatcomponent. Check those fuses first,but check all the fuses beforedeciding that a blown fuse is not thecause. Replace any blown fuses andcheck if the device works.

Check each of the large fuses inthe under-hood fuse box bylooking at the wire inside.Removing these fuses requires aPhillips-head screwdriver.

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Make sure theheadlights and all otheraccessories are off.

On the under-hood and passenger’sside interior fuse boxes, removethe cover from each fuse box.

3.1.

2.

412 413 414

CONTINUED

Fuses

Checking and Replacing FusesTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

409

FUSE BLOWN BLOWN

10/07/12 17:12:41 31TE0630_414

Your vehicle has spare fuses on theback of the under-hood fuse boxcover.

Look for a blown wire inside thefuse. If it is blown, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse boxes bypulling out each one with the fusepuller provided on the back of theunder-hood fuse box cover.

5.4.

Fuses

410

BLOWN

FUSE PULLER SPARE FUSESFUSE PULLER

10/07/12 17:12:49 31TE0630_415

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem with yourvehicle. Leave the blown fuse inthat circuit, and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified technician.

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate that anything is wrong.Replace the fuse with one of thecorrect rating as soon as you can.

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits. Makesure you can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket).

6.

Fuses

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

411

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have areplacement f use with the proper ratingf or the circuit, install one with a lowerrating.

10/07/12 17:12:55 31TE0630_416

－－

－－－－－

－

－－－－－

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

－

－

－－

－－－

－－

－

＊＊

－－

＊

＊

No. Circuits Protected

Circuits ProtectedAmps.No. Amps. Circuits Protected

Amps.

No.

3 73 8

2 12 22 32 42 5

2 6

3 23 33 43 53 6

4556789

10111213141516171819192021

Driver’s Side Fuse BoxIG MainRear DefrosterSub Fan MotorNot UsedNot UsedNot UsedHeater MotorHazardHorn, StopNot UsedNot UsedIG CoilFI SubBack UpInterior LightsFI MainDBWNot UsedBack Up, FI ECUMG ClutchFan Relay

BatteryBatteryPassenger’s Side Fuse BoxNot UsedABS/VSAABS/VSA MotorPassenger’s Side Fuse BoxNot Used

100 A120 A

40 A

40 A30 A

(40 A)

1

30 A30 A30 A30 A

(60 A)30 A

Not UsedNot UsedSub Fan MotorWiper MotorMain Fan MotorDriver’s Side Light MainDriver’s Side Fuse BoxPassenger’s Side Light Main

(40 A)50 A40 A20 A

40 A15 A20 A

15 A15 A10 A

7.5 A15 A15 A

7.5 A7.5 A7.5 A

V6 models1 :2 :

4-cylinder models

1

2

1

2

1

2 3 13 1

1

2

Fuse Locations

412

UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

10/07/12 17:13:06 31TE0630_417

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

－

－

－

＊

No. No.

No.

Circuits ProtectedCircuits ProtectedAmps. Amps.

Amps. Circuits Protected

12345678

9101112

131415

161718192021222324252627

28293031

If equipped

Fuel PumpVB SOLSRSODS (Occupant DetectionSystem)Not UsedACMDaytime Running Lights

Not UsedSeat MemoryWasherWiperMeterABS/VSAACGSTS

7.5 A15 A7.5 A7.5 A7.5 A15 A7.5 A

20 A10 A10 A

7.5 A

10 A7.5 A

7.5 A7.5 A7.5 A20 A20 A20 A20 A15 A20 A10 A10 A10 A

10 A7.5 A10 A

A/CAccessory, Key, LockAccessoryDriver’s Power Seat SlidingMoonroofDriver’s Power Seat RecliningNot UsedFront Accessory Power SocketDriver’s Power WindowDriver’s Side Door LockLeft Front Fog LightLeft Side Small Lights(Exterior)Left Headlight High BeamTPMSLeft Headlight Low BeamNot Used

:

Fuse Locations

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

413

INTERIOR FUSE BOX (Driver’s Side)

10/07/12 17:13:18 31TE0630_418

＊

＊

＊

＊

－

－－

－－

－－－

＊

No.

No. Circuits Protected

Circuits Protected Circuits ProtectedNo.Amps. Amps.

Amps.

12

345678

16171819202122

If equipped

Not UsedNot UsedLumbar SupportSeat HeaterNot UsedNot UsedNot Used

Right Headlight High BeamRight Side Small Lights(Exterior)Right Front Fog LightRight Headlight Low BeamNot UsedInterior LightsNot UsedNot Used

Not UsedRight Side Door LockNot UsedRear Accessory PowerSocketFront Passenger’s PowerWindowNot UsedPremium AMP

9101112

13

1415

10 A10 A

10 A10 A

7.5 A

20 A

20 A10 A20 A15 A

20 A

20 A

10 A15 A

:

Fuse Locations

414

INTERIOR FUSE BOX (Passenger’s Side)

10/07/12 17:13:30 31TE0630_419

－

－

If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service ororganization. Never tow your vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

If, due to damage, your vehicle mustbe towed with the front wheels onthe ground, do this:

The operatorloads your vehicle on the back of atruck.

There are two ways to tow yourvehicle:

With the front wheels on the ground,do not tow the vehicle more than 50miles (80 km), and keep the speedbelow 35 mph (55 km/h).

The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the front tires and lift them offthe ground. The rear tires remain onthe ground.

Start the engine.

Shift the transmission to neutral.Leave the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) position so thesteering wheel does not lock.Release the parking brake.

Shift to the D position and hold for5 seconds, then to N.Turn off the engine.Leave the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) position so thesteering wheel does not lock.Release the parking brake.

CONTINUED


Automatic transmission:

Emergency Towing

Flat-bed Equipment

Wheel-lif t Equipment

This is the best way totransport your vehicle.

This is an acceptableway to tow your vehicle.

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

415

Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Follow theabove procedure exactly. If you cannotshif t the transmission or start theengine (automatic transmission), yourvehicle must be transported with thef ront wheels of f the ground.

10/07/12 17:13:46 31TE0630_420

Emergency Towing

416

The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)position, and make sure the steeringwheel turns f reely bef ore you begintowing.

Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by thebumpers will cause serious damage.The bumpers are not designed tosupport the vehicle’s weight.

10/07/12 17:13:50 31TE0630_421

－

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour vehicle and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 418Specifications

..................(4-cylinder models) . 420Specifications

...............................(V6 models) . 422DOT Tire Quality Grading

..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 424.................................Tire Labeling . 426

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) Required Federal

............................Explanation . 428.......................Emissions Controls . 430

Three Way Catalytic.................................Converters . 432

........................Emissions Testing . 433

Technical Information

TechnicalInform

ation

417

10/07/12 17:13:54 31TE0630_422

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers in various places.

The vehicle identification number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourdealer uses to register your vehiclefor warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour vehicle. The easiest place tofind the VIN is on a plate fastened tothe top of the dashboard. You cansee it by looking through thewindshield on the driver’s side. It isalso on the certification labelattached to the driver’s doorjamb,and is stamped on the enginecompartment bulkhead. The VIN isalso provided in bar code on thecertification label.

Identif ication Numbers

418

CERTIFICATION LABEL

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

10/07/12 17:13:59 31TE0630_423

The transmission number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

The engine number is stamped onthe front of the engine block.

Identif ication Numbers

TechnicalInform

ation

419

ENGINE NUMBER

V6 models

ENGINE NUMBER

MANUAL TRANSMISSION NUMBER

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONNUMBER

MANUALTRANSMISSIONNUMBER

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER

4-cylinder models

10/07/12 17:14:06 31TE0630_424

－－

＊

＊

＊

＊

Specifications (4-cylinder models)

420

Dimensions Seating Capacities

Weights

Air Conditioning

Engine

Capacities

107.9 in (2,740 mm)62.2 in (1,580 mm)

LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

190.9 in (4,849 mm)

2.1 US qt (2.0 )2.0 US qt (1.9 )5.4 US qt (5.1 )4.0 US qt (3.8 )4.2 US qt (4.0 )

1.96 US gal (7.4 )1.90 US gal (7.2 )

1.64 US gal (6.2 )1.59 US gal (6.0 )

523

TotalFrontRear

18.5 US gal (70.0 )Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attached

to the driver’s doorjamb.

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

HFC-134a (R-134a)14.1 15.9 oz (400 450 g)

ND-OIL8

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs (U.S.)

Spark plugs (Canada)

Water cooled 4-strokeDOHC i-VTEC 4-cylinder

gasoline engine3.43 x 3.9 in (87.0 x 99.0 mm)

144 cu-in (2,354 cm )10.5 : 1

ILZKR7B11SSXU22HCR11SDILZKR7B11GSILZKR7B11SSXU22HCR11S

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengineReserve tank capacity: 0.180 US gal (0.68 )

72.7 in (1,848 mm)56.3 in (1,432 mm)

Fuel tank

Enginecoolant

Engine oil

ManualtransmissionfluidAutomatictransmissionfluidWindshieldwasherreservoir

4.8 US qt (4.5 )2.6 US qt (2.5 )

6.50 US qt (6.15 )2.6 US qt (2.5 )

Approx.

ChangeManualAutomatic

TotalManualAutomatic

1 :

2 :

NGK:DENSO:

Front/Rear

ULEVPZEV NGK:

NGK:DENSO:

ChangeIncluding filterWithout filter

TotalChangeTotal

ChangeTotal

U.S.Canada

1

2

10/07/12 17:14:31 31TE0630_425

－

＊

－－－－＊

＊

Specifications (4-cylinder models)

TechnicalInform

ation

421

FusesLights

Battery

Tires

Alignment

60 W (HB3)55 W (H11)24/2.2 CP

21 W16 W

5 W8 W8 W21 W5 W21/5 W

5 W

Interior

Under-hood

P225/50R17 93V

Headlights

Front turn signal/parking lightsFront side marker lightsRear turn signal lightsBack-up lightsStop/taillightsLicense plate lightsHigh-mount brake lightCeiling lightSpotlightsTrunk lightVanity mirror lights 1.4 W

Capacity

Size

Pressure

Toe-in

Camber

Caster

0.00 in (0.0 mm)0.08 in (2.0 mm)

0°1°

3°48’

T135/80D16 101M

12 V 38 AH/5 HR12 V 47 AH/20 HR

52 AH/5 HR12 V12 V 65 AH/20 HR

See page 413 or the fuse labelattached on the side panel.See page 414 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox door.See page 412 or the fuse boxcover.

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

HighLow

:

Passenger’s side

Driver’s side

FrontRearFrontRearFront

(Amber)

Front/RearSpareFront/RearSpare

PZEV engine model, and Canadian models

10/07/12 17:14:50 31TE0630_426

＊

＊

＊

－－

＊

＊

＊

Specifications (V6 models)

422

Dimensions Seating Capacities

Weights

Air Conditioning

Capacities

Engine

LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

190.9 in (4,849 mm)

62.2 in (1,580 mm)

TotalFrontRear

523

1.74 US gal (6.6 )2.27 US gal (8.6 )

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

5.3 US qt (5.0 )

Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb.

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

18.5 US gal (70.0 )Fuel tank

EnginecoolantEngine oil

ManualtransmissionfluidAutomatictransmissionfluidWindshieldwasherreservoir

4.8 US qt (4.5 )

7.9 US qt (7.5 )3.5 US qt (3.3 )

2.2 US qt (2.1 )2.6 US qt (2.5 )

Water cooled 4-strokeSOHC i-VTEC (SOHC VTEC )

6-cylinder (V6) gasoline engine3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm)

212 cu-in (3,471 cm )10.5 : 110.0 : 1

ILZKR7B11SXU22HCR11

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengineReserve tank capacity: 0.180 US gal (0.68 )ILZKR7B11

SXU22HCR11

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompressionratioSpark plugs (U.S.)

Spark plugs (Canada)

4.2 US qt (4.0 )HFC-134a (R-134a)

ND-OIL8

107.9 in (2,740 mm)

14.1 15.9 oz (400 450 g)

2.6 US qt (2.5 )

72.7 in (1,848 mm)56.3 in (1,432 mm)

Approx.

1 :

2 :

ChangeTotal

Front/Rear

ChangeIncluding filterWithout filter

TotalChangeTotal

ChangeTotal

U.S.Canada

AutomaticManual


NGK:DENSO:NGK:DENSO:

1

2

10/07/12 17:15:11 31TE0630_427

－

－－

Specifications (V6 models)

TechnicalInform

ation

423

Fuses

Tires

Alignment

Lights

Battery

60 W (HB3)55 W (H11)24/2.2 CP5 W55 W21 W16 W

Interior

Under-hood

Size

Pressure

P235/45R18 94VT135/80D16 101M

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Toe-in

Camber

Caster

0.00 in (0.0 mm)0.08 in (2.0 mm)

0°1°

3°48’

1.4 W5 W8 W8 W21 W5 W21/5 W

Headlights

Front turn signal/parking lightsFront side marker lightsFog lightsRear turn signal lightsBack-up lightsStop/taillightsLicense plate lightsHigh-mount brake lightCeiling lightSpotlightsTrunk lightVanity mirror lights

Capacity 12 V12 V

72 AH/20 HR60 AH/5 HR

See page 413 or the fuse labelattached on the side panel.See page 414 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox door.See page 412 or the fuse boxcover.

HighLow

Front/RearSpareFront/RearSpare

FrontRearFrontRearFront

Driver’s side

Passenger’s side

(H11)

(Amber)

10/07/12 17:15:30 31TE0630_428

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween tread shoulder andmaximum section width. Forexample:

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

The tires on your vehicle meet allU.S. Federal Safety Requirements.All tires are also graded fortreadwear, traction, and temperatureperformance according toDepartment of Transportation(DOT) standards. The followingexplains these gradings.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Treadwear Traction

424

10/07/12 17:15:39 31TE0630_429

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading,either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

TemperatureTechnicalInform

ation

425

10/07/12 17:15:45 31TE0630_430

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

The tires that came on your vehiclehave a number of markings. Thoseyou should be aware of are describedbelow.

Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).

Whenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. Following is an exampleof tire size with an explanation ofwhat each component means.

Vehicle type (P indicatespassenger vehicle).

Tire width in millimeters.

Aspect ratio (the tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth).

Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).

Rim diameter in inches.

Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

P

R

V

235

45

18

94

Tire Labeling

Tire Size

426

(3)

(4)

Tire Labeling Example

(1)

(2)

(1)

(2)(3)(4)

(1) Tire SizeTire Identification Number (TIN)Maximum Tire PressureMaximum Tire Load

P235/45R18 94V

10/07/12 17:15:58 31TE0630_431

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Tire type code.

Date of manufacture.YearWeek

The tire identification number (TIN)is a group of numbers and lettersthat look like the following example.TIN is located on the sidewall of thetire.

This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.

Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

Recommended Inflation PressureThe cold tire inflation pressurerecommended by the manufacturer.

Treadwear Indicators (TWI)Means the projections within theprincipal grooves designed to give avisual indication of the degrees ofwear of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure The tire airpressure when the vehicle has beenparked for at least three hours ordriven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Load Rating Means the maximumload that a tire is rated to carry for agiven inflation pressure.

Maximum Inflation Pressure Themaximum tire air pressure that thetire can hold.

Maximum Load Rating Means theload rating for a tire at the maximumpermissible inflation pressure forthat tire.FW6X

2202

DOT

B97R

Tire Labeling

Tire Identif ication Number (TIN) Glossary of Tire TerminologyTechnicalInform

ation

427

DOT B97R FW6X 2202

10/07/12 17:16:13 31TE0630_432

－

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of adifferent size than the size indicatedon the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label, you shoulddetermine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale

when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

428

10/07/12 17:16:20 31TE0630_433

－

Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicatorto indicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is provided bya separate telltale, which displays thesymbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated,

the system may not be able to detector signal low tire pressure asintended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for avariety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement oralternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

TechnicalInform

ation

429

10/07/12 17:16:27 31TE0630_434

＊

＊

The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons.Controlling the production of NOx,CO, and HC is important to theenvironment. Under certainconditions of sunlight and climate,NOx and HC react to formphotochemical ‘‘smog.’’ Carbonmonoxide does not contribute tosmog creation, but it is a poisonousgas.

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.

In Canada, Honda vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.

Your vehicle has a positivecrankcase ventilation system. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The positivecrankcase ventilation valve routesthem from the crankcase back to the

intake manifold. They are thendrawn into the engine and burned.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

The onboard refueling vaporrecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery

Emissions Controls

430

10/07/12 17:16:38 31TE0630_435

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude three or four systems:PGM-FI, ignition timing control,exhaust gas recirculation (6-cylindermodels), and three way catalyticconverter. These systems worktogether to control the engine’scombustion and minimize theamount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcome out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newHonda replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.

The PGM-FI system uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection. It has threesubsystems: air intake, enginecontrol, and fuel control. Thepowertrain control module (PCM) inautomatic transmission vehicles orthe engine control module (ECM) inmanual transmission vehicles usesvarious sensors to determine how

much air is going into the engine. Itthen controls how much fuel to injectunder all operating conditions.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.

The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)system takes some of the exhaustgas and routes it back into the intakemanifold. Adding exhaust gas to theair/fuel mixture reduces the amountof NOx produced when the fuel isburned.

2

2

V6 models

Exhaust Emissions Controls

Replacement Parts

Emissions Controls

Three Way Catalytic Converter

PGM-FI System

Ignition Timing Control System

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)System

TechnicalInform

ation

431

10/07/12 17:16:51 31TE0630_436

Keep the engine well maintained.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

The three way catalytic converterscontain precious metals that serve ascatalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converters are referredto as three-way catalysts, since theyact on HC, CO, and NOx.Replacement units must be originalHonda parts or their equivalent.

The three way catalytic convertersmust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. They can set on fire anycombustible materials that comenear them. Park your vehicle awayfrom high grass, dry leaves, or otherflammables.

Defective three way catalyticconverters contribute to air pollution,and can impair your engine’sperformance. Follow theseguidelines to protect your vehicle’sthree way catalytic converters.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic convertersineffective.

Three Way Catalytic Converters

432

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS

V6 models

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS

4-cylinder models

10/07/12 17:17:01 31TE0630_437

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely, full (around3/4).

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.

If you take your vehicle for anemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle retested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for retesting bydoing the following.

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 6hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 40° and95°F (4° and 35°C).

Keep the vehicle in Park(automatic) or neutral (manual).Increase the engine speed to 2,000rpm, and hold it there until thetemperature gauge rises to at least1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes).

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, let the engine idle for 20seconds.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

CONTINUED

Testing of Readiness Codes

Emissions Testing

TechnicalInform

ation

433

10/07/12 17:17:11 31TE0630_438

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD (automatic) or 5th (manual). Donot use the cruise control. Whentraffic allows, drive for 90 secondswithout moving the acceleratorpedal. (Vehicle speed may varyslightly; this is okay.) If you cannotdo this for a continuous 90seconds because of trafficconditions, drive for at least 30seconds, then repeat it two moretimes (for a total of 90 seconds).

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour dealer.

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 30minutes.

7. 8.

9.

Emissions Testing

434

10/07/12 17:17:17 31TE0630_439

....Customer Service Information . 436....................Warranty Coverages . 437

.............Reporting Safety Defects . 438.....................Authorized Manuals . 439

Warranty and Customer Relations

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

435

10/07/12 17:17:20 31TE0630_440

Honda dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. Theservice manager or general managercan help. Almost all problems aresolved in this way.

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact HondaCustomer Service.

U.S. Owners:

Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Vehicle Identification Number(see page )

Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicle

Date of purchase

Odometer reading of your vehicle

Your name, address, and tele-phone number

A detailed description of theproblem

Name of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

418

Customer Service Information

436

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.Automobile Customer ServiceMail Stop 500-2N-7A1919 Torrance BoulevardTorrance, California 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 999-1009

Honda Canada Inc.Customer Relations180 Honda BoulevardMarkham, ONL6C 0H9

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9Fax: 1-877-939-0909E-Mail: [email protected]

Vortex Motor Corp.Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 620-7546

10/07/12 17:17:30 31TE0630_441

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Your new vehicle is covered by thesewarranties:

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from your dealer.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered by a limited warranty.Please read your warranty bookletfor details.

covers all Hondareplacement parts against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

Honda accessories are coveredunder this warranty. Time andmileage limits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty booklet fordetails.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2011 Honda warranty informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your vehicle’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2011 warrantymanual that came with your vehicle.

covers your new vehicle, except forthe emissions control systems andaccessories, against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’semissions control systems. Time,mileage, and coverage areconditional. Please read yourwarranty booklet for exactinformation.

Warranty Coverages

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

437

10/07/12 17:17:41 31TE0630_442

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition tonotifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists ina group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involvedin individual problems between you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle SafetyHotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

; or write to: Administrator,NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington,DC 20590.You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from .

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which couldcause a crash or could cause injury or death, you shouldimmediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may alsoinform Transport Canada.

If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall andremedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannotbecome involved in individual problems between you,your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.

To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations andRecalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For moreinformation on reporting safety defects or about motorvehicle safety, go to .

Reporting Safety Defects

In CanadaIn the US

438

http://www.saf ercar.gov

http://www.saf ercar.gov

http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsaf ety

10/07/12 17:17:49 31TE0630_443

The publications shown below can be purchased from HelmIncorporated. You can order by phone or online:

Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)Go online at

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.at 1-800-782-4356.

Covers maintenance and recommended procedures forrepair to engine and chassis components. It is writtenfor the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enoughfor most mechanically inclined owners to understand.

Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depthtroubleshooting information for each electrical circuitin your vehicle.

Describes the procedures involved in the replacementof damaged body parts.

Authorized Manuals

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

(U.S. only)A

uthorizedM

anuals

439

Form Description

2011 Honda Accord 2/4 door L4

Service Manual Base Book

2011 Honda Accord 2/4 door V6

Service Manual Supplement

2011 Honda 2/4 Door L4/V6

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2008 Honda 2/4 door Body Repair Manual

2011 Honda Accord 2-door Owner’s Manual

2011 Honda Accord

Navigation System Owner’s Manual

2011 Honda Accord Honda Service History

2011 Honda Accord 2-door

Technology Reference Guide

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

Publication

Form Number

61TA005

61TA601

61TA005EL

61TA030

31TE0630

31TA5830

31TA5M30

31TE0Q30

HON-R

www.helminc.com

10/07/12 17:18:00 31TE0630_444

440

10/07/12 17:18:02 31TE0630_445

CONTINUED

....................................Accessories . 295ACCESSORY

...............(Ignition Key Position) . 79............Accessory Power Sockets . 118

..................Active Head Restraints . 99....................Additives, Engine Oil . 351

...........................Advanced Airbags . 25...............................Airbag (SRS) . 9, 21

..........Airbag System Components . 21......Air Conditioning System . 124, 130

.................................Usage . 127, 131...............Air Pressure, Tires . 379, 380

......................................Antifreeze . 354Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

...............................Indicator . 58, 322...................................Operation . 322

..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 240.Anti-theft Steering Column Lock . 79

................................Audio System . 138.....Auto Door Locking/Unlocking . 81...Automatic Lighting Off Feature . 72...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 19

.............Automatic Speed Control . 250

..............Automatic Transmission . 309..................Capacity, Fluid . 420, 422..........................Paddle Shifters . 315

.......................................Shifting . 310Shift Lever Position

...............................Indicators . 309................Shift Lever Positions . 310

....................Shift Lock Release . 313......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 239

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 56, 405............................Jump Starting . 400

..............................Maintenance . 387....................Specifications . 421, 423

..............................Before Driving . 283....................................Belts, Seat . 8, 17

.........................Beverage Holders . 116........HandsFreeLink . 257

..................................Booster Seats . 48Brakes

...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 322.............Break-in, New Linings . 284

....................Bulb Replacement . 370...........................................Fluid . 362

.......................................Parking . 114.................System Indicator . 57, 407........................Wear Indicators . 321

.............................Braking System . 321.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 284

..Brightness Control, Instruments . 73Bulb Replacement

..........................Back-up Lights . 370..............................Brake Lights . 370

.................................Fog Lights . 372................Front Parking Lights . 368

.................................Headlights . 365.........High-mount Brake Light . 371

................................Rear Lights . 370....................Specifications . 421, 423

............Turn Signal Lights . 368, 370......................Bulbs, Halogen . 365, 372

...................Capacities Chart . 420, 422.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 51

Bluetooth

Index

A

B

C

IND

EX

I

10/07/12 17:18:09 31TE0630_446

.............................Carrying Cargo . 297.............CAUTION, Explanation of . iii

.........................................CD Care . 232..........................CD Changer . 153, 201

........................Certification Label . 418............................................Chains . 385

....................Changing a Flat Tire . 393Changing Oil

........................................How to . 352......................................When to . 341

...Charging System Indicator . 56, 405............Check Fuel Cap Message . 287............Checklist, Before Driving . 304

.....................................Child Safety . 33..............................Booster Seats . 48

.............................Child Seats . 40, 41Important Safety

..........................Reminders . 33-50..........................................Infants . 38

..........................Larger Children . 47.........................................LATCH . 42

......................Risks with Airbags . 34.............................Small Children . 39

..........................................Tether . 46...........................Warning Labels . 52

..........Where Should a Child Sit . 34

.......................................Child Seats . 33.........................................LATCH . 42

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 46................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 374...............Climate Control System . 130

..........................On/Off Button . 132..............................................Clock . 241

...................................Clutch Fluid . 363..................CO in the Exhaust . 51, 430

............Cold Weather, Starting in . 305..............................Compact Spare . 392

.........................................Compass . 246.................Console Compartment . 117.................Consumer Information . 436

.............Controls, Instruments and . 53Coolant

........................................Adding . 354....................................Checking . 291

.........................Proper Solution . 354...................Temperature Gauge . 65

Crankcase Emissions Control........................................System . 430

................Cruise Control Indicator . 62............Cruise Control Operation . 250

...................................Cup Holders . 116.........................Customer Service . 436

...............DANGER, Explanation of . iii...................................Dashboard . 3, 54

..........Daytime Running Lights . 60, 72Daytime Running Lights

.......................................Indicator . 60.................................Dead Battery . 400

............Defects, Reporting Safety . 438................Defogger, Rear Window . 75......Defrosting the Windows . 128, 134

............................Dimensions . 420, 422...............Dimming the Headlights . 70

Dipstick..........Automatic Transmission . 357

..................................Engine Oil . 290..........................Directional Signals . 70

........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 321.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 353

Doors..........................Auto Door Lock . 81

.......................Auto Door Unlock . 84..............Locking and Unlocking . 80..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 424

Downshifting, Manual.............................Transmission . 306

Index

D

II

10/07/12 17:18:14 31TE0630_447

CONTINUED

....................D-Paddle Shift Mode . 315...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

...........................................Driving . 303....................................Economy . 292

Driving Position Memory........................................System . 103

..........Dual Temperature Control . 135..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 375

..........................Fan, Interior . 125, 133.........................................Features . 123

....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 285Filters

........................Dust and Pollen . 375...............................................Oil . 352

.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 74...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 393

.....................................Floor Mats . 375Fluids

..........Automatic Transmission . 357..........................................Brake . 362.........................................Clutch . 363

..............Manual Transmission . 359..........................Power Steering . 363

..................Windshield Washer . 356........................................Fog Lights . 73

.........................Folding Rear Seat . 100..........................Four-way Flashers . 74

..............................Front Airbags . 9, 23

..............................Economy, Fuel . 292Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

........................................System . 324..................................Emergencies . 391

.............Battery, Jump Starting . 400...........Brake System Indicator . 407

................Changing a Flat Tire . 393.....Charging System Indicator . 405

.........Hazard Warning Flashers . 74............................Jump Starting . 400

..................Checking the Fuses . 408.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 405...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 406

..................Overheated Engine . 403.......................................Towing . 415

.........................Emergency Brake . 114......................Emergency Flashers . 74

......................Emergency Towing . 415............Emergency Trunk Opener . 92

.......................Emissions Controls . 430........................Emissions Testing . 433

Engine............Adding Engine Coolant . 354

....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 65.........................If It Won’t Start . 398

...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 406.......................Oil Life Indicator . 341

..............Oil Pressure Indicator . 405

..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 350...............................Overheating . 403

....................Specifications . 420, 422

....................Speed Limiter . 308, 313.......................................Starting . 305

................................................V6 . 422...................................4-cylinder . 420

..........Engine Speed Limiter . 308, 313......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 285

.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 430...............................Exhaust Fumes . 51

Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat........................................Belts by . 15

Index

IND

EX

E

F

III

10/07/12 17:18:21 31TE0630_448

.................................................Fuel . 284........Check Fuel Cap Message . 287

......................Fill Door and Cap . 285...........................................Gauge . 65

.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 60................Octane Requirement . 284

...............................Oxygenated . 285........................Tank, Refueling . 285

...............................Fuel Economy . 292....Fuel Economy (ECO) Indicator . 59

.....................Fuses, Checking the . 408

......Gas Mileage, Improving . 292, 293.........................................Gasoline . 284...........................................Gauge . 65

.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 60................Octane Requirement . 284

........................Tank, Refueling . 285................Gas Station Procedures . 285

Gauges...Engine Coolant Temperature . 65

...............................................Fuel . 65Gearshift Lever Positions

..........Automatic Transmission . 319

..............Manual Transmission . 307......................................Glove Box . 116

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.............................(GVWR) . 299, 330

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 365...........................HandsFreeLink . 257

..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 74........................................Headlights . 70

........................................Aiming . 365..............Automatic Lighting Off . 72..............Automatic Lighting On . 71............Daytime Running Lights . 72

..................High Beam Indicator . 60.........................Reminder Chime . 70

Replacing Halogen..............................Bulbs . 365, 372

...................................Turning on . 70........................Head Restraints . 13, 97

.....................Heating and Cooling . 124.............................Heated Mirrors . 107

...................................Heater, Seat . 102HomeLink Universal

................................Transceiver . 253

........Hood, Opening and Closing . 288..............................................Horn . 4, 68

...........................Hydraulic Clutch . 363

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 418Ignition

..............................................Keys . 77...........................................Switch . 79

............Timing Control System . 431........................Immobilizer System . 78

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6

Index

G

HI

IV

10/07/12 17:18:27 31TE0630_449

CONTINUED

.........................................Indicators . 56...............ABS (Anti-lock Brake) . 58

Brake (Parking and Brake............................System) . 57, 407

................Charging System . 56, 405.............................Cruise Control . 62

.................................Cruise Main . 62................Door and Trunk Open . 61

DRL (Daytime Running......................................Lights) . 60

...................................Fog Lights . 62Fuel Economy (ECO)

...................................Indicator . 59

...................................High Beam . 60........Key (Immobilizer System) . 58

.....................................Lights On . 60......................................Low Fuel . 60

................Low Oil Pressure . 56, 405......................Low Tire Pressure . 59

..................Maintenance Minder . 61...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 406

..........................Security System . 61...........................Side Airbag Off . 57

.......................................Seat Belt . 56...............................................SRS . 57

...........................................TPMS . 59

Turn Signal and Hazard...................................Warning . 58

........................................VSA Off . 62.................................VSA System . 62

..............................Washer Level . 60.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 56

...............................Infant Restraint . 38......................................Infant Seats . 38

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 46...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 379

........................Information Display . 64.................................Inside Mirror . 106

.............................Inspection, Tire . 381....................Installing a Child Seat . 41

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 46.............................Using LATCH . 42............................Instrument Panel . 55

........Instrument Panel Brightness . 73..............Instruments and Controls . 53

...............................Interior Lights . 121........................................Introduction . i

.......................................iPod . 163, 213

..................................................Keys . 77

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 394

.......................................Jack, Tire . 394................................Jump Starting . 400

.......................Label, Certification . 418.................Lane Change, Signaling . 70

..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 14, 18...............................LATCH System . 42

Lights....................Bulb Replacement . 365

.......................................Indicator . 55.........................................Parking . 70

............................Turn Signal . 58, 70....................................Load Limits . 298

......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 79

Index

IND

EXJ

K

L

V

10/07/12 17:18:35 31TE0630_450

Locks.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 79

............................Fuel Fill Door . 285..................................Glove Box . 116

....................Lockout Prevention . 81.................................Power Door . 80

...........................................Trunk . 91........................Low Coolant Level . 291.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 60

...Lower Gear, Downshifting to a . 306...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 56, 405

................................Lower Anchors . 42Lubricant Specifications

..................................Chart . 420, 422...........Luggage, Storing (Cargo) . 297

..................................Maintenance . 339........................................Minder . 341

Main Items and Sub..............................Items . 344, 347

Owner’s Maintenance...................................Checks . 346

.........................Minder Indicator . 61..........................................Safety . 340

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 406...................Manual Transmission . 306

........Manual Transmission Fluid . 359.........................Meters, Gauges . 55, 63

...................Methanol in Gasoline . 285........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 106

...............Modifying Your Vehicle . 296.......................................Moonroof . 112

...................Neutral Gear Position . 311..................New Vehicle Break-in . 284

............Normal Shift Speeds . 307, 319...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i

...............Numbers, Identification . 418

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 284.........................................Odometer . 64

Oil........................Change, How to . 352......................Change, When to . 341......................Checking Engine . 290..............Pressure Indicator . 56, 405

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 351

...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 79Onboard Refueling Vapor

....................................Recovery . 430............................Outside Mirrors . 106

....Outside Temperature Indicator . 66....................Overheating, Engine . 403

....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 346.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 284

..............................Paddle Shifters . 315..............Panel Brightness Control . 73

........................Park Gear Position . 311...........................................Parking . 320

...............................Parking Brake . 114Parking Brake and Brake

.................System Indicator . 57, 407.................................Parking Lights . 70

..Parking Over Things that Burn . 432

....Passenger Airbag Off Indicator . 30.............................PGM-FI System . 431

...................................Pollen Filter . 375..........................Power Door Locks . 80

Index

N

OM

P

VI

10/07/12 17:18:43 31TE0630_451

CONTINUED

................Power Seat Adjustments . 93

......Power Socket Locations . 115, 118............................Power Windows . 108

.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 15

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11...Additional Safety Precautions . 16

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 15........................Protecting Children . 33

.....................General Guidelines . 33.......................Protecting Infants . 38

.......Protecting Larger Children . 47.........Protecting Small Children . 39

Using Child Seats with.....................................Tethers . 46

.............................Using LATCH . 42

..................................Safety Belts . 8, 17............Safety Defects, Reporting . 438

.................................Safety Features . 7...........................................Airbags . 9

.......................................Seat Belts . 8.............Safety Labels, Location of . 52

..............................Safety Messages . iii.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 18

...............Additional Information . 17Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 19.....................................Cleaning . 374

................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 14, 18................................Maintenance . 19

Reminder Indicator and................................Beeper . 17, 56

...................System Components . 17...............Use During Pregnancy . 15

...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 18

...................Radiator Overheating . 403.............Radio/CD Sound System . 138

.................Radio Theft Protection . 240............................Radio, XM . 147, 194

...........................Readiness Codes . 433..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 370

............................Rear Seat Access . 95........................Rear Seat, Folding . 100

...........................Rearview Mirror . 106.................Rear Window Defogger . 75.........Reclining the Seat Backs . 93, 94

Recommended Shift................................Speeds . 307, 319........................................Refueling . 285

.......................Reminder Indicators . 56

.......................Remote Transmitter . 87Replacement Information

................Engine Oil and Filter . 352..........................................Fuses . 408

................................Light Bulbs . 365....................................Schedule . 341

................................Timing Belt . 364...........................................Tires . 384

.............................Wiper Blades . 376Replacing Seat Belts After a

............................................Crash . 20.............Reporting Safety Defects . 438

Reserve Tank, Engine...............................Coolant . 291, 354

...............................Restraint, Child . 33..................Reverse Gear Position . 311

...........................Reverse Lockout . 308................................Rotation, Tire . 383

Index

IND

EX

R

S

VII

10/07/12 17:18:49 31TE0630_452

＊

Seats.................................Adjusting . 93-95

.......................................Folding . 100

.......................................Heaters . 102............................Security System . 244

.........................Select/Reset Knob . 63.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 40

...Selector Knob (Disc Changer) . 139..................Sequential Shift Mode . 317

...............................Serial Number . 418..............................Service Minder . 341

...........................Service Manual . 439.........Service Station Procedures . 285

..........................Setting the Clock . 241...Shift Lever Position Indicators . 309

........................Shift Lock Release . 313................................Side Airbags . 9, 27

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 27How the Side Airbag Off

......................Indicator Works . 30

..................Side Curtain Airbags . 9, 29How Your Side Curtain

..........................Airbags Work . 29...............................Signaling Turns . 70

.....................................Snow Tires . 385................................Sound System . 138

Spare Tire......................................Inflating . 392

....................Specifications . 421, 423............................Spark Plugs . 420, 422

........................Specifications . 420, 422

................................Speed Control . 250

........................Speed Limiter . 308, 313...................................Speedometer . 63

..........SRS, Additional Information . 21...Additional Safety Precautions . 32

.............................Airbag Service . 31......Airbag System Components . 21

How the Passenger Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 30

How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 30

..How the SRS Indicator Works . 29How Your Front Airbags

.........................................Work . 23...How Your Side Airbags Work . 27

How Your Side Curtain Airbags.........................................Work . 29

.............................SRS Indicator . 29, 57....START (Ignition Key Position) . 79

.......................Starting the Engine . 305In Cold Weather at High

..................................Altitude . 305................With a Dead Battery . 400

........Steam Coming from Engine . 403Steering Wheel

................................Adjustments . 76.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 79

.......Steering Wheel Buttons . 237, 250...................Stereo Sound System . 138

........................................Sun Visor . 119........................Sunglasses Holder . 119

Supplemental Restraint..................................System . 9, 21......................................Servicing . 31

.........................SRS Indicator . 29, 57...................System Components . 21

..................................Synthetic Oil . 351

.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 391

Index

T

VIII

10/07/12 17:18:55 31TE0630_453

CONTINUED

Technical Descriptions......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 424.....Emissions Control Systems . 430

Three Way Catalytic...............................Converter . 432

.......................Temperature Gauge . 65....................Temperature, Outside . 66

..............Tether Anchorage Points . 46................Theft Protection, Radio . 240

..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 432..........................Time, Setting the . 241

....................................Timing Belt . 364

....................................Tire Chains . 385.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 393

...........................Tire Information . 426.................................Tire Labeling . 426

Tire Pressure Monitoring............System (TPMS) . 326, 428

Low Tire Pressure...........................Indicator . 59, 326

Required Federal............................Explanation . 428

..................TPMS Indicator . 59, 327...............................................Tires . 379

..............................Air Pressure . 380........................................Chains . 385

.........................Checking Wear . 381..........................Compact Spare . 392

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 424.Glossary of Tire Terminology . 427

......................................Inflation . 379..................................Inspection . 381...................................Replacing . 384

......................................Rotating . 383................................Service Life . 382

...........................................Snow . 385....................Specifications . 421, 423

...................Tools, Tire Changing . 393Towing

.....................................A Trailer . 329................Emergency Wrecker . 415

.............................Weight Limit . 329Transmission

Checking Fluid Level,..............................Automatic . 357

Checking Fluid Level,...........................Manual . 359, 360

..........Fluid Selection . 358, 359, 361..............Identification Number . 419.............Shifting the Automatic . 309

..................Shifting the Manual . 306.....................................Treadwear . 381

.......................................Trip Meter . 65................................................Trunk . 91

....................Emergency Opener . 92.................................Opening the . 91

............................Open Indicator . 61....................................Turn Signals . 70

Unexpected, Taking Care of...............................................the . 391

....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 424........................Unleaded Gasoline . 284

USB Adapter..................Cable . 165, 175, 215, 225

.USB Flash Memory Device . 172, 222.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 353

................................Vanity Mirror . 119.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 298

.............Vehicle Dimensions . 420, 422....Vehicle Identification Number . 418

Index

IND

EX

U

V

IX

10/07/12 17:19:02 31TE0630_454

＊

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA )....................................System . 324

...............VSA Off Indicator . 62, 324.........................VSA Off Switch . 325

........VSA System Indicator . 62, 324.............................Vehicle Storage . 388

.............................Ventilation . 127, 133.................................................VIN . 418

..................................Viscosity, Oil . 351...........Voice Control System . 131, 181

............WARNING, Explanation of . iii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 52

....................Warranty Coverages . 437Washers, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 356.......................................Indicator . 60.....................................Operation . 69

Wheels...............Adjusting the Steering . 76............Alignment and Balance . 382

..........................Compact Spare . 392..............................Wrench, Nut . 394

Windows.............................Auto Reverse . 109

................Operating the Power . 108...........................Rear, Defogger . 75

Windshield.......................................Cleaning . 69...........................Defroster . 128, 134

.......................................Washers . 69Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 376.....................................Operation . 69

....................................Worn Tires . 381.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 415

.............................XM Radio . 147, 194

U.S. only:

Index

X

W

X

10/07/12 17:19:08 31TE0630_455

10/07/12 17:19:10 31TE0630_456

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):Manual Transmission Fluid:

Power Steering Fluid:

Brake Fluid:

Spare Tire Pressure:

V6 models

V6 models

5-speed manual transmission:

6-speed manual transmission:

4-cylinder models

4-cylinder modelsUnleaded gasoline, pump octanenumber of 87 or higher.

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

Honda Manual TransmissionFluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30or 10W-40 motor oil as atemporary replacement (see page

).18.5 US gal (70.0 )

Front/Rear:

Front/Rear:32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

API Premium grade 0W-20detergent oil (see page ).

4.2 US qt (4.0 )

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

2.0 US qt (1.9 )

2.2 US qt (2.1 ) 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Honda ATF DW-1 (automatictransmission fluid) (see page ).

350

359

364

362

358

10/07/12 17:19:28 31TE0630_457

Date post:	15-Jul-2020
Category:	Documents
Upload:	others
View:	0 times
Download:	0 times

2011Accord Coupetechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/A51111/A51111OM.pdfsystems unique to your...

Documents